diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'old/sseas10h.htm')
| -rw-r--r-- | old/sseas10h.htm | 9701 |
1 files changed, 9701 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/old/sseas10h.htm b/old/sseas10h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..86d0518 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/sseas10h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,9701 @@ +<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN"> +<html> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=US-ASCII"> +<title>In the South Seas</title> +</head> +<body> +<h2> +<a href="#startoftext">In the South Seas, by Robert Louis Stevenson</a> +</h2> +<pre> +The Project Gutenberg EBook of In the South Seas, by Robert Louis Stevenson +(#20 in our series by Robert Louis Stevenson) + +Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the +copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing +this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook. + +This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project +Gutenberg file. Please do not remove it. Do not change or edit the +header without written permission. + +Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the +eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file. Included is +important information about your specific rights and restrictions in +how the file may be used. You can also find out about how to make a +donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved. + + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** + +**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** + +*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!***** + + +Title: In the South Seas + +Author: Robert Louis Stevenson + +Release Date: March, 1996 [EBook #464] +[This file was first posted on January 23, 1996] +[Most recently updated: August 18, 2002] + +Edition: 10 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII +</pre> +<p> +<a name="startoftext"></a> +Transcribed from the 1908 Chatto & Windus edition by David Price, +email ccx074@coventry.ac.uk<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +IN THE SOUTH SEAS<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +PART 1: THE MARQUESAS<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER I - AN ISLAND LANDFALL<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +For nearly ten years my health had been declining; and for some while +before I set forth upon my voyage, I believed I was come to the afterpiece +of life, and had only the nurse and undertaker to expect. It was +suggested that I should try the South Seas; and I was not unwilling +to visit like a ghost, and be carried like a bale, among scenes that +had attracted me in youth and health. I chartered accordingly +Dr. Merrit’s schooner yacht, the <i>Casco</i>, seventy-four tons +register; sailed from San Francisco towards the end of June 1888, visited +the eastern islands, and was left early the next year at Honolulu. +Hence, lacking courage to return to my old life of the house and sick-room, +I set forth to leeward in a trading schooner, the <i>Equator</i>, of +a little over seventy tons, spent four months among the atolls (low +coral islands) of the Gilbert group, and reached Samoa towards the close +of ‘89. By that time gratitude and habit were beginning +to attach me to the islands; I had gained a competency of strength; +I had made friends; I had learned new interests; the time of my voyages +had passed like days in fairyland; and I decided to remain. I +began to prepare these pages at sea, on a third cruise, in the trading +steamer <i>Janet Nicoll</i>. If more days are granted me, they +shall be passed where I have found life most pleasant and man most interesting; +the axes of my black boys are already clearing the foundations of my +future house; and I must learn to address readers from the uttermost +parts of the sea.<br> +<br> +That I should thus have reversed the verdict of Lord Tennyson’s +hero is less eccentric than appears. Few men who come to the islands +leave them; they grow grey where they alighted; the palm shades and +the trade-wind fans them till they die, perhaps cherishing to the last +the fancy of a visit home, which is rarely made, more rarely enjoyed, +and yet more rarely repeated. No part of the world exerts the +same attractive power upon the visitor, and the task before me is to +communicate to fireside travellers some sense of its seduction, and +to describe the life, at sea and ashore, of many hundred thousand persons, +some of our own blood and language, all our contemporaries, and yet +as remote in thought and habit as Rob Roy or Barbarossa, the Apostles +or the Caesars.<br> +<br> +The first experience can never be repeated. The first love, the +first sunrise, the first South Sea island, are memories apart and touched +a virginity of sense. On the 28th of July 1888 the moon was an +hour down by four in the morning. In the east a radiating centre +of brightness told of the day; and beneath, on the skyline, the morning +bank was already building, black as ink. We have all read of the +swiftness of the day’s coming and departure in low latitudes; +it is a point on which the scientific and sentimental tourist are at +one, and has inspired some tasteful poetry. The period certainly +varies with the season; but here is one case exactly noted. Although +the dawn was thus preparing by four, the sun was not up till six; and +it was half-past five before we could distinguish our expected islands +from the clouds on the horizon. Eight degrees south, and the day +two hours a-coming. The interval was passed on deck in the silence +of expectation, the customary thrill of landfall heightened by the strangeness +of the shores that we were then approaching. Slowly they took +shape in the attenuating darkness. Ua-huna, piling up to a truncated +summit, appeared the first upon the starboard bow; almost abeam arose +our destination, Nuka-hiva, whelmed in cloud; and betwixt and to the +southward, the first rays of the sun displayed the needles of Ua-pu. +These pricked about the line of the horizon; like the pinnacles of some +ornate and monstrous church, they stood there, in the sparkling brightness +of the morning, the fit signboard of a world of wonders.<br> +<br> +Not one soul aboard the <i>Casco</i> had set foot upon the islands, +or knew, except by accident, one word of any of the island tongues; +and it was with something perhaps of the same anxious pleasure as thrilled +the bosom of discoverers that we drew near these problematic shores. +The land heaved up in peaks and rising vales; it fell in cliffs and +buttresses; its colour ran through fifty modulations in a scale of pearl +and rose and olive; and it was crowned above by opalescent clouds. +The suffusion of vague hues deceived the eye; the shadows of clouds +were confounded with the articulations of the mountains; and the isle +and its unsubstantial canopy rose and shimmered before us like a single +mass. There was no beacon, no smoke of towns to be expected, no +plying pilot. Somewhere, in that pale phantasmagoria of cliff +and cloud, our haven lay concealed; and somewhere to the east of it +- the only sea-mark given - a certain headland, known indifferently +as Cape Adam and Eve, or Cape Jack and Jane, and distinguished by two +colossal figures, the gross statuary of nature. These we were +to find; for these we craned and stared, focused glasses, and wrangled +over charts; and the sun was overhead and the land close ahead before +we found them. To a ship approaching, like the <i>Casco</i>, from +the north, they proved indeed the least conspicuous features of a striking +coast; the surf flying high above its base; strange, austere, and feathered +mountains rising behind; and Jack and Jane, or Adam and Eve, impending +like a pair of warts above the breakers.<br> +<br> +Thence we bore away along shore. On our port beam we might hear +the explosions of the surf; a few birds flew fishing under the prow; +there was no other sound or mark of life, whether of man or beast, in +all that quarter of the island. Winged by her own impetus and +the dying breeze, the <i>Casco</i> skimmed under cliffs, opened out +a cove, showed us a beach and some green trees, and flitted by again, +bowing to the swell. The trees, from our distance, might have +been hazel; the beach might have been in Europe; the mountain forms +behind modelled in little from the Alps, and the forest which clustered +on their ramparts a growth no more considerable than our Scottish heath. +Again the cliff yawned, but now with a deeper entry; and the <i>Casco</i>, +hauling her wind, began to slide into the bay of Anaho. The cocoa-palm, +that giraffe of vegetables, so graceful, so ungainly, to the European +eye so foreign, was to be seen crowding on the beach, and climbing and +fringing the steep sides of mountains. Rude and bare hills embraced +the inlet upon either hand; it was enclosed to the landward by a bulk +of shattered mountains. In every crevice of that barrier the forest +harboured, roosting and nestling there like birds about a ruin; and +far above, it greened and roughened the razor edges of the summit.<br> +<br> +Under the eastern shore, our schooner, now bereft of any breeze, continued +to creep in: the smart creature, when once under way, appearing motive +in herself. From close aboard arose the bleating of young lambs; +a bird sang in the hillside; the scent of the land and of a hundred +fruits or flowers flowed forth to meet us; and, presently, a house or +two appeared, standing high upon the ankles of the hills, and one of +these surrounded with what seemed a garden. These conspicuous +habitations, that patch of culture, had we but known it, were a mark +of the passage of whites; and we might have approached a hundred islands +and not found their parallel. It was longer ere we spied the native +village, standing (in the universal fashion) close upon a curve of beach, +close under a grove of palms; the sea in front growling and whitening +on a concave arc of reef. For the cocoa-tree and the island man +are both lovers and neighbours of the surf. ‘The coral waxes, +the palm grows, but man departs,’ says the sad Tahitian proverb; +but they are all three, so long as they endure, co-haunters of the beach. +The mark of anchorage was a blow-hole in the rocks, near the south-easterly +corner of the bay. Punctually to our use, the blow-hole spouted; +the schooner turned upon her heel; the anchor plunged. It was +a small sound, a great event; my soul went down with these moorings +whence no windlass may extract nor any diver fish it up; and I, and +some part of my ship’s company, were from that hour the bondslaves +of the isles of Vivien.<br> +<br> +Before yet the anchor plunged a canoe was already paddling from the +hamlet. It contained two men: one white, one brown and tattooed +across the face with bands of blue, both in immaculate white European +clothes: the resident trader, Mr. Regler, and the native chief, Taipi-Kikino. +‘Captain, is it permitted to come on board?’ were the first +words we heard among the islands. Canoe followed canoe till the +ship swarmed with stalwart, six-foot men in every stage of undress; +some in a shirt, some in a loin-cloth, one in a handkerchief imperfectly +adjusted; some, and these the more considerable, tattooed from head +to foot in awful patterns; some barbarous and knived; one, who sticks +in my memory as something bestial, squatting on his hams in a canoe, +sucking an orange and spitting it out again to alternate sides with +ape-like vivacity - all talking, and we could not understand one word; +all trying to trade with us who had no thought of trading, or offering +us island curios at prices palpably absurd. There was no word +of welcome; no show of civility; no hand extended save that of the chief +and Mr. Regler. As we still continued to refuse the proffered +articles, complaint ran high and rude; and one, the jester of the party, +railed upon our meanness amid jeering laughter. Amongst other +angry pleasantries - ‘Here is a mighty fine ship,’ said +he, ‘to have no money on board!’ I own I was inspired +with sensible repugnance; even with alarm. The ship was manifestly +in their power; we had women on board; I knew nothing of my guests beyond +the fact that they were cannibals; the Directory (my only guide) was +full of timid cautions; and as for the trader, whose presence might +else have reassured me, were not whites in the Pacific the usual instigators +and accomplices of native outrage? When he reads this confession, +our kind friend, Mr. Regler, can afford to smile.<br> +<br> +Later in the day, as I sat writing up my journal, the cabin was filled +from end to end with Marquesans: three brown-skinned generations, squatted +cross-legged upon the floor, and regarding me in silence with embarrassing +eyes. The eyes of all Polynesians are large, luminous, and melting; +they are like the eyes of animals and some Italians. A kind of +despair came over me, to sit there helpless under all these staring +orbs, and be thus blocked in a corner of my cabin by this speechless +crowd: and a kind of rage to think they were beyond the reach of articulate +communication, like furred animals, or folk born deaf, or the dwellers +of some alien planet.<br> +<br> +To cross the Channel is, for a boy of twelve, to change heavens; to +cross the Atlantic, for a man of twenty-four, is hardly to modify his +diet. But I was now escaped out of the shadow of the Roman empire, +under whose toppling monuments we were all cradled, whose laws and letters +are on every hand of us, constraining and preventing. I was now +to see what men might be whose fathers had never studied Virgil, had +never been conquered by Caesar, and never been ruled by the wisdom of +Gaius or Papinian. By the same step I had journeyed forth out +of that comfortable zone of kindred languages, where the curse of Babel +is so easy to be remedied; and my new fellow-creatures sat before me +dumb like images. Methought, in my travels, all human relation +was to be excluded; and when I returned home (for in those days I still +projected my return) I should have but dipped into a picture-book without +a text. Nay, and I even questioned if my travels should be much +prolonged; perhaps they were destined to a speedy end; perhaps my subsequent +friend, Kauanui, whom I remarked there, sitting silent with the rest, +for a man of some authority, might leap from his hams with an ear-splitting +signal, the ship be carried at a rush, and the ship’s company +butchered for the table.<br> +<br> +There could be nothing more natural than these apprehensions, nor anything +more groundless. In my experience of the islands, I had never +again so menacing a reception; were I to meet with such to-day, I should +be more alarmed and tenfold more surprised. The majority of Polynesians +are easy folk to get in touch with, frank, fond of notice, greedy of +the least affection, like amiable, fawning dogs; and even with the Marquesans, +so recently and so imperfectly redeemed from a blood-boltered barbarism, +all were to become our intimates, and one, at least, was to mourn sincerely +our departure.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER II - MAKING FRIENDS<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +The impediment of tongues was one that I particularly over-estimated. +The languages of Polynesia are easy to smatter, though hard to speak +with elegance. And they are extremely similar, so that a person +who has a tincture of one or two may risk, not without hope, an attempt +upon the others.<br> +<br> +And again, not only is Polynesian easy to smatter, but interpreters +abound. Missionaries, traders, and broken white folk living on +the bounty of the natives, are to be found in almost every isle and +hamlet; and even where these are unserviceable, the natives themselves +have often scraped up a little English, and in the French zone (though +far less commonly) a little French-English, or an efficient pidgin, +what is called to the westward ‘Beach-la-Mar,’ comes easy +to the Polynesian; it is now taught, besides, in the schools of Hawaii; +and from the multiplicity of British ships, and the nearness of the +States on the one hand and the colonies on the other, it may be called, +and will almost certainly become, the tongue of the Pacific. I +will instance a few examples. I met in Majuro a Marshall Island +boy who spoke excellent English; this he had learned in the German firm +in Jaluit, yet did not speak one word of German. I heard from +a gendarme who had taught school in Rapa-iti that while the children +had the utmost difficulty or reluctance to learn French, they picked +up English on the wayside, and as if by accident. On one of the +most out-of-the-way atolls in the Carolines, my friend Mr. Benjamin +Hird was amazed to find the lads playing cricket on the beach and talking +English; and it was in English that the crew of the <i>Janet Nicoll</i>, +a set of black boys from different Melanesian islands, communicated +with other natives throughout the cruise, transmitted orders, and sometimes +jested together on the fore-hatch. But what struck me perhaps +most of all was a word I heard on the verandah of the Tribunal at Noumea. +A case had just been heard - a trial for infanticide against an ape-like +native woman; and the audience were smoking cigarettes as they awaited +the verdict. An anxious, amiable French lady, not far from tears, +was eager for acquittal, and declared she would engage the prisoner +to be her children’s nurse. The bystanders exclaimed at +the proposal; the woman was a savage, said they, and spoke no language. +‘<i>Mais, vous savez</i>,’ objected the fair sentimentalist; +‘<i>ils apprennent si vite l’anglais</i>!’<br> +<br> +But to be able to speak to people is not all. And in the first +stage of my relations with natives I was helped by two things. +To begin with, I was the show-man of the <i>Casco</i>. She, her +fine lines, tall spars, and snowy decks, the crimson fittings of the +saloon, and the white, the gilt, and the repeating mirrors of the tiny +cabin, brought us a hundred visitors. The men fathomed out her +dimensions with their arms, as their fathers fathomed out the ships +of Cook; the women declared the cabins more lovely than a church; bouncing +Junos were never weary of sitting in the chairs and contemplating in +the glass their own bland images; and I have seen one lady strip up +her dress, and, with cries of wonder and delight, rub herself bare-breeched +upon the velvet cushions. Biscuit, jam, and syrup was the entertainment; +and, as in European parlours, the photograph album went the round. +This sober gallery, their everyday costumes and physiognomies, had become +transformed, in three weeks’ sailing, into things wonderful and +rich and foreign; alien faces, barbaric dresses, they were now beheld +and fingered, in the swerving cabin, with innocent excitement and surprise. +Her Majesty was often recognised, and I have seen French subjects kiss +her photograph; Captain Speedy - in an Abyssinian war-dress, supposed +to be the uniform of the British army - met with much acceptance; and +the effigies of Mr. Andrew Lang were admired in the Marquesas. +There is the place for him to go when he shall be weary of Middlesex +and Homer.<br> +<br> +It was perhaps yet more important that I had enjoyed in my youth some +knowledge of our Scots folk of the Highlands and the Islands. +Not much beyond a century has passed since these were in the same convulsive +and transitionary state as the Marquesans of to-day. In both cases +an alien authority enforced, the clans disarmed, the chiefs deposed, +new customs introduced, and chiefly that fashion of regarding money +as the means and object of existence. The commercial age, in each, +succeeding at a bound to an age of war abroad and patriarchal communism +at home. In one the cherished practice of tattooing, in the other +a cherished costume, proscribed. In each a main luxury cut off: +beef, driven under cloud of night from Lowland pastures, denied to the +meat-loving Highlander; long-pig, pirated from the next village, to +the man-eating Kanaka. The grumbling, the secret ferment, the +fears and resentments, the alarms and sudden councils of Marquesan chiefs, +reminded me continually of the days of Lovat and Struan. Hospitality, +tact, natural fine manners, and a touchy punctilio, are common to both +races: common to both tongues the trick of dropping medial consonants. +Here is a table of two widespread Polynesian words:-<br> +<br> +<br> +<pre> </pre><pre><i>House</i></pre><pre>. </pre><pre><i>Love. + +</i></pre><pre>Tahitian FARE AROHA + +New Zealand WHARE + +Samoan FALE TALOFA + +Manihiki FALE ALOHA + +Hawaiian HALE ALOHA + +Marquesan HA’E KAOHA + + +</pre><p>The elision of medial consonants, so marked in these Marquesan +instances, is no less common both in Gaelic and the Lowland Scots. +Stranger still, that prevalent Polynesian sound, the so-called catch, +written with an apostrophe, and often or always the gravestone of a +perished consonant, is to be heard in Scotland to this day. When +a Scot pronounces water, better, or bottle - <i>wa’er, be’er</i>, +or <i>bo’le</i> - the sound is precisely that of the catch; and +I think we may go beyond, and say, that if such a population could be +isolated, and this mispronunciation should become the rule, it might +prove the first stage of transition from <i>t</i> to <i>k</i>, which +is the disease of Polynesian languages. The tendency of the Marquesans, +however, is to urge against consonants, or at least on the very common +letter <i>l</i>, a war of mere extermination. A hiatus is agreeable +to any Polynesian ear; the ear even of the stranger soon grows used +to these barbaric voids; but only in the Marquesan will you find such +names as <i>Haaii</i> and <i>Paaaeua</i>, when each individual vowel +must be separately uttered.<br> +<br> +These points of similarity between a South Sea people and some of my +own folk at home ran much in my head in the islands; and not only inclined +me to view my fresh acquaintances with favour, but continually modified +my judgment. A polite Englishman comes to-day to the Marquesans +and is amazed to find the men tattooed; polite Italians came not long +ago to England and found our fathers stained with woad; and when I paid +the return visit as a little boy, I was highly diverted with the backwardness +of Italy: so insecure, so much a matter of the day and hour, is the +pre-eminence of race. It was so that I hit upon a means of communication +which I recommend to travellers. When I desired any detail of +savage custom, or of superstitious belief, I cast back in the story +of my fathers, and fished for what I wanted with some trait of equal +barbarism: Michael Scott, Lord Derwentwater’s head, the second-sight, +the Water Kelpie, - each of these I have found to be a killing bait; +the black bull’s head of Stirling procured me the legend of <i>Rahero</i>; +and what I knew of the Cluny Macphersons, or the Appin Stewarts, enabled +me to learn, and helped me to understand, about the <i>Tevas</i> of +Tahiti. The native was no longer ashamed, his sense of kinship +grew warmer, and his lips were opened. It is this sense of kinship +that the traveller must rouse and share; or he had better content himself +with travels from the blue bed to the brown. And the presence +of one Cockney titterer will cause a whole party to walk in clouds of +darkness.<br> +<br> +The hamlet of Anaho stands on a margin of flat land between the west +of the beach and the spring of the impending mountains. A grove +of palms, perpetually ruffling its green fans, carpets it (as for a +triumph) with fallen branches, and shades it like an arbour. A +road runs from end to end of the covert among beds of flowers, the milliner’s +shop of the community; and here and there, in the grateful twilight, +in an air filled with a diversity of scents, and still within hearing +of the surf upon the reef, the native houses stand in scattered neighbourhood. +The same word, as we have seen, represents in many tongues of Polynesia, +with scarce a shade of difference, the abode of man. But although +the word be the same, the structure itself continually varies; and the +Marquesan, among the most backward and barbarous of islanders, is yet +the most commodiously lodged. The grass huts of Hawaii, the birdcage +houses of Tahiti, or the open shed, with the crazy Venetian blinds, +of the polite Samoan - none of these can be compared with the Marquesan +<i>paepae-hae</i>, or dwelling platform. The paepae is an oblong +terrace built without cement or black volcanic stone, from twenty to +fifty feet in length, raised from four to eight feet from the earth, +and accessible by a broad stair. Along the back of this, and coming +to about half its width, runs the open front of the house, like a covered +gallery: the interior sometimes neat and almost elegant in its bareness, +the sleeping space divided off by an endlong coaming, some bright raiment +perhaps hanging from a nail, and a lamp and one of White’s sewing-machines +the only marks of civilization. On the outside, at one end of +the terrace, burns the cooking-fire under a shed; at the other there +is perhaps a pen for pigs; the remainder is the evening lounge and <i>al +fresco</i> banquet-hall of the inhabitants. To some houses water +is brought down the mountains in bamboo pipes, perforated for the sake +of sweetness. With the Highland comparison in my mind, I was struck +to remember the sluttish mounds of turf and stone in which I have sat +and been entertained in the Hebrides and the North Islands. Two +things, I suppose, explain the contrast. In Scotland wood is rare, +and with materials so rude as turf and stone the very hope of neatness +is excluded. And in Scotland it is cold. Shelter and a hearth +are needs so pressing that a man looks not beyond; he is out all day +after a bare bellyful, and at night when he saith, ‘Aha, it is +warm!’ he has not appetite for more. Or if for something +else, then something higher; a fine school of poetry and song arose +in these rough shelters, and an air like ‘<i>Lochaber no more</i>’ +is an evidence of refinement more convincing, as well as more imperishable, +than a palace.<br> +<br> +To one such dwelling platform a considerable troop of relatives and +dependants resort. In the hour of the dusk, when the fire blazes, +and the scent of the cooked breadfruit fills the air, and perhaps the +lamp glints already between the pillars and the house, you shall behold +them silently assemble to this meal, men, women, and children; and the +dogs and pigs frisk together up the terrace stairway, switching rival +tails. The strangers from the ship were soon equally welcome: +welcome to dip their fingers in the wooden dish, to drink cocoanuts, +to share the circulating pipe, and to hear and hold high debate about +the misdeeds of the French, the Panama Canal, or the geographical position +of San Francisco and New Yo’ko. In a Highland hamlet, quite +out of reach of any tourist, I have met the same plain and dignified +hospitality.<br> +<br> +I have mentioned two facts - the distasteful behaviour of our earliest +visitors, and the case of the lady who rubbed herself upon the cushions +- which would give a very false opinion of Marquesan manners. +The great majority of Polynesians are excellently mannered; but the +Marquesan stands apart, annoying and attractive, wild, shy, and refined. +If you make him a present he affects to forget it, and it must be offered +him again at his going: a pretty formality I have found nowhere else. +A hint will get rid of any one or any number; they are so fiercely proud +and modest; while many of the more lovable but blunter islanders crowd +upon a stranger, and can be no more driven off than flies. A slight +or an insult the Marquesan seems never to forget. I was one day +talking by the wayside with my friend Hoka, when I perceived his eyes +suddenly to flash and his stature to swell. A white horseman was +coming down the mountain, and as he passed, and while he paused to exchange +salutations with myself, Hoka was still staring and ruffling like a +gamecock. It was a Corsican who had years before called him <i>cochon +sauvage - coçon chauvage</i>, as Hoka mispronounced it. +With people so nice and so touchy, it was scarce to be supposed that +our company of greenhorns should not blunder into offences. Hoka, +on one of his visits, fell suddenly in a brooding silence, and presently +after left the ship with cold formality. When he took me back +into favour, he adroitly and pointedly explained the nature of my offence: +I had asked him to sell cocoa-nuts; and in Hoka’s view articles +of food were things that a gentleman should give, not sell; or at least +that he should not sell to any friend. On another occasion I gave +my boat’s crew a luncheon of chocolate and biscuits. I had +sinned, I could never learn how, against some point of observance; and +though I was drily thanked, my offerings were left upon the beach. +But our worst mistake was a slight we put on Toma, Hoka’s adoptive +father, and in his own eyes the rightful chief of Anaho. In the +first place, we did not call upon him, as perhaps we should, in his +fine new European house, the only one in the hamlet. In the second, +when we came ashore upon a visit to his rival, Taipi-Kikino, it was +Toma whom we saw standing at the head of the beach, a magnificent figure +of a man, magnificently tattooed; and it was of Toma that we asked our +question: ‘Where is the chief?’ ‘What chief?’ +cried Toma, and turned his back on the blasphemers. Nor did he +forgive us. Hoka came and went with us daily; but, alone I believe +of all the countryside, neither Toma nor his wife set foot on board +the <i>Casco</i>. The temptation resisted it is hard for a European +to compute. The flying city of Laputa moored for a fortnight in +St. James’s Park affords but a pale figure of the <i>Casco</i> +anchored before Anaho; for the Londoner has still his change of pleasures, +but the Marquesan passes to his grave through an unbroken uniformity +of days.<br> +<br> +On the afternoon before it was intended we should sail, a valedictory +party came on board: nine of our particular friends equipped with gifts +and dressed as for a festival. Hoka, the chief dancer and singer, +the greatest dandy of Anaho, and one of the handsomest young fellows +in the world-sullen, showy, dramatic, light as a feather and strong +as an ox - it would have been hard, on that occasion, to recognise, +as he sat there stooped and silent, his face heavy and grey. It +was strange to see the lad so much affected; stranger still to recognise +in his last gift one of the curios we had refused on the first day, +and to know our friend, so gaily dressed, so plainly moved at our departure, +for one of the half-naked crew that had besieged and insulted us on +our arrival: strangest of all, perhaps, to find, in that carved handle +of a fan, the last of those curiosities of the first day which had now +all been given to us by their possessors - their chief merchandise, +for which they had sought to ransom us as long as we were strangers, +which they pressed on us for nothing as soon as we were friends. +The last visit was not long protracted. One after another they +shook hands and got down into their canoe; when Hoka turned his back +immediately upon the ship, so that we saw his face no more. Taipi, +on the other hand, remained standing and facing us with gracious valedictory +gestures; and when Captain Otis dipped the ensign, the whole party saluted +with their hats. This was the farewell; the episode of our visit +to Anaho was held concluded; and though the <i>Casco</i> remained nearly +forty hours at her moorings, not one returned on board, and I am inclined +to think they avoided appearing on the beach. This reserve and +dignity is the finest trait of the Marquesan.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER III - THE MAROON<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +Of the beauties of Anaho books might be written. I remember waking +about three, to find the air temperate and scented. The long swell +brimmed into the bay, and seemed to fill it full and then subside. +Gently, deeply, and silently the <i>Casco</i> rolled; only at times +a block piped like a bird. Oceanward, the heaven was bright with +stars and the sea with their reflections. If I looked to that +side, I might have sung with the Hawaiian poet:<br> +<br> +<br> +<i>Ua maomao ka lani, ua kahaea luna,<br> +Ua pipi ka maka o ka hoku.<br> +</i>(The heavens were fair, they stretched above,<br> +Many were the eyes of the stars.)<br> +<br> +<br> +And then I turned shoreward, and high squalls were overhead; the mountains +loomed up black; and I could have fancied I had slipped ten thousand +miles away and was anchored in a Highland loch; that when the day came, +it would show pine, and heather, and green fern, and roofs of turf sending +up the smoke of peats; and the alien speech that should next greet my +ears must be Gaelic, not Kanaka.<br> +<br> +And day, when it came, brought other sights and thoughts. I have +watched the morning break in many quarters of the world; it has been +certainly one of the chief joys of my existence, and the dawn that I +saw with most emotion shone upon the bay of Anaho. The mountains +abruptly overhang the port with every variety of surface and of inclination, +lawn, and cliff, and forest. Not one of these but wore its proper +tint of saffron, of sulphur, of the clove, and of the rose. The +lustre was like that of satin; on the lighter hues there seemed to float +an efflorescence; a solemn bloom appeared on the more dark. The +light itself was the ordinary light of morning, colourless and clean; +and on this ground of jewels, pencilled out the least detail of drawing. +Meanwhile, around the hamlet, under the palms, where the blue shadow +lingered, the red coals of cocoa husk and the light trails of smoke +betrayed the awakening business of the day; along the beach men and +women, lads and lasses, were returning from the bath in bright raiment, +red and blue and green, such as we delighted to see in the coloured +little pictures of our childhood; and presently the sun had cleared +the eastern hill, and the glow of the day was over all.<br> +<br> +The glow continued and increased, the business, from the main part, +ceased before it had begun. Twice in the day there was a certain +stir of shepherding along the seaward hills. At times a canoe +went out to fish. At times a woman or two languidly filled a basket +in the cotton patch. At times a pipe would sound out of the shadow +of a house, ringing the changes on its three notes, with an effect like +<i>Que le</i> <i>jour me dure</i>, repeated endlessly. Or at times, +across a corner of the bay, two natives might communicate in the Marquesan +manner with conventional whistlings. All else was sleep and silence. +The surf broke and shone around the shores; a species of black crane +fished in the broken water; the black pigs were continually galloping +by on some affair; but the people might never have awaked, or they might +all be dead.<br> +<br> +My favourite haunt was opposite the hamlet, where was a landing in a +cove under a lianaed cliff. The beach was lined with palms and +a tree called the purao, something between the fig and mulberry in growth, +and bearing a flower like a great yellow poppy with a maroon heart. +In places rocks encroached upon the sand; the beach would be all submerged; +and the surf would bubble warmly as high as to my knees, and play with +cocoa-nut husks as our more homely ocean plays with wreck and wrack +and bottles. As the reflux drew down, marvels of colour and design +streamed between my feet; which I would grasp at, miss, or seize: now +to find them what they promised, shells to grace a cabinet or be set +in gold upon a lady’s finger; now to catch only <i>maya</i> of +coloured sand, pounded fragments and pebbles, that, as soon as they +were dry, became as dull and homely as the flints upon a garden path. +I have toiled at this childish pleasure for hours in the strong sun, +conscious of my incurable ignorance; but too keenly pleased to be ashamed. +Meanwhile, the blackbird (or his tropical understudy) would be fluting +in the thickets overhead.<br> +<br> +A little further, in the turn of the bay, a streamlet trickled in the +bottom of a den, thence spilling down a stair of rock into the sea. +The draught of air drew down under the foliage in the very bottom of +the den, which was a perfect arbour for coolness. In front it +stood open on the blue bay and the <i>Casco</i> lying there under her +awning and her cheerful colours. Overhead was a thatch of puraos, +and over these again palms brandished their bright fans, as I have seen +a conjurer make himself a halo out of naked swords. For in this +spot, over a neck of low land at the foot of the mountains, the trade-wind +streams into Anaho Bay in a flood of almost constant volume and velocity, +and of a heavenly coolness.<br> +<br> +It chanced one day that I was ashore in the cove, with Mrs. Stevenson +and the ship’s cook. Except for the <i>Casco</i> lying outside, +and a crane or two, and the ever-busy wind and sea, the face of the +world was of a prehistoric emptiness; life appeared to stand stock-still, +and the sense of isolation was profound and refreshing. On a sudden, +the trade-wind, coming in a gust over the isthmus, struck and scattered +the fans of the palms above the den; and, behold! in two of the tops +there sat a native, motionless as an idol and watching us, you would +have said, without a wink. The next moment the tree closed, and +the glimpse was gone. This discovery of human presences latent +overhead in a place where we had supposed ourselves alone, the immobility +of our tree-top spies, and the thought that perhaps at all hours we +were similarly supervised, struck us with a chill. Talk languished +on the beach. As for the cook (whose conscience was not clear), +he never afterwards set foot on shore, and twice, when the <i>Casco</i> +appeared to be driving on the rocks, it was amusing to observe that +man’s alacrity; death, he was persuaded, awaiting him upon the +beach. It was more than a year later, in the Gilberts, that the +explanation dawned upon myself. The natives were drawing palm-tree +wine, a thing forbidden by law; and when the wind thus suddenly revealed +them, they were doubtless more troubled than ourselves.<br> +<br> +At the top of the den there dwelt an old, melancholy, grizzled man of +the name of Tari (Charlie) Coffin. He was a native of Oahu, in +the Sandwich Islands; and had gone to sea in his youth in the American +whalers; a circumstance to which he owed his name, his English, his +down-east twang, and the misfortune of his innocent life. For +one captain, sailing out of New Bedford, carried him to Nuka-hiva and +marooned him there among the cannibals. The motive for this act +was inconceivably small; poor Tari’s wages, which were thus economised, +would scarce have shook the credit of the New Bedford owners. +And the act itself was simply murder. Tari’s life must have +hung in the beginning by a hair. In the grief and terror of that +time, it is not unlikely he went mad, an infirmity to which he was still +liable; or perhaps a child may have taken a fancy to him and ordained +him to be spared. He escaped at least alive, married in the island, +and when I knew him was a widower with a married son and a granddaughter. +But the thought of Oahu haunted him; its praise was for ever on his +lips; he beheld it, looking back, as a place of ceaseless feasting, +song, and dance; and in his dreams I daresay he revisits it with joy. +I wonder what he would think if he could be carried there indeed, and +see the modern town of Honolulu brisk with traffic, and the palace with +its guards, and the great hotel, and Mr. Berger’s band with their +uniforms and outlandish instruments; or what he would think to see the +brown faces grown so few and the white so many; and his father’s +land sold, for planting sugar, and his father’s house quite perished, +or perhaps the last of them struck leprous and immured between the surf +and the cliffs on Molokai? So simply, even in South Sea Islands, +and so sadly, the changes come.<br> +<br> +Tari was poor, and poorly lodged. His house was a wooden frame, +run up by Europeans; it was indeed his official residence, for Tari +was the shepherd of the promontory sheep. I can give a perfect +inventory of its contents: three kegs, a tin biscuit-box, an iron saucepan, +several cocoa-shell cups, a lantern, and three bottles, probably containing +oil; while the clothes of the family and a few mats were thrown across +the open rafters. Upon my first meeting with this exile he had +conceived for me one of the baseless island friendships, had given me +nuts to drink, and carried me up the den ‘to see my house’ +- the only entertainment that he had to offer. He liked the ‘Amelican,’ +he said, and the ‘Inglisman,’ but the ‘Flessman’ +was his abhorrence; and he was careful to explain that if he had thought +us ‘Fless,’ we should have had none of his nuts, and never +a sight of his house. His distaste for the French I can partly +understand, but not at all his toleration of the Anglo-Saxon. +The next day he brought me a pig, and some days later one of our party +going ashore found him in act to bring a second. We were still +strange to the islands; we were pained by the poor man’s generosity, +which he could ill afford, and, by a natural enough but quite unpardonable +blunder, we refused the pig. Had Tari been a Marquesan we should +have seen him no more; being what he was, the most mild, long-suffering, +melancholy man, he took a revenge a hundred times more painful. +Scarce had the canoe with the nine villagers put off from their farewell +before the <i>Casco</i> was boarded from the other side. It was +Tari; coming thus late because he had no canoe of his own, and had found +it hard to borrow one; coming thus solitary (as indeed we always saw +him), because he was a stranger in the land, and the dreariest of company. +The rest of my family basely fled from the encounter. I must receive +our injured friend alone; and the interview must have lasted hard upon +an hour, for he was loath to tear himself away. ‘You go +’way. I see you no more - no, sir!’ he lamented; and +then looking about him with rueful admiration, ‘This goodee ship +- no, sir! - goodee ship!’ he would exclaim: the ‘no, sir,’ +thrown out sharply through the nose upon a rising inflection, an echo +from New Bedford and the fallacious whaler. From these expressions +of grief and praise, he would return continually to the case of the +rejected pig. ‘I like give present all ‘e same you,’ +he complained; ‘only got pig: you no take him!’ He +was a poor man; he had no choice of gifts; he had only a pig, he repeated; +and I had refused it. I have rarely been more wretched than to +see him sitting there, so old, so grey, so poor, so hardly fortuned, +of so rueful a countenance, and to appreciate, with growing keenness, +the affront which I had so innocently dealt him; but it was one of those +cases in which speech is vain.<br> +<br> +Tari’s son was smiling and inert; his daughter-in-law, a girl +of sixteen, pretty, gentle, and grave, more intelligent than most Anaho +women, and with a fair share of French; his grandchild, a mite of a +creature at the breast. I went up the den one day when Tari was +from home, and found the son making a cotton sack, and madame suckling +mademoiselle. When I had sat down with them on the floor, the +girl began to question me about England; which I tried to describe, +piling the pan and the cocoa shells one upon another to represent the +houses, and explaining, as best I was able, and by word and gesture, +the over-population, the hunger, and the perpetual toil. ‘<i>Pas</i> +<i>de cocotiers? pas do popoi</i>?’ she asked. I told her +it was too cold, and went through an elaborate performance, shutting +out draughts, and crouching over an imaginary fire, to make sure she +understood. But she understood right well; remarked it must be +bad for the health, and sat a while gravely reflecting on that picture +of unwonted sorrows. I am sure it roused her pity, for it struck +in her another thought always uppermost in the Marquesan bosom; and +she began with a smiling sadness, and looking on me out of melancholy +eyes, to lament the decease of her own people. ‘<i>Ici pas +de</i> <i>Kanaques</i>,’ said she; and taking the baby from her +breast, she held it out to me with both her hands. ‘<i>Tenez</i> +- a little baby like this; then dead. All the Kanaques die. +Then no more.’ The smile, and this instancing by the girl-mother +of her own tiny flesh and blood, affected me strangely; they spoke of +so tranquil a despair. Meanwhile the husband smilingly made his +sack; and the unconscious babe struggled to reach a pot of raspberry +jam, friendship’s offering, which I had just brought up the den; +and in a perspective of centuries I saw their case as ours, death coming +in like a tide, and the day already numbered when there should be no +more Beretani, and no more of any race whatever, and (what oddly touched +me) no more literary works and no more readers.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER IV - DEATH<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +The thought of death, I have said, is uppermost in the mind of the Marquesan. +It would be strange if it were otherwise. The race is perhaps +the handsomest extant. Six feet is about the middle height of +males; they are strongly muscled, free from fat, swift in action, graceful +in repose; and the women, though fatter and duller, are still comely +animals. To judge by the eye, there is no race more viable; and +yet death reaps them with both hands. When Bishop Dordillon first +came to Tai-o-hae, he reckoned the inhabitants at many thousands; he +was but newly dead, and in the same bay Stanislao Moanatini counted +on his fingers eight residual natives. Or take the valley of Hapaa, +known to readers of Herman Melville under the grotesque misspelling +of Hapar. There are but two writers who have touched the South +Seas with any genius, both Americans: Melville and Charles Warren Stoddard; +and at the christening of the first and greatest, some influential fairy +must have been neglected: ‘He shall be able to see,’ ‘He +shall be able to tell,’ ‘He shall be able to charm,’ +said the friendly godmothers; ‘But he shall not be able to hear,’ +exclaimed the last. The tribe of Hapaa is said to have numbered +some four hundred, when the small-pox came and reduced them by one-fourth. +Six months later a woman developed tubercular consumption; the disease +spread like a fire about the valley, and in less than a year two survivors, +a man and a woman, fled from that new-created solitude. A similar +Adam and Eve may some day wither among new races, the tragic residue +of Britain. When I first heard this story the date staggered me; +but I am now inclined to think it possible. Early in the year +of my visit, for example, or late the year before, a first case of phthisis +appeared in a household of seventeen persons, and by the month of August, +when the tale was told me, one soul survived, and that was a boy who +had been absent at his schooling. And depopulation works both +ways, the doors of death being set wide open, and the door of birth +almost closed. Thus, in the half-year ending July 1888 there were +twelve deaths and but one birth in the district of the Hatiheu. +Seven or eight more deaths were to be looked for in the ordinary course; +and M. Aussel, the observant gendarme, knew of but one likely birth. +At this rate it is no matter of surprise if the population in that part +should have declined in forty years from six thousand to less than four +hundred; which are, once more on the authority of M. Aussel, the estimated +figures. And the rate of decline must have even accelerated towards +the end.<br> +<br> +A good way to appreciate the depopulation is to go by land from Anaho +to Hatiheu on the adjacent bay. The road is good travelling, but +cruelly steep. We seemed scarce to have passed the deserted house +which stands highest in Anaho before we were looking dizzily down upon +its roof; the <i>Casco</i> well out in the bay, and rolling for a wager, +shrank visibly; and presently through the gap of Tari’s isthmus, +Ua-huna was seen to hang cloudlike on the horizon. Over the summit, +where the wind blew really chill, and whistled in the reed-like grass, +and tossed the grassy fell of the pandanus, we stepped suddenly, as +through a door, into the next vale and bay of Hatiheu. A bowl +of mountains encloses it upon three sides. On the fourth this +rampart has been bombarded into ruins, runs down to seaward in imminent +and shattered crags, and presents the one practicable breach of the +blue bay. The interior of this vessel is crowded with lovely and +valuable trees, - orange, breadfruit, mummy-apple, cocoa, the island +chestnut, and for weeds, the pine and the banana. Four perennial +streams water and keep it green; and along the dell, first of one, then +of another, of these, the road, for a considerable distance, descends +into this fortunate valley. The song of the waters and the familiar +disarray of boulders gave us a strong sense of home, which the exotic +foliage, the daft-like growth of the pandanus, the buttressed trunk +of the banyan, the black pigs galloping in the bush, and the architecture +of the native houses dissipated ere it could be enjoyed.<br> +<br> +The houses on the Hatiheu side begin high up; higher yet, the more melancholy +spectacle of empty paepaes. When a native habitation is deserted, +the superstructure - pandanus thatch, wattle, unstable tropical timber +- speedily rots, and is speedily scattered by the wind. Only the +stones of the terrace endure; nor can any ruin, cairn, or standing stone, +or vitrified fort present a more stern appearance of antiquity. +We must have passed from six to eight of these now houseless platforms. +On the main road of the island, where it crosses the valley of Taipi, +Mr. Osbourne tells me they are to be reckoned by the dozen; and as the +roads have been made long posterior to their erection, perhaps to their +desertion, and must simply be regarded as lines drawn at random through +the bush, the forest on either hand must be equally filled with these +survivals: the gravestones of whole families. Such ruins are tapu +in the strictest sense; no native must approach them; they have become +outposts of the kingdom of the grave. It might appear a natural +and pious custom in the hundreds who are left, the rearguard of perished +thousands, that their feet should leave untrod these hearthstones of +their fathers. I believe, in fact, the custom rests on different +and more grim conceptions. But the house, the grave, and even +the body of the dead, have been always particularly honoured by Marquesans. +Until recently the corpse was sometimes kept in the family and daily +oiled and sunned, until, by gradual and revolting stages, it dried into +a kind of mummy. Offerings are still laid upon the grave. +In Traitor’s Bay, Mr. Osbourne saw a man buy a looking-glass to +lay upon his son’s. And the sentiment against the desecration +of tombs, thoughtlessly ruffled in the laying down of the new roads, +is a chief ingredient in the native hatred for the French.<br> +<br> +The Marquesan beholds with dismay the approaching extinction of his +race. The thought of death sits down with him to meat, and rises +with him from his bed; he lives and breathes under a shadow of mortality +awful to support; and he is so inured to the apprehension that he greets +the reality with relief. He does not even seek to support a disappointment; +at an affront, at a breach of one of his fleeting and communistic love-affairs, +he seeks an instant refuge in the grave. Hanging is now the fashion. +I heard of three who had hanged themselves in the west end of Hiva-oa +during the first half of 1888; but though this be a common form of suicide +in other parts of the South Seas, I cannot think it will continue popular +in the Marquesas. Far more suitable to Marquesan sentiment is +the old form of poisoning with the fruit of the eva, which offers to +the native suicide a cruel but deliberate death, and gives time for +those decencies of the last hour, to which he attaches such remarkable +importance. The coffin can thus be at hand, the pigs killed, the +cry of the mourners sounding already through the house; and then it +is, and not before, that the Marquesan is conscious of achievement, +his life all rounded in, his robes (like Caesar’s) adjusted for +the final act. Praise not any man till he is dead, said the ancients; +envy not any man till you hear the mourners, might be the Marquesan +parody. The coffin, though of late introduction, strangely engages +their attention. It is to the mature Marquesan what a watch is +to the European schoolboy. For ten years Queen Vaekehu had dunned +the fathers; at last, but the other day, they let her have her will, +gave her her coffin, and the woman’s soul is at rest. I +was told a droll instance of the force of this preoccupation. +The Polynesians are subject to a disease seemingly rather of the will +than of the body. I was told the Tahitians have a word for it, +<i>erimatua</i>, but cannot find it in my dictionary. A gendarme, +M. Nouveau, has seen men beginning to succumb to this insubstantial +malady, has routed them from their houses, turned them on to do their +trick upon the roads, and in two days has seen them cured. But +this other remedy is more original: a Marquesan, dying of this discouragement +- perhaps I should rather say this acquiescence - has been known, at +the fulfilment of his crowning wish, on the mere sight of that desired +hermitage, his coffin - to revive, recover, shake off the hand of death, +and be restored for years to his occupations - carving tikis (idols), +let us say, or braiding old men’s beards. From all this +it may be conceived how easily they meet death when it approaches naturally. +I heard one example, grim and picturesque. In the time of the +small-pox in Hapaa, an old man was seized with the disease; he had no +thought of recovery; had his grave dug by a wayside, and lived in it +for near a fortnight, eating, drinking, and smoking with the passers-by, +talking mostly of his end, and equally unconcerned for himself and careless +of the friends whom he infected.<br> +<br> +This proneness to suicide, and loose seat in life, is not peculiar to +the Marquesan. What is peculiar is the widespread depression and +acceptance of the national end. Pleasures are neglected, the dance +languishes, the songs are forgotten. It is true that some, and +perhaps too many, of them are proscribed; but many remain, if there +were spirit to support or to revive them. At the last feast of +the Bastille, Stanislao Moanatini shed tears when he beheld the inanimate +performance of the dancers. When the people sang for us in Anaho, +they must apologise for the smallness of their repertory. They +were only young folk present, they said, and it was only the old that +knew the songs. The whole body of Marquesan poetry and music was +being suffered to die out with a single dispirited generation. +The full import is apparent only to one acquainted with other Polynesian +races; who knows how the Samoan coins a fresh song for every trifling +incident, or who has heard (on Penrhyn, for instance) a band of little +stripling maids from eight to twelve keep up their minstrelsy for hours +upon a stretch, one song following another without pause. In like +manner, the Marquesan, never industrious, begins now to cease altogether +from production. The exports of the group decline out of all proportion +even with the death-rate of the islanders. ‘The coral waxes, +the palm grows, and man departs,’ says the Marquesan; and he folds +his hands. And surely this is nature. Fond as it may appear, +we labour and refrain, not for the rewards of any single life, but with +a timid eye upon the lives and memories of our successors; and where +no one is to succeed, of his own family, or his own tongue, I doubt +whether Rothschilds would make money or Cato practise virtue. +It is natural, also, that a temporary stimulus should sometimes rouse +the Marquesan from his lethargy. Over all the landward shore of +Anaho cotton runs like a wild weed; man or woman, whoever comes to pick +it, may earn a dollar in the day; yet when we arrived, the trader’s +store-house was entirely empty; and before we left it was near full. +So long as the circus was there, so long as the <i>Casco</i> was yet +anchored in the bay, it behoved every one to make his visit; and to +this end every woman must have a new dress, and every man a shirt and +trousers. Never before, in Mr. Regler’s experience, had +they displayed so much activity.<br> +<br> +In their despondency there is an element of dread. The fear of +ghosts and of the dark is very deeply written in the mind of the Polynesian; +not least of the Marquesan. Poor Taipi, the chief of Anaho, was +condemned to ride to Hatiheu on a moonless night. He borrowed +a lantern, sat a long while nerving himself for the adventure, and when +he at last departed, wrung the <i>Cascos</i> by the hand as for a final +separation. Certain presences, called Vehinehae, frequent and +make terrible the nocturnal roadside; I was told by one they were like +so much mist, and as the traveller walked into them dispersed and dissipated; +another described them as being shaped like men and having eyes like +cats; from none could I obtain the smallest clearness as to what they +did, or wherefore they were dreaded. We may be sure at least they +represent the dead; for the dead, in the minds of the islanders, are +all-pervasive. ‘When a native says that he is a man,’ +writes Dr. Codrington, ‘he means that he is a man and not a ghost; +not that he is a man and not a beast. The intelligent agents of +this world are to his mind the men who are alive, and the ghosts the +men who are dead.’ Dr. Codrington speaks of Melanesia; from +what I have learned his words are equally true of the Polynesian. +And yet more. Among cannibal Polynesians a dreadful suspicion +rests generally on the dead; and the Marquesans, the greatest cannibals +of all, are scarce likely to be free from similar beliefs. I hazard +the guess that the Vehinehae are the hungry spirits of the dead, continuing +their life’s business of the cannibal ambuscade, and lying everywhere +unseen, and eager to devour the living. Another superstition I +picked up through the troubled medium of Tari Coffin’s English. +The dead, he told me, came and danced by night around the paepae of +their former family; the family were thereupon overcome by some emotion +(but whether of pious sorrow or of fear I could not gather), and must +‘make a feast,’ of which fish, pig, and popoi were indispensable +ingredients. So far this is clear enough. But here Tari +went on to instance the new house of Toma and the house-warming feast +which was just then in preparation as instances in point. Dare +we indeed string them together, and add the case of the deserted ruin, +as though the dead continually besieged the paepaes of the living: were +kept at arm’s-length, even from the first foundation, only by +propitiatory feasts, and, so soon as the fire of life went out upon +the hearth, swarmed back into possession of their ancient seat?<br> +<br> +I speak by guess of these Marquesan superstitions. On the cannibal +ghost I shall return elsewhere with certainty. And it is enough, +for the present purpose, to remark that the men of the Marquesas, from +whatever reason, fear and shrink from the presence of ghosts. +Conceive how this must tell upon the nerves in islands where the number +of the dead already so far exceeds that of the living, and the dead +multiply and the living dwindle at so swift a rate. Conceive how +the remnant huddles about the embers of the fire of life; even as old +Red Indians, deserted on the march and in the snow, the kindly tribe +all gone, the last flame expiring, and the night around populous with +wolves.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER V - DEPOPULATION<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +Over the whole extent of the South Seas, from one tropic to another, +we find traces of a bygone state of over-population, when the resources +of even a tropical soil were taxed, and even the improvident Polynesian +trembled for the future. We may accept some of the ideas of Mr. +Darwin’s theory of coral islands, and suppose a rise of the sea, +or the subsidence of some former continental area, to have driven into +the tops of the mountains multitudes of refugees. Or we may suppose, +more soberly, a people of sea-rovers, emigrants from a crowded country, +to strike upon and settle island after island, and as time went on to +multiply exceedingly in their new seats. In either case the end +must be the same; soon or late it must grow apparent that the crew are +too numerous, and that famine is at hand. The Polynesians met +this emergent danger with various expedients of activity and prevention. +A way was found to preserve breadfruit by packing it in artificial pits; +pits forty feet in depth and of proportionate bore are still to be seen, +I am told, in the Marquesas; and yet even these were insufficient for +the teeming people, and the annals of the past are gloomy with famine +and cannibalism. Among the Hawaiians - a hardier people, in a +more exacting climate - agriculture was carried far; the land was irrigated +with canals; and the fish-ponds of Molokai prove the number and diligence +of the old inhabitants. Meanwhile, over all the island world, +abortion and infanticide prevailed. On coral atolls, where the +danger was most plainly obvious, these were enforced by law and sanctioned +by punishment. On Vaitupu, in the Ellices, only two children were +allowed to a couple; on Nukufetau, but one. On the latter the +punishment was by fine; and it is related that the fine was sometimes +paid, and the child spared.<br> +<br> +This is characteristic. For no people in the world are so fond +or so long-suffering with children - children make the mirth and the +adornment of their homes, serving them for playthings and for picture-galleries. +‘Happy is the man that has his quiver full of them.’ +The stray bastard is contended for by rival families; and the natural +and the adopted children play and grow up together undistinguished. +The spoiling, and I may almost say the deification, of the child, is +nowhere carried so far as in the eastern islands; and furthest, according +to my opportunities of observation, in the Paumotu group, the so-called +Low or Dangerous Archipelago. I have seen a Paumotuan native turn +from me with embarrassment and disaffection because I suggested that +a brat would be the better for a beating. It is a daily matter +in some eastern islands to see a child strike or even stone its mother, +and the mother, so far from punishing, scarce ventures to resist. +In some, when his child was born, a chief was superseded and resigned +his name; as though, like a drone, he had then fulfilled the occasion +of his being. And in some the lightest words of children had the +weight of oracles. Only the other day, in the Marquesas, if a +child conceived a distaste to any stranger, I am assured the stranger +would be slain. And I shall have to tell in another place an instance +of the opposite: how a child in Manihiki having taken a fancy to myself, +her adoptive parents at once accepted the situation and loaded me with +gifts.<br> +<br> +With such sentiments the necessity for child-destruction would not fail +to clash, and I believe we find the trace of divided feeling in the +Tahitian brotherhood of Oro. At a certain date a new god was added +to the Society-Island Olympus, or an old one refurbished and made popular. +Oro was his name, and he may be compared with the Bacchus of the ancients. +His zealots sailed from bay to bay, and from island to island; they +were everywhere received with feasting; wore fine clothes; sang, danced, +acted; gave exhibitions of dexterity and strength; and were the artists, +the acrobats, the bards, and the harlots of the group. Their life +was public and epicurean; their initiation a mystery; and the highest +in the land aspired to join the brotherhood. If a couple stood +next in line to a high-chieftaincy, they were suffered, on grounds of +policy, to spare one child; all other children, who had a father or +a mother in the company of Oro, stood condemned from the moment of conception. +A freemasonry, an agnostic sect, a company of artists, its members all +under oath to spread unchastity, and all forbidden to leave offspring +- I do not know how it may appear to others, but to me the design seems +obvious. Famine menacing the islands, and the needful remedy repulsive, +it was recommended to the native mind by these trappings of mystery, +pleasure, and parade. This is the more probable, and the secret, +serious purpose of the institution appears the more plainly, if it be +true that, after a certain period of life, the obligation of the votary +was changed; at first, bound to be profligate: afterwards, expected +to be chaste.<br> +<br> +Here, then, we have one side of the case. Man-eating among kindly +men, child-murder among child-lovers, industry in a race the most idle, +invention in a race the least progressive, this grim, pagan salvation-army +of the brotherhood of Oro, the report of early voyagers, the widespread +vestiges of former habitation, and the universal tradition of the islands, +all point to the same fact of former crowding and alarm. And to-day +we are face to face with the reverse. To-day in the Marquesas, +in the Eight Islands of Hawaii, in Mangareva, in Easter Island, we find +the same race perishing like flies. Why this change? Or, +grant that the coming of the whites, the change of habits, and the introduction +of new maladies and vices, fully explain the depopulation, why is that +depopulation not universal? The population of Tahiti, after a +period of alarming decrease, has again become stationary. I hear +of a similar result among some Maori tribes; in many of the Paumotus +a slight increase is to be observed; and the Samoans are to-day as healthy +and at least as fruitful as before the change. Grant that the +Tahitians, the Maoris, and the Paumotuans have become inured to the +new conditions; and what are we to make of the Samoans, who have never +suffered?<br> +<br> +Those who are acquainted only with a single group are apt to be ready +with solutions. Thus I have heard the mortality of the Maoris +attributed to their change of residence - from fortified hill-tops to +the low, marshy vicinity of their plantations. How plausible! +And yet the Marquesans are dying out in the same houses where their +fathers multiplied. Or take opium. The Marquesas and Hawaii +are the two groups the most infected with this vice; the population +of the one is the most civilised, that of the other by far the most +barbarous, of Polynesians; and they are two of those that perish the +most rapidly. Here is a strong case against opium. But let +us take unchastity, and we shall find the Marquesas and Hawaii figuring +again upon another count. Thus, Samoans are the most chaste of +Polynesians, and they are to this day entirely fertile; Marquesans are +the most debauched: we have seen how they are perishing; Hawaiians are +notoriously lax, and they begin to be dotted among deserts. So +here is a case stronger still against unchastity; and here also we have +a correction to apply. Whatever the virtues of the Tahitian, neither +friend nor enemy dares call him chaste; and yet he seems to have outlived +the time of danger. One last example: syphilis has been plausibly +credited with much of the sterility. But the Samoans are, by all +accounts, as fruitful as at first; by some accounts more so; and it +is not seriously to be argued that the Samoans have escaped syphilis.<br> +<br> +These examples show how dangerous it is to reason from any particular +cause, or even from many in a single group. I have in my eye an +able and amiable pamphlet by the Rev. S. E. Bishop: ‘Why are the +Hawaiians Dying Out?’ Any one interested in the subject +ought to read this tract, which contains real information; and yet Mr. +Bishop’s views would have been changed by an acquaintance with +other groups. Samoa is, for the moment, the main and the most +instructive exception to the rule. The people are the most chaste +and one of the most temperate of island peoples. They have never +been tried and depressed with any grave pestilence. Their clothing +has scarce been tampered with; at the simple and becoming tabard of +the girls, Tartuffe, in many another island, would have cried out; for +the cool, healthy, and modest lava-lava or kilt, Tartuffe has managed +in many another island to substitute stifling and inconvenient trousers. +Lastly, and perhaps chiefly, so far from their amusements having been +curtailed, I think they have been, upon the whole, extended. The +Polynesian falls easily into despondency: bereavement, disappointment, +the fear of novel visitations, the decay or proscription of ancient +pleasures, easily incline him to be sad; and sadness detaches him from +life. The melancholy of the Hawaiian and the emptiness of his +new life are striking; and the remark is yet more apposite to the Marquesas. +In Samoa, on the other hand, perpetual song and dance, perpetual games, +journeys, and pleasures, make an animated and a smiling picture of the +island life. And the Samoans are to-day the gayest and the best +entertained inhabitants of our planet. The importance of this +can scarcely be exaggerated. In a climate and upon a soil where +a livelihood can be had for the stooping, entertainment is a prime necessity. +It is otherwise with us, where life presents us with a daily problem, +and there is a serious interest, and some of the heat of conflict, in +the mere continuing to be. So, in certain atolls, where there +is no great gaiety, but man must bestir himself with some vigour for +his daily bread, public health and the population are maintained; but +in the lotos islands, with the decay of pleasures, life itself decays. +It is from this point of view that we may instance, among other causes +of depression, the decay of war. We have been so long used in +Europe to that dreary business of war on the great scale, trailing epidemics +and leaving pestilential corpses in its train, that we have almost forgotten +its original, the most healthful, if not the most humane, of all field +sports - hedge-warfare. From this, as well as from the rest of +his amusements and interests, the islander, upon a hundred islands, +has been recently cut off. And to this, as well as to so many +others, the Samoan still makes good a special title.<br> +<br> +Upon the whole, the problem seems to me to stand thus:- Where there +have been fewest changes, important or unimportant, salutary or hurtful, +there the race survives. Where there have been most, important +or unimportant, salutary or hurtful, there it perishes. Each change, +however small, augments the sum of new conditions to which the race +has to become inured. There may seem, <i>a priori</i>, no comparison +between the change from ‘sour toddy’ to bad gin, and that +from the island kilt to a pair of European trousers. Yet I am +far from persuaded that the one is any more hurtful than the other; +and the unaccustomed race will sometimes die of pin-pricks. We +are here face to face with one of the difficulties of the missionary. +In Polynesian islands he easily obtains pre-eminent authority; the king +becomes his <i>mairedupalais</i>; he can proscribe, he can command; +and the temptation is ever towards too much. Thus (by all accounts) +the Catholics in Mangareva, and thus (to my own knowledge) the Protestants +in Hawaii, have rendered life in a more or less degree unliveable to +their converts. And the mild, uncomplaining creatures (like children +in a prison) yawn and await death. It is easy to blame the missionary. +But it is his business to make changes. It is surely his business, +for example, to prevent war; and yet I have instanced war itself as +one of the elements of health. On the other hand, it were, perhaps, +easy for the missionary to proceed more gently, and to regard every +change as an affair of weight. I take the average missionary; +I am sure I do him no more than justice when I suppose that he would +hesitate to bombard a village, even in order to convert an archipelago. +Experience begins to show us (at least in Polynesian islands) that change +of habit is bloodier than a bombardment.<br> +<br> +There is one point, ere I have done, where I may go to meet criticism. +I have said nothing of faulty hygiene, bathing during fevers, mistaken +treatment of children, native doctoring, or abortion - all causes frequently +adduced. And I have said nothing of them because they are conditions +common to both epochs, and even more efficient in the past than in the +present. Was it not the same with unchastity, it may be asked? +Was not the Polynesian always unchaste? Doubtless he was so always: +doubtless he is more so since the coming of his remarkably chaste visitors +from Europe. Take the Hawaiian account of Cook: I have no doubt +it is entirely fair. Take Krusenstern’s candid, almost innocent, +description of a Russian man-of-war at the Marquesas; consider the disgraceful +history of missions in Hawaii itself, where (in the war of lust) the +American missionaries were once shelled by an English adventurer, and +once raided and mishandled by the crew of an American warship; add the +practice of whaling fleets to call at the Marquesas, and carry off a +complement of women for the cruise; consider, besides, how the whites +were at first regarded in the light of demi-gods, as appears plainly +in the reception of Cook upon Hawaii; and again, in the story of the +discovery of Tutuila, when the really decent women of Samoa prostituted +themselves in public to the French; and bear in mind how it was the +custom of the adventurers, and we may almost say the business of the +missionaries, to deride and infract even the most salutary tapus. +Here we see every engine of dissolution directed at once against a virtue +never and nowhere very strong or popular; and the result, even in the +most degraded islands, has been further degradation. Mr. Lawes, +the missionary of Savage Island, told me the standard of female chastity +had declined there since the coming of the whites. In heathen +time, if a girl gave birth to a bastard, her father or brother would +dash the infant down the cliffs; and to-day the scandal would be small. +Or take the Marquesas. Stanislao Moanatini told me that in his +own recollection, the young were strictly guarded; they were not suffered +so much as to look upon one another in the street, but passed (so my +informant put it) like dogs; and the other day the whole school-children +of Nuka-hiva and Ua-pu escaped in a body to the woods, and lived there +for a fortnight in promiscuous liberty. Readers of travels may +perhaps exclaim at my authority, and declare themselves better informed. +I should prefer the statement of an intelligent native like Stanislao +(even if it stood alone, which it is far from doing) to the report of +the most honest traveller. A ship of war comes to a haven, anchors, +lands a party, receives and returns a visit, and the captain writes +a chapter on the manners of the island. It is not considered what +class is mostly seen. Yet we should not be pleased if a Lascar +foremast hand were to judge England by the ladies who parade Ratcliffe +Highway, and the gentlemen who share with them their hire. Stanislao’s +opinion of a decay of virtue even in these unvirtuous islands has been +supported to me by others; his very example, the progress of dissolution +amongst the young, is adduced by Mr. Bishop in Hawaii. And so +far as Marquesans are concerned, we might have hazarded a guess of some +decline in manners. I do not think that any race could ever have +prospered or multiplied with such as now obtain; I am sure they would +have been never at the pains to count paternal kinship. It is +not possible to give details; suffice it that their manners appear to +be imitated from the dreams of ignorant and vicious children, and their +debauches persevered in until energy, reason, and almost life itself +are in abeyance.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER VI - CHIEFS AND TAPUS<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +We used to admire exceedingly the bland and gallant manners of the chief +called Taipi-Kikino. An elegant guest at table, skilled in the +use of knife and fork, a brave figure when he shouldered a gun and started +for the woods after wild chickens, always serviceable, always ingratiating +and gay, I would sometimes wonder where he found his cheerfulness. +He had enough to sober him, I thought, in his official budget. +His expenses - for he was always seen attired in virgin white - must +have by far exceeded his income of six dollars in the year, or say two +shillings a month. And he was himself a man of no substance; his +house the poorest in the village. It was currently supposed that +his elder brother, Kauanui, must have helped him out. But how +comes it that the elder brother should succeed to the family estate, +and be a wealthy commoner, and the younger be a poor man, and yet rule +as chief in Anaho? That the one should be wealthy, and the other +almost indigent is probably to be explained by some adoption; for comparatively +few children are brought up in the house or succeed to the estates of +their natural begetters. That the one should be chief instead +of the other must be explained (in a very Irish fashion) on the ground +that neither of them is a chief at all.<br> +<br> +Since the return and the wars of the French, many chiefs have been deposed, +and many so-called chiefs appointed. We have seen, in the same +house, one such upstart drinking in the company of two such extruded +island Bourbons, men, whose word a few years ago was life and death, +now sunk to be peasants like their neighbours. So when the French +overthrew hereditary tyrants, dubbed the commons of the Marquesas freeborn +citizens of the republic, and endowed them with a vote for a <i>conseiller-général</i> +at Tahiti, they probably conceived themselves upon the path to popularity; +and so far from that, they were revolting public sentiment. The +deposition of the chiefs was perhaps sometimes needful; the appointment +of others may have been needful also; it was at least a delicate business. +The Government of George II. exiled many Highland magnates. It +never occurred to them to manufacture substitutes; and if the French +have been more bold, we have yet to see with what success.<br> +<br> +Our chief at Anaho was always called, he always called himself, Taipi-Kikino; +and yet that was not his name, but only the wand of his false position. +As soon as he was appointed chief, his name - which signified, if I +remember exactly, <i>Prince born among</i> <i>flowers</i> - fell in +abeyance, and he was dubbed instead by the expressive byword, Taipi-Kikino +- <i>Highwater man-of-no-account</i> - or, Englishing more boldly, <i>Beggar</i> +<i>on horseback</i> - a witty and a wicked cut. A nickname in +Polynesia destroys almost the memory of the original name. To-day, +if we were Polynesians, Gladstone would be no more heard of. We +should speak of and address our Nestor as the Grand Old Man, and it +is so that himself would sign his correspondence. Not the prevalence, +then, but the significancy of the nickname is to be noted here. +The new authority began with small prestige. Taipi has now been +some time in office; from all I saw he seemed a person very fit. +He is not the least unpopular, and yet his power is nothing. He +is a chief to the French, and goes to breakfast with the Resident; but +for any practical end of chieftaincy a rag doll were equally efficient.<br> +<br> +We had been but three days in Anaho when we received the visit of the +chief of Hatiheu, a man of weight and fame, late leader of a war upon +the French, late prisoner in Tahiti, and the last eater of long-pig +in Nuka-hiva. Not many years have elapsed since he was seen striding +on the beach of Anaho, a dead man’s arm across his shoulder. +‘So does Kooamua to his enemies!’ he roared to the passers-by, +and took a bite from the raw flesh. And now behold this gentleman, +very wisely replaced in office by the French, paying us a morning visit +in European clothes. He was the man of the most character we had +yet seen: his manners genial and decisive, his person tall, his face +rugged, astute, formidable, and with a certain similarity to Mr. Gladstone’s +- only for the brownness of the skin, and the high-chief’s tattooing, +all one side and much of the other being of an even blue. Further +acquaintance increased our opinion of his sense. He viewed the +<i>Casco</i> in a manner then quite new to us, examining her lines and +the running of the gear; to a piece of knitting on which one of the +party was engaged, he must have devoted ten minutes’ patient study; +nor did he desist before he had divined the principles; and he was interested +even to excitement by a type-writer, which he learned to work. +When he departed he carried away with him a list of his family, with +his own name printed by his own hand at the bottom. I should add +that he was plainly much of a humorist, and not a little of a humbug. +He told us, for instance, that he was a person of exact sobriety; such +being the obligation of his high estate: the commons might be sots, +but the chief could not stoop so low. And not many days after +he was to be observed in a state of smiling and lop-sided imbecility, +the <i>Casco</i> ribbon upside down on his dishonoured hat.<br> +<br> +But his business that morning in Anaho is what concerns us here. +The devil-fish, it seems, were growing scarce upon the reef; it was +judged fit to interpose what we should call a close season; for that +end, in Polynesia, a tapu (vulgarly spelt ‘taboo’) has to +be declared, and who was to declare it? Taipi might; he ought; +it was a chief part of his duty; but would any one regard the inhibition +of a Beggar on Horse-back? He might plant palm branches: it did +not in the least follow that the spot was sacred. He might recite +the spell: it was shrewdly supposed the spirits would not hearken. +And so the old, legitimate cannibal must ride over the mountains to +do it for him; and the respectable official in white clothes could but +look on and envy. At about the same time, though in a different +manner, Kooamua established a forest law. It was observed the +cocoa-palms were suffering, for the plucking of green nuts impoverishes +and at last endangers the tree. Now Kooamua could tapu the reef, +which was public property, but he could not tapu other people’s +palms; and the expedient adopted was interesting. He tapu’d +his own trees, and his example was imitated over all Hatiheu and Anaho. +I fear Taipi might have tapu’d all that he possessed and found +none to follow him. So much for the esteem in which the dignity +of an appointed chief is held by others; a single circumstance will +show what he thinks of it himself. I never met one, but he took +an early opportunity to explain his situation. True, he was only +an appointed chief when I beheld him; but somewhere else, perhaps upon +some other isle, he was a chieftain by descent: upon which ground, he +asked me (so to say it) to excuse his mushroom honours.<br> +<br> +It will be observed with surprise that both these tapus are for thoroughly +sensible ends. With surprise, I say, because the nature of that +institution is much misunderstood in Europe. It is taken usually +in the sense of a meaningless or wanton prohibition, such as that which +to-day prevents women in some countries from smoking, or yesterday prevented +any one in Scotland from taking a walk on Sunday. The error is +no less natural than it is unjust. The Polynesians have not been +trained in the bracing, practical thought of ancient Rome; with them +the idea of law has not been disengaged from that of morals or propriety; +so that tapu has to cover the whole field, and implies indifferently +that an act is criminal, immoral, against sound public policy, unbecoming +or (as we say) ‘not in good form.’ Many tapus were +in consequence absurd enough, such as those which deleted words out +of the language, and particularly those which related to women. +Tapu encircled women upon all hands. Many things were forbidden +to men; to women we may say that few were permitted. They must +not sit on the paepae; they must not go up to it by the stair; they +must not eat pork; they must not approach a boat; they must not cook +at a fire which any male had kindled. The other day, after the +roads were made, it was observed the women plunged along margin through +the bush, and when they came to a bridge waded through the water: roads +and bridges were the work of men’s hands, and tapu for the foot +of women. Even a man’s saddle, if the man be native, is +a thing no self-respecting lady dares to use. Thus on the Anaho +side of the island, only two white men, Mr. Regler and the gendarme, +M. Aussel, possess saddles; and when a woman has a journey to make she +must borrow from one or other. It will be noticed that these prohibitions +tend, most of them, to an increased reserve between the sexes. +Regard for female chastity is the usual excuse for these disabilities +that men delight to lay upon their wives and mothers. Here the +regard is absent; and behold the women still bound hand and foot with +meaningless proprieties! The women themselves, who are survivors +of the old regimen, admit that in those days life was not worth living. +And yet even then there were exceptions. There were female chiefs +and (I am assured) priestesses besides; nice customs curtseyed to great +dames, and in the most sacred enclosure of a High Place, Father Siméon +Delmar was shown a stone, and told it was the throne of some well-descended +lady. How exactly parallel is this with European practice, when +princesses were suffered to penetrate the strictest cloister, and women +could rule over a land in which they were denied the control of their +own children.<br> +<br> +But the tapu is more often the instrument of wise and needful restrictions. +We have seen it as the organ of paternal government. It serves +besides to enforce, in the rare case of some one wishing to enforce +them, rights of private property. Thus a man, weary of the coming +and going of Marquesan visitors, tapus his door; and to this day you +may see the palm-branch signal, even as our great-grandfathers saw the +peeled wand before a Highland inn. Or take another case. +Anaho is known as ‘the country without popoi.’ The +word popoi serves in different islands to indicate the main food of +the people: thus, in Hawaii, it implies a preparation of taro; in the +Marquesas, of breadfruit. And a Marquesan does not readily conceive +life possible without his favourite diet. A few years ago a drought +killed the breadfruit trees and the bananas in the district of Anaho; +and from this calamity, and the open-handed customs of the island, a +singular state of things arose. Well-watered Hatiheu had escaped +the drought; every householder of Anaho accordingly crossed the pass, +chose some one in Hatiheu, ‘gave him his name’ - an onerous +gift, but one not to be rejected - and from this improvised relative +proceeded to draw his supplies, for all the world as though he had paid +for them. Hence a continued traffic on the road. Some stalwart +fellow, in a loin-cloth, and glistening with sweat, may be seen at all +hours of the day, a stick across his bare shoulders, tripping nervously +under a double burthen of green fruits. And on the far side of +the gap a dozen stone posts on the wayside in the shadow of a grove +mark the breathing-space of the popoi-carriers. A little back +from the beach, and not half a mile from Anaho, I was the more amazed +to find a cluster of well-doing breadfruits heavy with their harvest. +‘Why do you not take these?’ I asked. ‘Tapu,’ +said Hoka; and I thought to myself (after the manner of dull travellers) +what children and fools these people were to toil over the mountain +and despoil innocent neighbours when the staff of life was thus growing +at their door. I was the more in error. In the general destruction +these surviving trees were enough only for the family of the proprietor, +and by the simple expedient of declaring a tapu he enforced his right.<br> +<br> +The sanction of the tapu is superstitious; and the punishment of infraction +either a wasting or a deadly sickness. A slow disease follows +on the eating of tapu fish, and can only be cured with the bones of +the same fish burned with the due mysteries. The cocoa-nut and +breadfruit tapu works more swiftly. Suppose you have eaten tapu +fruit at the evening meal, at night your sleep will be uneasy; in the +morning, swelling and a dark discoloration will have attacked your neck, +whence they spread upward to the face; and in two days, unless the cure +be interjected, you must die. This cure is prepared from the rubbed +leaves of the tree from which the patient stole; so that he cannot be +saved without confessing to the Tahuku the person whom he wronged. +In the experience of my informant, almost no tapu had been put in use, +except the two described: he had thus no opportunity to learn the nature +and operation of the others; and, as the art of making them was jealously +guarded amongst the old men, he believed the mystery would soon die +out. I should add that he was no Marquesan, but a Chinaman, a +resident in the group from boyhood, and a reverent believer in the spells +which he described. White men, amongst whom Ah Fu included himself, +were exempt; but he had a tale of a Tahitian woman, who had come to +the Marquesas, eaten tapu fish, and, although uninformed of her offence +and danger, had been afflicted and cured exactly like a native.<br> +<br> +Doubtless the belief is strong; doubtless, with this weakly and fanciful +race, it is in many cases strong enough to kill; it should be strong +indeed in those who tapu their trees secretly, so that they may detect +a depredator by his sickness. Or, perhaps, we should understand +the idea of the hidden tapu otherwise, as a politic device to spread +uneasiness and extort confessions: so that, when a man is ailing, he +shall ransack his brain for any possible offence, and send at once for +any proprietor whose rights he has invaded. ‘Had you hidden +a tapu?’ we may conceive him asking; and I cannot imagine the +proprietor gainsaying it; and this is perhaps the strangest feature +of the system - that it should be regarded from without with such a +mental and implicit awe, and, when examined from within, should present +so many apparent evidences of design.<br> +<br> +We read in Dr. Campbell’s <i>Poenamo</i> of a New Zealand girl, +who was foolishly told that she had eaten a tapu yam, and who instantly +sickened, and died in the two days of simple terror. The period +is the same as in the Marquesas; doubtless the symptoms were so too. +How singular to consider that a superstition of such sway is possibly +a manufactured article; and that, even if it were not originally invented, +its details have plainly been arranged by the authorities of some Polynesian +Scotland Yard. Fitly enough, the belief is to-day - and was probably +always - far from universal. Hell at home is a strong deterrent +with some; a passing thought with others; with others, again, a theme +of public mockery, not always well assured; and so in the Marquesas +with the tapu. Mr. Regler has seen the two extremes of scepticism +and implicit fear. In the tapu grove he found one fellow stealing +breadfruit, cheerful and impudent as a street arab; and it was only +on a menace of exposure that he showed himself the least discountenanced. +The other case was opposed in every point. Mr. Regler asked a +native to accompany him upon a voyage; the man went gladly enough, but +suddenly perceiving a dead tapu fish in the bottom of the boat, leaped +back with a scream; nor could the promise of a dollar prevail upon him +to advance.<br> +<br> +The Marquesan, it will be observed, adheres to the old idea of the local +circumscription of beliefs and duties. Not only are the whites +exempt from consequences; but their transgressions seem to be viewed +without horror. It was Mr. Regler who had killed the fish; yet +the devout native was not shocked at Mr. Regler - only refused to join +him in his boat. A white is a white: the servant (so to speak) +of other and more liberal gods; and not to be blamed if he profit by +his liberty. The Jews were perhaps the first to interrupt this +ancient comity of faiths; and the Jewish virus is still strong in Christianity. +All the world must respect our tapus, or we gnash our teeth.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER VII - HATIHEU<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +The bays of Anaho and Hatiheu are divided at their roots by the knife-edge +of a single hill - the pass so often mentioned; but this isthmus expands +to the seaward in a considerable peninsula: very bare and grassy; haunted +by sheep and, at night and morning, by the piercing cries of the shepherds; +wandered over by a few wild goats; and on its sea-front indented with +long, clamorous caves, and faced with cliffs of the colour and ruinous +outline of an old peat-stack. In one of these echoing and sunless +gullies we saw, clustered like sea-birds on a splashing ledge, shrill +as sea-birds in their salutation to the passing boat, a group of fisherwomen, +stripped to their gaudy under-clothes. (The clash of the surf +and the thin female voices echo in my memory.) We had that day +a native crew and steersman, Kauanui; it was our first experience of +Polynesian seamanship, which consists in hugging every point of land. +There is no thought in this of saving time, for they will pull a long +way in to skirt a point that is embayed. It seems that, as they +can never get their houses near enough the surf upon the one side, so +they can never get their boats near enough upon the other. The +practice in bold water is not so dangerous as it looks - the reflex +from the rocks sending the boat off. Near beaches with a heavy +run of sea, I continue to think it very hazardous, and find the composure +of the natives annoying to behold. We took unmingled pleasure, +on the way out, to see so near at hand the beach and the wonderful colours +of the surf. On the way back, when the sea had risen and was running +strong against us, the fineness of the steersman’s aim grew more +embarrassing. As we came abreast of the sea-front, where the surf +broke highest, Kauanui embraced the occasion to light his pipe, which +then made the circuit of the boat - each man taking a whiff or two, +and, ere he passed it on, filling his lungs and cheeks with smoke. +Their faces were all puffed out like apples as we came abreast of the +cliff foot, and the bursting surge fell back into the boat in showers. +At the next point ‘cocanetti’ was the word, and the stroke +borrowed my knife, and desisted from his labours to open nuts. +These untimely indulgences may be compared to the tot of grog served +out before a ship goes into action.<br> +<br> +My purpose in this visit led me first to the boys’ school, for +Hatiheu is the university of the north islands. The hum of the +lesson came out to meet us. Close by the door, where the draught +blew coolest, sat the lay brother; around him, in a packed half-circle, +some sixty high-coloured faces set with staring eyes; and in the background +of the barn-like room benches were to be seen, and blackboards with +sums on them in chalk. The brother rose to greet us, sensibly +humble. Thirty years he had been there, he said, and fingered +his white locks as a bashful child pulls out his pinafore. <i>‘Et +point de résultats, monsieur, presque pas de résultats</i>.’ +He pointed to the scholars: ‘You see, sir, all the youth of Nuka-hiva +and Ua-pu. Between the ages of six and fifteen this is all that +remains; and it is but a few years since we had a hundred and twenty +from Nuka-hiva alone. <i>Oui, monsieur, cela se dépérit</i>.’ +Prayers, and reading and writing, prayers again and arithmetic, and +more prayers to conclude: such appeared to be the dreary nature of the +course. For arithmetic all island people have a natural taste. +In Hawaii they make good progress in mathematics. In one of the +villages on Majuro, and generally in the Marshall group, the whole population +sit about the trader when he is weighing copra, and each on his own +slate takes down the figures and computes the total. The trader, +finding them so apt, introduced fractions, for which they had been taught +no rule. At first they were quite gravelled but ultimately, by +sheer hard thinking, reasoned out the result, and came one after another +to assure the trader he was right. Not many people in Europe could +have done the like. The course at Hatiheu is therefore less dispiriting +to Polynesians than a stranger might have guessed; and yet how bald +it is at best! I asked the brother if he did not tell them stories, +and he stared at me; if he did not teach them history, and he said, +‘O yes, they had a little Scripture history - from the New Testament’; +and repeated his lamentations over the lack of results. I had +not the heart to put more questions; I could but say it must be very +discouraging, and resist the impulse to add that it seemed also very +natural. He looked up - ‘My days are far spent,’ he +said; ‘heaven awaits me.’ May that heaven forgive +me, but I was angry with the old man and his simple consolation. +For think of his opportunity! The youth, from six to fifteen, +are taken from their homes by Government, centralised at Hatiheu, where +they are supported by a weekly tax of food; and, with the exception +of one month in every year, surrendered wholly to the direction of the +priests. Since the escapade already mentioned the holiday occurs +at a different period for the girls and for the boys; so that a Marquesan +brother and sister meet again, after their education is complete, a +pair of strangers. It is a harsh law, and highly unpopular; but +what a power it places in the hands of the instructors, and how languidly +and dully is that power employed by the mission! Too much concern +to make the natives pious, a design in which they all confess defeat, +is, I suppose, the explanation of their miserable system. But +they might see in the girls’ school at Tai-o-hae, under the brisk, +housewifely sisters, a different picture of efficiency, and a scene +of neatness, airiness, and spirited and mirthful occupation that should +shame them into cheerier methods. The sisters themselves lament +their failure. They complain the annual holiday undoes the whole +year’s work; they complain particularly of the heartless indifference +of the girls. Out of so many pretty and apparently affectionate +pupils whom they have taught and reared, only two have ever returned +to pay a visit of remembrance to their teachers. These, indeed, +come regularly, but the rest, so soon as their school-days are over, +disappear into the woods like captive insects. It is hard to imagine +anything more discouraging; and yet I do not believe these ladies need +despair. For a certain interval they keep the girls alive and +innocently busy; and if it be at all possible to save the race, this +would be the means. No such praise can be given to the boys’ +school at Hatiheu. The day is numbered already for them all; alike +for the teacher and the scholars death is girt; he is afoot upon the +march; and in the frequent interval they sit and yawn. But in +life there seems a thread of purpose through the least significant; +the drowsiest endeavour is not lost, and even the school at Hatiheu +may be more useful than it seems.<br> +<br> +Hatiheu is a place of some pretensions. The end of the bay towards +Anaho may be called the civil compound, for it boasts the house of Kooamua, +and close on the beach, under a great tree, that of the gendarme, M. +Armand Aussel, with his garden, his pictures, his books, and his excellent +table, to which strangers are made welcome. No more singular contrast +is possible than between the gendarmerie and the priesthood, who are +besides in smouldering opposition and full of mutual complaints. +A priest’s kitchen in the eastern islands is a depressing spot +to see; and many, or most of them, make no attempt to keep a garden, +sparsely subsisting on their rations. But you will never dine +with a gendarme without smacking your lips; and M. Aussel’s home-made +sausage and the salad from his garden are unforgotten delicacies. +Pierre Loti may like to know that he is M. Aussel’s favourite +author, and that his books are read in the fit scenery of Hatiheu bay.<br> +<br> +The other end is all religious. It is here that an overhanging +and tip-tilted horn, a good sea-mark for Hatiheu, bursts naked from +the verdure of the climbing forest, and breaks down shoreward in steep +taluses and cliffs. From the edge of one of the highest, perhaps +seven hundred or a thousand feet above the beach, a Virgin looks insignificantly +down, like a poor lost doll, forgotten there by a giant child. +This laborious symbol of the Catholics is always strange to Protestants; +we conceive with wonder that men should think it worth while to toil +so many days, and clamber so much about the face of precipices, for +an end that makes us smile; and yet I believe it was the wise Bishop +Dordillon who chose the place, and I know that those who had a hand +in the enterprise look back with pride upon its vanquished dangers. +The boys’ school is a recent importation; it was at first in Tai-o-hae, +beside the girls’; and it was only of late, after their joint +escapade, that the width of the island was interposed between the sexes. +But Hatiheu must have been a place of missionary importance from before. +About midway of the beach no less than three churches stand grouped +in a patch of bananas, intermingled with some pine-apples. Two +are of wood: the original church, now in disuse; and a second that, +for some mysterious reason, has never been used. The new church +is of stone, with twin towers, walls flangeing into buttresses, and +sculptured front. The design itself is good, simple, and shapely; +but the character is all in the detail, where the architect has bloomed +into the sculptor. It is impossible to tell in words of the angels +(although they are more like winged archbishops) that stand guard upon +the door, of the cherubs in the corners, of the scapegoat gargoyles, +or the quaint and spirited relief, where St. Michael (the artist’s +patron) makes short work of a protesting Lucifer. We were never +weary of viewing the imagery, so innocent, sometimes so funny, and yet +in the best sense - in the sense of inventive gusto and expression - +so artistic. I know not whether it was more strange to find a +building of such merit in a corner of a barbarous isle, or to see a +building so antique still bright with novelty. The architect, +a French lay brother, still alive and well, and meditating fresh foundations, +must have surely drawn his descent from a master-builder in the age +of the cathedrals; and it was in looking on the church of Hatiheu that +I seemed to perceive the secret charm of mediaeval sculpture; that combination +of the childish courage of the amateur, attempting all things, like +the schoolboy on his slate, with the manly perseverance of the artist +who does not know when he is conquered.<br> +<br> +I had always afterwards a strong wish to meet the architect, Brother +Michel; and one day, when I was talking with the Resident in Tai-o-hae +(the chief port of the island), there were shown in to us an old, worn, +purblind, ascetic-looking priest, and a lay brother, a type of all that +is most sound in France, with a broad, clever, honest, humorous countenance, +an eye very large and bright, and a strong and healthy body inclining +to obesity. But that his blouse was black and his face shaven +clean, you might pick such a man to-day, toiling cheerfully in his own +patch of vines, from half a dozen provinces of France; and yet he had +always for me a haunting resemblance to an old kind friend of my boyhood, +whom I name in case any of my readers should share with me that memory +- Dr. Paul, of the West Kirk. Almost at the first word I was sure +it was my architect, and in a moment we were deep in a discussion of +Hatiheu church. Brother Michel spoke always of his labours with +a twinkle of humour, underlying which it was possible to spy a serious +pride, and the change from one to another was often very human and diverting. +‘<i>Et vos gargouilles</i> <i>moyen-âge</i>,’ cried +I; ‘<i>comme elles sont originates</i>!’ ‘<i>N’est</i>-<i>ce +pas? Elles sont bien drôles</i>!’ he said, smiling +broadly; and the next moment, with a sudden gravity: ‘<i>Cependant +il y en a une qui a une patte de cassé</i>; <i>il faut que je +voie</i> <i>cela</i>.’ I asked if he had any model - a point +we much discussed. ‘<i>Non</i>,’ said he simply; ‘<i>c’est +une église idéale</i>.’ The relievo was his +favourite performance, and very justly so. The angels at the door, +he owned, he would like to destroy and replace. ‘<i>Ils +n’ont pas de vie, ils</i> <i>manquent de vie. Vous devriez +voir mon église à la Dominique; j’ai là une +Vierge qui est vraiment gentille</i>.’ ‘Ah,’ +I cried, ‘they told me you had said you would never build another +church, and I wrote in my journal I could not believe it.’ +‘<i>Oui, j’aimerais bien en fairs une autre</i>,’ +he confessed, and smiled at the confession. An artist will understand +how much I was attracted by this conversation. There is no bond +so near as a community in that unaffected interest and slightly shame-faced +pride which mark the intelligent man enamoured of an art. He sees +the limitations of his aim, the defects of his practice; he smiles to +be so employed upon the shores of death, yet sees in his own devotion +something worthy. Artists, if they had the same sense of humour +with the Augurs, would smile like them on meeting, but the smile would +not be scornful.<br> +<br> +I had occasion to see much of this excellent man. He sailed with +us from Tai-o-hae to Hiva-oa, a dead beat of ninety miles against a +heavy sea. It was what is called a good passage, and a feather +in the <i>Casco’s</i> cap; but among the most miserable forty +hours that any one of us had ever passed. We were swung and tossed +together all that time like shot in a stage thunder-box. The mate +was thrown down and had his head cut open; the captain was sick on deck; +the cook sick in the galley. Of all our party only two sat down +to dinner. I was one. I own that I felt wretchedly; and +I can only say of the other, who professed to feel quite well, that +she fled at an early moment from the table. It was in these circumstances +that we skirted the windward shore of that indescribable island of Ua-pu; +viewing with dizzy eyes the coves, the capes, the breakers, the climbing +forests, and the inaccessible stone needles that surmount the mountains. +The place persists, in a dark corner of our memories, like a piece of +the scenery of nightmares. The end of this distressful passage, +where we were to land our passengers, was in a similar vein of roughness. +The surf ran high on the beach at Taahauku; the boat broached-to and +capsized; and all hands were submerged. Only the brother himself, +who was well used to the experience, skipped ashore, by some miracle +of agility, with scarce a sprinkling. Thenceforward, during our +stay at Hiva-oa, he was our cicerone and patron; introducing us, taking +us excursions, serving us in every way, and making himself daily more +beloved.<br> +<br> +Michel Blanc had been a carpenter by trade; had made money and retired, +supposing his active days quite over; and it was only when he found +idleness dangerous that he placed his capital and acquirements at the +service of the mission. He became their carpenter, mason, architect, +and engineer; added sculpture to his accomplishments, and was famous +for his skill in gardening. He wore an enviable air of having +found a port from life’s contentions and lying there strongly +anchored; went about his business with a jolly simplicity; complained +of no lack of results - perhaps shyly thinking his own statuary result +enough; and was altogether a pattern of the missionary layman.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER VIII - THE PORT OF ENTRY<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +The port - the mart, the civil and religious capital of these rude islands +- is called Tai-o-hae, and lies strung along the beach of a precipitous +green bay in Nuka-hiva. It was midwinter when we came thither, +and the weather was sultry, boisterous, and inconstant. Now the +wind blew squally from the land down gaps of splintered precipice; now, +between the sentinel islets of the entry, it came in gusts from seaward. +Heavy and dark clouds impended on the summits; the rain roared and ceased; +the scuppers of the mountain gushed; and the next day we would see the +sides of the amphitheatre bearded with white falls. Along the +beach the town shows a thin file of houses, mostly white, and all ensconced +in the foliage of an avenue of green puraos; a pier gives access from +the sea across the belt of breakers; to the eastward there stands, on +a projecting bushy hill, the old fort which is now the calaboose, or +prison; eastward still, alone in a garden, the Residency flies the colours +of France. Just off Calaboose Hill, the tiny Government schooner +rides almost permanently at anchor, marks eight bells in the morning +(there or thereabout) with the unfurling of her flag, and salutes the +setting sun with the report of a musket.<br> +<br> +Here dwell together, and share the comforts of a club (which may be +enumerated as a billiard-board, absinthe, a map of the world on Mercator’s +projection, and one of the most agreeable verandahs in the tropics), +a handful of whites of varying nationality, mostly French officials, +German and Scottish merchant clerks, and the agents of the opium monopoly. +There are besides three tavern-keepers, the shrewd Scot who runs the +cotton gin-mill, two white ladies, and a sprinkling of people ‘on +the beach’ - a South Sea expression for which there is no exact +equivalent. It is a pleasant society, and a hospitable. +But one man, who was often to be seen seated on the logs at the pier-head, +merits a word for the singularity of his history and appearance. +Long ago, it seems, he fell in love with a native lady, a High Chiefess +in Ua-pu. She, on being approached, declared she could never marry +a man who was untattooed; it looked so naked; whereupon, with some greatness +of soul, our hero put himself in the hands of the Tahukus, and, with +still greater, persevered until the process was complete. He had +certainly to bear a great expense, for the Tahuku will not work without +reward; and certainly exquisite pain. Kooamua, high chief as he +was, and one of the old school, was only part tattooed; he could not, +he told us with lively pantomime, endure the torture to an end. +Our enamoured countryman was more resolved; he was tattooed from head +to foot in the most approved methods of the art; and at last presented +himself before his mistress a new man. The fickle fair one could +never behold him from that day except with laughter. For my part, +I could never see the man without a kind of admiration; of him it might +be said, if ever of any, that he had loved not wisely, but too well.<br> +<br> +The Residency stands by itself, Calaboose Hill screening it from the +fringe of town along the further bay. The house is commodious, +with wide verandahs; all day it stands open, back and front, and the +trade blows copiously over its bare floors. On a week-day the +garden offers a scene of most untropical animation, half a dozen convicts +toiling there cheerfully with spade and barrow, and touching hats and +smiling to the visitor like old attached family servants. On Sunday +these are gone, and nothing to be seen but dogs of all ranks and sizes +peacefully slumbering in the shady grounds; for the dogs of Tai-o-hae +are very courtly-minded, and make the seat of Government their promenade +and place of siesta. In front and beyond, a strip of green down +loses itself in a low wood of many species of acacia; and deep in the +wood a ruinous wall encloses the cemetery of the Europeans. English +and Scottish sleep there, and Scandinavians, and French <i>maîtres +de manoeuvres</i> and <i>maîtres ouvriers</i>: mingling alien +dust. Back in the woods, perhaps, the blackbird, or (as they call +him there) the island nightingale, will be singing home strains; and +the ceaseless requiem of the surf hangs on the ear. I have never +seen a resting-place more quiet; but it was a long thought how far these +sleepers had all travelled, and from what diverse homes they had set +forth, to lie here in the end together.<br> +<br> +On the summit of its promontory hill, the calaboose stands all day with +doors and window-shutters open to the trade. On my first visit +a dog was the only guardian visible. He, indeed, rose with an +attitude so menacing that I was glad to lay hands on an old barrel-hoop; +and I think the weapon must have been familiar, for the champion instantly +retreated, and as I wandered round the court and through the building, +I could see him, with a couple of companions, humbly dodging me about +the corners. The prisoners’ dormitory was a spacious, airy +room, devoid of any furniture; its whitewashed walls covered with inscriptions +in Marquesan and rude drawings: one of the pier, not badly done; one +of a murder; several of French soldiers in uniform. There was +one legend in French: ‘<i>Je n’est</i>’ (sic) ‘<i>pas +le sou</i>.’ From this noontide quietude it must not be +supposed the prison was untenanted; the calaboose at Tai-o-hae does +a good business. But some of its occupants were gardening at the +Residency, and the rest were probably at work upon the streets, as free +as our scavengers at home, although not so industrious. On the +approach of evening they would be called in like children from play; +and the harbour-master (who is also the jailer) would go through the +form of locking them up until six the next morning. Should a prisoner +have any call in town, whether of pleasure or affairs, he has but to +unhook the window-shutters; and if he is back again, and the shutter +decently replaced, by the hour of call on the morrow, he may have met +the harbour-master in the avenue, and there will be no complaint, far +less any punishment. But this is not all. The charming French +Resident, M. Delaruelle, carried me one day to the calaboose on an official +visit. In the green court, a very ragged gentleman, his legs deformed +with the island elephantiasis, saluted us smiling. ‘One +of our political prisoners - an insurgent from Raiatea,’ said +the Resident; and then to the jailer: ‘I thought I had ordered +him a new pair of trousers.’ Meanwhile no other convict +was to be seen - ‘<i>Eh bien</i>,’ said the Resident<i>, +‘où sont vos prisonniers</i>?’ ‘<i>Monsieur +le Résident</i>,’ replied the jailer, saluting with soldierly +formality, <i>‘comme c’est jour de fête, je les ai +laissé aller à la chasse</i>.’ They were all +upon the mountains hunting goats! Presently we came to the quarters +of the women, likewise deserted - ‘<i>Où</i> <i>sont vos +bonnes femmes</i>?’ asked the Resident; and the jailer cheerfully +responded: ‘<i>Je crois, Monsieur le Résident, qu’elles +sont allées quelquepart faire une visite</i>.’ It +had been the design of M. Delaruelle, who was much in love with the +whimsicalities of his small realm, to elicit something comical; but +not even he expected anything so perfect as the last. To complete +the picture of convict life in Tai-o-hae, it remains to be added that +these criminals draw a salary as regularly as the President of the Republic. +Ten sous a day is their hire. Thus they have money, food, shelter, +clothing, and, I was about to write, their liberty. The French +are certainly a good-natured people, and make easy masters. They +are besides inclined to view the Marquesans with an eye of humorous +indulgence. ‘They are dying, poor devils!’ said M. +Delaruelle: ‘the main thing is to let them die in peace.’ +And it was not only well said, but I believe expressed the general thought. +Yet there is another element to be considered; for these convicts are +not merely useful, they are almost essential to the French existence. +With a people incurably idle, dispirited by what can only be called +endemic pestilence, and inflamed with ill-feeling against their new +masters, crime and convict labour are a godsend to the Government.<br> +<br> +Theft is practically the sole crime. Originally petty pilferers, +the men of Tai-o-hae now begin to force locks and attack strong-boxes. +Hundreds of dollars have been taken at a time; though, with that redeeming +moderation so common in Polynesian theft, the Marquesan burglar will +always take a part and leave a part, sharing (so to speak) with the +proprietor. If it be Chilian coin - the island currency - he will +escape; if the sum is in gold, French silver, or bank-notes, the police +wait until the money begins to come in circulation, and then easily +pick out their man. And now comes the shameful part. In +plain English, the prisoner is tortured until he confesses and (if that +be possible) restores the money. To keep him alone, day and night, +in the black hole, is to inflict on the Marquesan torture inexpressible. +Even his robberies are carried on in the plain daylight, under the open +sky, with the stimulus of enterprise, and the countenance of an accomplice; +his terror of the dark is still insurmountable; conceive, then, what +he endures in his solitary dungeon; conceive how he longs to confess, +become a full-fledged convict, and be allowed to sleep beside his comrades. +While we were in Tai-o-hae a thief was under prevention. He had +entered a house about eight in the morning, forced a trunk, and stolen +eleven hundred francs; and now, under the horrors of darkness, solitude, +and a bedevilled cannibal imagination, he was reluctantly confessing +and giving up his spoil. From one cache, which he had already +pointed out, three hundred francs had been recovered, and it was expected +that he would presently disgorge the rest. This would be ugly +enough if it were all; but I am bound to say, because it is a matter +the French should set at rest, that worse is continually hinted. +I heard that one man was kept six days with his arms bound backward +round a barrel; and it is the universal report that every gendarme in +the South Seas is equipped with something in the nature of a thumbscrew. +I do not know this. I never had the face to ask any of the gendarmes +- pleasant, intelligent, and kindly fellows - with whom I have been +intimate, and whose hospitality I have enjoyed; and perhaps the tale +reposes (as I hope it does) on a misconstruction of that ingenious cat’s-cradle +with which the French agent of police so readily secures a prisoner. +But whether physical or moral, torture is certainly employed; and by +a barbarous injustice, the state of accusation (in which a man may very +well be innocently placed) is positively painful; the state of conviction +(in which all are supposed guilty) is comparatively free, and positively +pleasant. Perhaps worse still, - not only the accused, but sometimes +his wife, his mistress, or his friend, is subjected to the same hardships. +I was admiring, in the tapu system, the ingenuity of native methods +of detection; there is not much to admire in those of the French, and +to lock up a timid child in a dark room, and, if he proved obstinate, +lock up his sister in the next, is neither novel nor humane.<br> +<br> +The main occasion of these thefts is the new vice of opium-eating. +‘Here nobody ever works, and all eat opium,’ said a gendarme; +and Ah Fu knew a woman who ate a dollar’s worth in a day. +The successful thief will give a handful of money to each of his friends, +a dress to a woman, pass an evening in one of the taverns of Tai-o-hae, +during which he treats all comers, produce a big lump of opium, and +retire to the bush to eat and sleep it off. A trader, who did +not sell opium, confessed to me that he was at his wit’s end. +‘I do not sell it, but others do,’ said he. ‘The +natives only work to buy it; if they walk over to me to sell their cotton, +they have just to walk over to some one else to buy their opium with +my money. And why should they be at the bother of two walks? +There is no use talking,’ he added - ‘opium is the currency +of this country.’<br> +<br> +The man under prevention during my stay at Tai-o-hae lost patience while +the Chinese opium-seller was being examined in his presence. ‘Of +course he sold me opium!’ he broke out; ‘all the Chinese +here sell opium. It was only to buy opium that I stole; it is +only to buy opium that anybody steals. And what you ought to do +is to let no opium come here, and no Chinamen.’ This is +precisely what is done in Samoa by a native Government; but the French +have bound their own hands, and for forty thousand francs sold native +subjects to crime and death. This horrid traffic may be said to +have sprung up by accident. It was Captain Hart who had the misfortune +to be the means of beginning it, at a time when his plantations flourished +in the Marquesas, and he found a difficulty in keeping Chinese coolies. +To-day the plantations are practically deserted and the Chinese gone; +but in the meanwhile the natives have learned the vice, the patent brings +in a round sum, and the needy Government at Papeete shut their eyes +and open their pockets. Of course, the patentee is supposed to +sell to Chinamen alone; equally of course, no one could afford to pay +forty thousand francs for the privilege of supplying a scattered handful +of Chinese; and every one knows the truth, and all are ashamed of it. +French officials shake their heads when opium is mentioned; and the +agents of the farmer blush for their employment. Those that live +in glass houses should not throw stones; as a subject of the British +crown, I am an unwilling shareholder in the largest opium business under +heaven. But the British case is highly complicated; it implies +the livelihood of millions; and must be reformed, when it can be reformed +at all, with prudence. This French business, on the other hand, +is a nostrum and a mere excrescence. No native industry was to +be encouraged: the poison is solemnly imported. No native habit +was to be considered: the vice has been gratuitously introduced. +And no creature profits, save the Government at Papeete - the not very +enviable gentlemen who pay them, and the Chinese underlings who do the +dirty work.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER IX - THE HOUSE OF TEMOANA<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +The history of the Marquesas is, of late years, much confused by the +coming and going of the French. At least twice they have seized +the archipelago, at least once deserted it; and in the meanwhile the +natives pursued almost without interruption their desultory cannibal +wars. Through these events and changing dynasties, a single considerable +figure may be seen to move: that of the high chief, a king, Temoana. +Odds and ends of his history came to my ears: how he was at first a +convert to the Protestant mission; how he was kidnapped or exiled from +his native land, served as cook aboard a whaler, and was shown, for +small charge, in English seaports; how he returned at last to the Marquesas, +fell under the strong and benign influence of the late bishop, extended +his influence in the group, was for a while joint ruler with the prelate, +and died at last the chief supporter of Catholicism and the French. +His widow remains in receipt of two pounds a month from the French Government. +Queen she is usually called, but in the official almanac she figures +as ‘<i>Madame Vaekehu, Grande Chefesse</i>.’ His son +(natural or adoptive, I know not which), Stanislao Moanatini, chief +of Akaui, serves in Tai-o-hae as a kind of Minister of Public Works; +and the daughter of Stanislao is High Chiefess of the southern island +of Tauata. These, then, are the greatest folk of the archipelago; +we thought them also the most estimable. This is the rule in Polynesia, +with few exceptions; the higher the family, the better the man - better +in sense, better in manners, and usually taller and stronger in body. +A stranger advances blindfold. He scrapes acquaintance as he can. +Save the tattoo in the Marquesas, nothing indicates the difference of +rank; and yet almost invariably we found, after we had made them, that +our friends were persons of station. I have said ‘usually +taller and stronger.’ I might have been more absolute, - +over all Polynesia, and a part of Micronesia, the rule holds good; the +great ones of the isle, and even of the village, are greater of bone +and muscle, and often heavier of flesh, than any commoner. The +usual explanation - that the high-born child is more industriously shampooed, +is probably the true one. In New Caledonia, at least, where the +difference does not exist, has never been remarked, the practice of +shampooing seems to be itself unknown. Doctors would be well employed +in a study of the point.<br> +<br> +Vaekehu lives at the other end of the town from the Residency, beyond +the buildings of the mission. Her house is on the European plan: +a table in the midst of the chief room; photographs and religious pictures +on the wall. It commands to either hand a charming vista: through +the front door, a peep of green lawn, scurrying pigs, the pendent fans +of the coco-palm and splendour of the bursting surf: through the back, +mounting forest glades and coronals of precipice. Here, in the +strong thorough-draught, Her Majesty received us in a simple gown of +print, and with no mark of royalty but the exquisite finish of her tattooed +mittens, the elaboration of her manners, and the gentle falsetto in +which all the highly refined among Marquesan ladies (and Vaekehu above +all others) delight to sing their language. An adopted daughter +interpreted, while we gave the news, and rehearsed by name our friends +of Anaho. As we talked, we could see, through the landward door, +another lady of the household at her toilet under the green trees; who +presently, when her hair was arranged, and her hat wreathed with flowers, +appeared upon the back verandah with gracious salutations.<br> +<br> +Vaekehu is very deaf; ‘<i>merci</i>’ is her only word of +French; and I do not know that she seemed clever. An exquisite, +kind refinement, with a shade of quietism, gathered perhaps from the +nuns, was what chiefly struck us. Or rather, upon that first occasion, +we were conscious of a sense as of district-visiting on our part, and +reduced evangelical gentility on the part of our hostess. The +other impression followed after she was more at ease, and came with +Stanislao and his little girl to dine on board the <i>Casco</i>. +She had dressed for the occasion: wore white, which very well became +her strong brown face; and sat among us, eating or smoking her cigarette, +quite cut off from all society, or only now and then included through +the intermediary of her son. It was a position that might have +been ridiculous, and she made it ornamental; making believe to hear +and to be entertained; her face, whenever she met our eyes, lighting +with the smile of good society; her contributions to the talk, when +she made any, and that was seldom, always complimentary and pleasing. +No attention was paid to the child, for instance, but what she remarked +and thanked us for. Her parting with each, when she came to leave, +was gracious and pretty, as had been every step of her behaviour. +When Mrs. Stevenson held out her hand to say good-bye, Vaekehu took +it, held it, and a moment smiled upon her; dropped it, and then, as +upon a kindly after-thought, and with a sort of warmth of condescension, +held out both hands and kissed my wife upon both cheeks. Given +the same relation of years and of rank, the thing would have been so +done on the boards of the <i>Comédie Française</i>; just +so might Madame Brohan have warmed and condescended to Madame Broisat +in the <i>Marquis de Villemer</i>. It was my part to accompany +our guests ashore: when I kissed the little girl good-bye at the pier +steps, Vaekehu gave a cry of gratification, reached down her hand into +the boat, took mine, and pressed it with that flattering softness which +seems the coquetry of the old lady in every quarter of the earth. +The next moment she had taken Stanislao’s arm, and they moved +off along the pier in the moonlight, leaving me bewildered. This +was a queen of cannibals; she was tattooed from hand to foot, and perhaps +the greatest masterpiece of that art now extant, so that a while ago, +before she was grown prim, her leg was one of the sights of Tai-o-hae; +she had been passed from chief to chief; she had been fought for and +taken in war; perhaps, being so great a lady, she had sat on the high +place, and throned it there, alone of her sex, while the drums were +going twenty strong and the priests carried up the blood-stained baskets +of long-pig. And now behold her, out of that past of violence +and sickening feasts, step forth, in her age, a quiet, smooth, elaborate +old lady, such as you might find at home (mittened also, but not often +so well-mannered) in a score of country houses. Only Vaekehu’s +mittens were of dye, not of silk; and they had been paid for, not in +money, but the cooked flesh of men. It came in my mind with a +clap, what she could think of it herself, and whether at heart, perhaps, +she might not regret and aspire after the barbarous and stirring past. +But when I asked Stanislao - ‘Ah!’ said he, ‘she is +content; she is religious, she passes all her days with the sisters.’<br> +<br> +Stanislao (Stanislaos, with the final consonant evaded after the Polynesian +habit) was sent by Bishop Dordillon to South America, and there educated +by the fathers. His French is fluent, his talk sensible and spirited, +and in his capacity of ganger-in-chief, he is of excellent service to +the French. With the prestige of his name and family, and with +the stick when needful, he keeps the natives working and the roads passable. +Without Stanislao and the convicts, I am in doubt what would become +of the present regimen in Nuka-hiva; whether the highways might not +be suffered to close up, the pier to wash away, and the Residency to +fall piecemeal about the ears of impotent officials. And yet though +the hereditary favourer, and one of the chief props of French authority, +he has always an eye upon the past. He showed me where the old +public place had stood, still to be traced by random piles of stone; +told me how great and fine it was, and surrounded on all sides by populous +houses, whence, at the beating of the drums, the folk crowded to make +holiday. The drum-beat of the Polynesian has a strange and gloomy +stimulation for the nerves of all. White persons feel it - at +these precipitate sounds their hearts beat faster; and, according to +old residents, its effect on the natives was extreme. Bishop Dordillon +might entreat; Temoana himself command and threaten; at the note of +the drum wild instincts triumphed. And now it might beat upon +these ruins, and who should assemble? The houses are down, the +people dead, their lineage extinct; and the sweepings and fugitives +of distant bays and islands encamp upon their graves. The decline +of the dance Stanislao especially laments. ‘<i>Chaque pays +a ses coutumes</i>,’ said he; but in the report of any gendarme, +perhaps corruptly eager to increase the number of <i>délits</i> +and the instruments of his own power, custom after custom is placed +on the expurgatorial index. ‘<i>Tenez, une</i> <i>danse +qui n’est pas permise</i>,’ said Stanislao: ‘<i>je +ne sais</i> <i>pas pourquoi, elle est très jolie, elle va comme +ça</i>,’ and sticking his umbrella upright in the road, +he sketched the steps and gestures. All his criticisms of the +present, all his regrets for the past, struck me as temperate and sensible. +The short term of office of the Resident he thought the chief defect +of the administration; that officer having scarce begun to be efficient +ere he was recalled. I thought I gathered, too, that he regarded +with some fear the coming change from a naval to a civil governor. +I am sure at least that I regard it so myself; for the civil servants +of France have never appeared to any foreigner as at all the flower +of their country, while her naval officers may challenge competition +with the world. In all his talk, Stanislao was particular to speak +of his own country as a land of savages; and when he stated an opinion +of his own, it was with some apologetic preface, alleging that he was +‘a savage who had travelled.’ There was a deal, in +this elaborate modesty, of honest pride. Yet there was something +in the precaution that saddened me; and I could not but fear he was +only forestalling a taunt that he had heard too often.<br> +<br> +I recall with interest two interviews with Stanislao. The first +was a certain afternoon of tropic rain, which we passed together in +the verandah of the club; talking at times with heightened voices as +the showers redoubled overhead, passing at times into the billiard-room, +to consult, in the dim, cloudy daylight, that map of the world which +forms its chief adornment. He was naturally ignorant of English +history, so that I had much of news to communicate. The story +of Gordon I told him in full, and many episodes of the Indian Mutiny, +Lucknow, the second battle of Cawn-pore, the relief of Arrah, the death +of poor Spottis-woode, and Sir Hugh Rose’s hotspur, midland campaign. +He was intent to hear; his brown face, strongly marked with small-pox, +kindled and changed with each vicissitude. His eyes glowed with +the reflected light of battle; his questions were many and intelligent, +and it was chiefly these that sent us so often to the map. But +it is of our parting that I keep the strongest sense. We were +to sail on the morrow, and the night had fallen, dark, gusty, and rainy, +when we stumbled up the hill to bid farewell to Stanislao. He +had already loaded us with gifts; but more were waiting. We sat +about the table over cigars and green cocoa-nuts; claps of wind blew +through the house and extinguished the lamp, which was always instantly +relighted with a single match; and these recurrent intervals of darkness +were felt as a relief. For there was something painful and embarrassing +in the kindness of that separation. ‘<i>Ah, vous devriez +rester ici, mon</i> <i>cher ami</i>!’ cried Stanislao. ‘<i>Vous +êtes les gens qu’il faut pour les Kanaques; vous êtes +doux, vous et votre famille</i>; <i>vous seriez obéis dans toutes +les îles</i>.’ We had been civil; not always that, +my conscience told me, and never anything beyond; and all this to-do +is a measure, not of our considerateness, but of the want of it in others. +The rest of the evening, on to Vaekehu’s and back as far as to +the pier, Stanislao walked with my arm and sheltered me with his umbrella; +and after the boat had put off, we could still distinguish, in the murky +darkness, his gestures of farewell. His words, if there were any, +were drowned by the rain and the loud surf.<br> +<br> +I have mentioned presents, a vexed question in the South Seas; and one +which well illustrates the common, ignorant habit of regarding races +in a lump. In many quarters the Polynesian gives only to receive. +I have visited islands where the population mobbed me for all the world +like dogs after the waggon of cat’s-meat; and where the frequent +proposition, ‘You my pleni (friend),’ or (with more of pathos) +‘You all ‘e same my father,’ must be received with +hearty laughter and a shout. And perhaps everywhere, among the +greedy and rapacious, a gift is regarded as a sprat to catch a whale. +It is the habit to give gifts and to receive returns, and such characters, +complying with the custom, will look to it nearly that they do not lose. +But for persons of a different stamp the statement must be reversed. +The shabby Polynesian is anxious till he has received the return gift; +the generous is uneasy until he has made it. The first is disappointed +if you have not given more than he; the second is miserable if he thinks +he has given less than you. This is my experience; if it clash +with that of others, I pity their fortune, and praise mine: the circumstances +cannot change what I have seen, nor lessen what I have received. +And indeed I find that those who oppose me often argue from a ground +of singular presumptions; comparing Polynesians with an ideal person, +compact of generosity and gratitude, whom I never had the pleasure of +encountering; and forgetting that what is almost poverty to us is wealth +almost unthinkable to them. I will give one instance: I chanced +to speak with consideration of these gifts of Stanislao’s with +a certain clever man, a great hater and contemner of Kanakas. +‘Well! what were they?’ he cried. ‘A pack of +old men’s beards. Trash!’ And the same gentleman, +some half an hour later, being upon a different train of thought, dwelt +at length on the esteem in which the Marquesans held that sort of property, +how they preferred it to all others except land, and what fancy prices +it would fetch. Using his own figures, I computed that, in this +commodity alone, the gifts of Vaekehu and Stanislao represented between +two and three hundred dollars; and the queen’s official salary +is of two hundred and forty in the year.<br> +<br> +But generosity on the one hand, and conspicuous meanness on the other, +are in the South Seas, as at home, the exception. It is neither +with any hope of gain, nor with any lively wish to please, that the +ordinary Polynesian chooses and presents his gifts. A plain social +duty lies before him, which he performs correctly, but without the least +enthusiasm. And we shall best understand his attitude of mind, +if we examine our own to the cognate absurdity of marriage presents. +There we give without any special thought of a return; yet if the circumstance +arise, and the return be withheld, we shall judge ourselves insulted. +We give them usually without affection, and almost never with a genuine +desire to please; and our gift is rather a mark of our own status than +a measure of our love to the recipients. So in a great measure +and with the common run of the Polynesians; their gifts are formal; +they imply no more than social recognition; and they are made and reciprocated, +as we pay and return our morning visits. And the practice of marking +and measuring events and sentiments by presents is universal in the +island world. A gift plays with them the part of stamp and seal; +and has entered profoundly into the mind of islanders. Peace and +war, marriage, adoption and naturalisation, are celebrated or declared +by the acceptance or the refusal of gifts; and it is as natural for +the islander to bring a gift as for us to carry a card-case.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER X - A PORTRAIT AND A STORY<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +I have had occasion several times to name the late bishop, Father Dordillon, +‘Monseigneur,’ as he is still almost universally called, +Vicar-Apostolic of the Marquesas and Bishop of Cambysopolis <i>in partibus</i>. +Everywhere in the islands, among all classes and races, this fine, old, +kindly, cheerful fellow is remembered with affection and respect. +His influence with the natives was paramount. They reckoned him +the highest of men - higher than an admiral; brought him their money +to keep; took his advice upon their purchases; nor would they plant +trees upon their own land till they had the approval of the father of +the islands. During the time of the French exodus he singly represented +Europe, living in the Residency, and ruling by the hand of Temoana. +The first roads were made under his auspices and by his persuasion. +The old road between Hatiheu and Anaho was got under way from either +side on the ground that it would be pleasant for an evening promenade, +and brought to completion by working on the rivalry of the two villages. +The priest would boast in Hatiheu of the progress made in Anaho, and +he would tell the folk of Anaho, ‘If you don’t take care, +your neighbours will be over the hill before you are at the top.’ +It could not be so done to-day; it could then; death, opium, and depopulation +had not gone so far; and the people of Hatiheu, I was told, still vied +with each other in fine attire, and used to go out by families, in the +cool of the evening, boat-sailing and racing in the bay. There +seems some truth at least in the common view, that this joint reign +of Temoana and the bishop was the last and brief golden age of the Marquesas. +But the civil power returned, the mission was packed out of the Residency +at twenty-four hours’ notice, new methods supervened, and the +golden age (whatever it quite was) came to an end. It is the strongest +proof of Father Dordillon’s prestige that it survived, seemingly +without loss, this hasty deposition.<br> +<br> +His method with the natives was extremely mild. Among these barbarous +children he still played the part of the smiling father; and he was +careful to observe, in all indifferent matters, the Marquesan etiquette. +Thus, in the singular system of artificial kinship, the bishop had been +adopted by Vaekehu as a grandson; Miss Fisher, of Hatiheu, as a daughter. +From that day, Monseigneur never addressed the young lady except as +his mother, and closed his letters with the formalities of a dutiful +son. With Europeans he could be strict, even to the extent of +harshness. He made no distinction against heretics, with whom +he was on friendly terms; but the rules of his own Church he would see +observed; and once at least he had a white man clapped in jail for the +desecration of a saint’s day. But even this rigour, so intolerable +to laymen, so irritating to Protestants, could not shake his popularity. +We shall best conceive him by examples nearer home; we may all have +known some divine of the old school in Scotland, a literal Sabbatarian, +a stickler for the letter of the law, who was yet in private modest, +innocent, genial and mirthful. Much such a man, it seems, was +Father Dordillon. And his popularity bore a test yet stronger. +He had the name, and probably deserved it, of a shrewd man in business +and one that made the mission pay. Nothing so much stirs up resentment +as the inmixture in commerce of religious bodies; but even rival traders +spoke well of Monseigneur.<br> +<br> +His character is best portrayed in the story of the days of his decline. +A time came when, from the failure of sight, he must desist from his +literary labours: his Marquesan hymns, grammars, and dictionaries; his +scientific papers, lives of saints, and devotional poetry. He +cast about for a new interest: pitched on gardening, and was to be seen +all day, with spade and water-pot, in his childlike eagerness, actually +running between the borders. Another step of decay, and he must +leave his garden also. Instantly a new occupation was devised, +and he sat in the mission cutting paper flowers and wreaths. His +diocese was not great enough for his activity; the churches of the Marquesas +were papered with his handiwork, and still he must be making more. +‘Ah,’ said he, smiling, ‘when I am dead what a fine +time you will have clearing out my trash!’ He had been dead +about six months; but I was pleased to see some of his trophies still +exposed, and looked upon them with a smile: the tribute (if I have read +his cheerful character aright) which he would have preferred to any +useless tears. Disease continued progressively to disable him; +he who had clambered so stalwartly over the rude rocks of the Marquesas, +bringing peace to warfaring clans, was for some time carried in a chair +between the mission and the church, and at last confined to bed, impotent +with dropsy, and tormented with bed-sores and sciatica. Here he +lay two months without complaint; and on the 11th January 1888, in the +seventy-ninth year of his life, and the thirty-fourth of his labours +in the Marquesas, passed away.<br> +<br> +Those who have a taste for hearing missions, Protestant or Catholic, +decried, must seek their pleasure elsewhere than in my pages. +Whether Catholic or Protestant, with all their gross blots, with all +their deficiency of candour, of humour, and of common sense, the missionaries +are the best and the most useful whites in the Pacific. This is +a subject which will follow us throughout; but there is one part of +it that may conveniently be treated here. The married and the +celibate missionary, each has his particular advantage and defect. +The married missionary, taking him at the best, may offer to the native +what he is much in want of - a higher picture of domestic life; but +the woman at his elbow tends to keep him in touch with Europe and out +of touch with Polynesia, and to perpetuate, and even to ingrain, parochial +decencies far best forgotten. The mind of the female missionary +tends, for instance, to be continually busied about dress. She +can be taught with extreme difficulty to think any costume decent but +that to which she grew accustomed on Clapham Common; and to gratify +this prejudice, the native is put to useless expense, his mind is tainted +with the morbidities of Europe, and his health is set in danger. +The celibate missionary, on the other hand, and whether at best or worst, +falls readily into native ways of life; to which he adds too commonly +what is either a mark of celibate man at large, or an inheritance from +mediaeval saints - I mean slovenly habits and an unclean person. +There are, of course, degrees in this; and the sister (of course, and +all honour to her) is as fresh as a lady at a ball. For the diet +there is nothing to be said - it must amaze and shock the Polynesian +- but for the adoption of native habits there is much. ‘<i>Chaque +pays a ses coutumes</i>,’ said Stanislao; these it is the missionary’s +delicate task to modify; and the more he can do so from within, and +from a native standpoint, the better he will do his work; and here I +think the Catholics have sometimes the advantage; in the Vicariate of +Dordillon, I am sure they had it. I have heard the bishop blamed +for his indulgence to the natives, and above all because he did not +rage with sufficient energy against cannibalism. It was a part +of his policy to live among the natives like an elder brother; to follow +where he could; to lead where it was necessary; never to drive; and +to encourage the growth of new habits, instead of violently rooting +up the old. And it might be better, in the long-run, if this policy +were always followed.<br> +<br> +It might be supposed that native missionaries would prove more indulgent, +but the reverse is found to be the case. The new broom sweeps +clean; and the white missionary of to-day is often embarrassed by the +bigotry of his native coadjutor. What else should we expect? +On some islands, sorcery, polygamy, human sacrifice, and tobacco-smoking +have been prohibited, the dress of the native has been modified, and +himself warned in strong terms against rival sects of Christianity; +all by the same man, at the same period of time, and with the like authority. +By what criterion is the convert to distinguish the essential from the +unessential? He swallows the nostrum whole; there has been no +play of mind, no instruction, and, except for some brute utility in +the prohibitions, no advance. To call things by their proper names, +this is teaching superstition. It is unfortunate to use the word; +so few people have read history, and so many have dipped into little +atheistic manuals, that the majority will rush to a conclusion, and +suppose the labour lost. And far from that: These semi-spontaneous +superstitions, varying with the sect of the original evangelist and +the customs of the island, are found in practice to be highly fructifying; +and in particular those who have learned and who go forth again to teach +them offer an example to the world. The best specimen of the Christian +hero that I ever met was one of these native missionaries. He +had saved two lives at the risk of his own; like Nathan, he had bearded +a tyrant in his hour of blood; when a whole white population fled, he +alone stood to his duty; and his behaviour under domestic sorrow with +which the public has no concern filled the beholder with sympathy and +admiration. A poor little smiling laborious man he looked; and +you would have thought he had nothing in him but that of which indeed +he had too much - facile good-nature.<br> +<br> +It chances that the only rivals of Monseigneur and his mission in the +Marquesas were certain of these brown-skinned evangelists, natives from +Hawaii. I know not what they thought of Father Dordillon: they +are the only class I did not question; but I suspect the prelate to +have regarded them askance, for he was eminently human. During +my stay at Tai-o-hae, the time of the yearly holiday came round at the +girls’ school; and a whole fleet of whale-boats came from Ua-pu +to take the daughters of that island home. On board of these was +Kauwealoha, one of the pastors, a fine, rugged old gentleman, of that +leonine type so common in Hawaii. He paid me a visit in the <i>Casco</i>, +and there entertained me with a tale of one of his colleagues, Kekela, +a missionary in the great cannibal isle of Hiva-oa. It appears +that shortly after a kidnapping visit from a Peruvian slaver, the boats +of an American whaler put into a bay upon that island, were attacked, +and made their escape with difficulty, leaving their mate, a Mr. Whalon, +in the hands of the natives. The captive, with his arms bound +behind his back, was cast into a house; and the chief announced the +capture to Kekela. And here I begin to follow the version of Kauwealoha; +it is a good specimen of Kanaka English; and the reader is to conceive +it delivered with violent emphasis and speaking pantomime.<br> +<br> +‘“I got ‘Melican mate,” the chief he say. +“What you go do ‘Melican mate?” Kekela he say. +“I go make fire, I go kill, I go eat him,” he say; “you +come to-mollow eat piece.” “I no <i>want</i> eat ‘Melican +mate!” Kekela he say; “why you want?” “This +bad shippee, this slave shippee,” the chief he say. “One +time a shippee he come from Pelu, he take away plenty Kanaka, he take +away my son. ‘Melican mate he bad man. I go eat him; +you eat piece.” “I no <i>want</i> eat ‘Melican +mate!” Kekela he say; and he <i>cly</i> - all night he cly! +To-mollow Kekela he get up, he put on blackee coat, he go see chief; +he see Missa Whela, him hand tie’ like this. (<i>Pantomime</i>.) +Kekela he cly. He say chief:- “Chief, you like things of +mine? you like whale-boat?” “Yes,” he say. +“You like file-a’m?” (fire-arms). “Yes,” +he say. “You like blackee coat?” “Yes,” +he say. Kekela he take Missa Whela by he shoul’a’ +(shoulder), he take him light out house; he give chief he whale-boat, +he file-a’m, he blackee coat. He take Missa Whela he house, +make him sit down with he wife and chil’en. Missa Whela +all-the-same pelison (prison); he wife, he chil’en in Amelica; +he cly - O, he cly. Kekela he solly. One day Kekela he see +ship. (<i>Pantomime</i>.) He say Missa Whela, “Ma’ +Whala?” Missa Whela he say, “Yes.” Kanaka +they begin go down beach. Kekela he get eleven Kanaka, get oa’ +(oars), get evely thing. He say Missa Whela, “Now you go +quick.” They jump in whale-boat. “Now you low!” +Kekela he say: “you low quick, quick!” (<i>Violent +pantomime</i>, <i>and a change indicating that the narrator has left +the boat</i> <i>and returned to the beach</i>.) All the Kanaka +they say, “How! ‘Melican mate he go away?” - +jump in boat; low afta. (<i>Violent pantomime, and change again +to boat</i>.) Kekela he say, “Low quick!”’<br> +<br> +Here I think Kauwealoha’s pantomime had confused me; I have no +more of his <i>ipsissima verba</i>; and can but add, in my own less +spirited manner, that the ship was reached, Mr. Whalon taken aboard, +and Kekela returned to his charge among the cannibals. But how +unjust it is to repeat the stumblings of a foreigner in a language only +partly acquired! A thoughtless reader might conceive Kauwealoha +and his colleague to be a species of amicable baboon; but I have here +the anti-dote. In return for his act of gallant charity, Kekela +was presented by the American Government with a sum of money, and by +President Lincoln personally with a gold watch. From his letter +of thanks, written in his own tongue, I give the following extract. +I do not envy the man who can read it without emotion.<br> +<br> +<br> +‘When I saw one of your countrymen, a citizen of your great nation, +ill-treated, and about to be baked and eaten, as a pig is eaten, I ran +to save him, full of pity and grief at the evil deed of these benighted +people. I gave my boat for the stranger’s life. This +boat came from James Hunnewell, a gift of friendship. It became +the ransom of this countryman of yours, that he might not be eaten by +the savages who knew not Jehovah. This was Mr. Whalon, and the +date, Jan. 14, 1864.<br> +<br> +As to this friendly deed of mine in saving Mr. Whalon, its seed came +from your great land, and was brought by certain of your countrymen, +who had received the love of God. It was planted in Hawaii, and +I brought it to plant in this land and in these dark regions, that they +might receive the root of all that is good and true, which is <i>love.<br> +<br> +</i>‘1. Love to Jehovah.<br> +<br> +‘2. Love to self.<br> +<br> +‘3. Love to our neighbour.<br> +<br> +‘If a man have a sufficiency of these three, he is good and holy, +like his God, Jehovah, in his triune character (Father, Son, and Holy +Ghost), one-three, three-one. If he have two and wants one, it +is not well; and if he have one and wants two, indeed, is not well; +but if he cherishes all three, then is he holy, indeed, after the manner +of the Bible.<br> +<br> +‘This is a great thing for your great nation to boast of, before +all the nations of the earth. From your great land a most precious +seed was brought to the land of darkness. It was planted here, +not by means of guns and men-of-war and threatening. It was planted +by means of the ignorant, the neglected, the despised. Such was +the introduction of the word of the Almighty God into this group of +Nuuhiwa. Great is my debt to Americans, who have taught me all +things pertaining to this life and to that which is to come.<br> +<br> +‘How shall I repay your great kindness to me? Thus David +asked of Jehovah, and thus I ask of you, the President of the United +States. This is my only payment - that which I have received of +the Lord, love - (aloha).’<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER XI - LONG-PIG - A CANNIBAL HIGH PLACE<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +Nothing more strongly arouses our disgust than cannibalism, nothing +so surely unmortars a society; nothing, we might plausibly argue, will +so harden and degrade the minds of those that practise it. And +yet we ourselves make much the same appearance in the eyes of the Buddhist +and the vegetarian. We consume the carcasses of creatures of like +appetites, passions, and organs with ourselves; we feed on babes, though +not our own; and the slaughter-house resounds daily with screams of +pain and fear. We distinguish, indeed; but the unwillingness of +many nations to eat the dog, an animal with whom we live on terms of +the next intimacy, shows how precariously the distinction is grounded. +The pig is the main element of animal food among the islands; and I +had many occasions, my mind being quickened by my cannibal surroundings, +to observe his character and the manner of his death. Many islanders +live with their pigs as we do with our dogs; both crowd around the hearth +with equal freedom; and the island pig is a fellow of activity, enterprise, +and sense. He husks his own cocoa-nuts, and (I am told) rolls +them into the sun to burst; he is the terror of the shepherd. +Mrs. Stevenson, senior, has seen one fleeing to the woods with a lamb +in his mouth; and I saw another come rapidly (and erroneously) to the +conclusion that the <i>Casco</i> was going down, and swim through the +flush water to the rail in search of an escape. It was told us +in childhood that pigs cannot swim; I have known one to leap overboard, +swim five hundred yards to shore, and return to the house of his original +owner. I was once, at Tautira, a pig-master on a considerable +scale; at first, in my pen, the utmost good feeling prevailed; a little +sow with a belly-ache came and appealed to us for help in the manner +of a child; and there was one shapely black boar, whom we called Catholicus, +for he was a particular present from the Catholics of the village, and +who early displayed the marks of courage and friendliness; no other +animal, whether dog or pig, was suffered to approach him at his food, +and for human beings he showed a full measure of that toadying fondness +so common in the lower animals, and possibly their chief title to the +name. One day, on visiting my piggery, I was amazed to see Catholicus +draw back from my approach with cries of terror; and if I was amazed +at the change, I was truly embarrassed when I learnt its reason. +One of the pigs had been that morning killed; Catholicus had seen the +murder, he had discovered he was dwelling in the shambles, and from +that time his confidence and his delight in life were ended. We +still reserved him a long while, but he could not endure the sight of +any two-legged creature, nor could we, under the circumstances, encounter +his eye without confusion. I have assisted besides, by the ear, +at the act of butchery itself; the victim’s cries of pain I think +I could have borne, but the execution was mismanaged, and his expression +of terror was contagious: that small heart moved to the same tune with +ours. Upon such ‘dread foundations’ the life of the +European reposes, and yet the European is among the less cruel of races. +The paraphernalia of murder, the preparatory brutalities of his existence, +are all hid away; an extreme sensibility reigns upon the surface; and +ladies will faint at the recital of one tithe of what they daily expect +of their butchers. Some will be even crying out upon me in their +hearts for the coarseness of this paragraph. And so with the island +cannibals. They were not cruel; apart from this custom, they are +a race of the most kindly; rightly speaking, to cut a man’s flesh +after he is dead is far less hateful than to oppress him whilst he lives; +and even the victims of their appetite were gently used in life and +suddenly and painlessly despatched at last. In island circles +of refinement it was doubtless thought bad taste to expatiate on what +was ugly in the practice.<br> +<br> +Cannibalism is traced from end to end of the Pacific, from the Marquesas +to New Guinea, from New Zealand to Hawaii, here in the lively haunt +of its exercise, there by scanty but significant survivals. Hawaii +is the most doubtful. We find cannibalism chronicled in Hawaii, +only in the history of a single war, where it seems to have been thought +exception, as in the case of mountain outlaws, such as fell by the hand +of Theseus. In Tahiti, a single circumstance survived, but that +appears conclusive. In historic times, when human oblation was +made in the marae, the eyes of the victim were formally offered to the +chief: a delicacy to the leading guest. All Melanesia appears +tainted. In Micronesia, in the Marshalls, with which my acquaintance +is no more than that of a tourist, I could find no trace at all; and +even in the Gilbert zone I long looked and asked in vain. I was +told tales indeed of men who had been eaten in a famine; but these were +nothing to my purpose, for the same thing is done under the same stress +by all kindreds and generations of men. At last, in some manuscript +notes of Dr. Turner’s, which I was allowed to consult at Malua, +I came on one damning evidence: on the island of Onoatoa the punishment +for theft was to be killed and eaten. How shall we account for +the universality of the practice over so vast an area, among people +of such varying civilisation, and, with whatever intermixture, of such +different blood? What circumstance is common to them all, but +that they lived on islands destitute, or very nearly so, of animal food? +I can never find it in my appetite that man was meant to live on vegetables +only. When our stores ran low among the islands, I grew to weary +for the recurrent day when economy allowed us to open another tin of +miserable mutton. And in at least one ocean language, a particular +word denotes that a man is ‘hungry for fish,’ having reached +that stage when vegetables can no longer satisfy, and his soul, like +those of the Hebrews in the desert, begins to lust after flesh-pots. +Add to this the evidences of over-population and imminent famine already +adduced, and I think we see some ground of indulgence for the island +cannibal.<br> +<br> +It is right to look at both sides of any question; but I am far from +making the apology of this worse than bestial vice. The higher +Polynesian races, such as the Tahitians, Hawaiians, and Samoans, had +one and all outgrown, and some of them had in part forgot, the practice, +before Cook or Bougainville had shown a top-sail in their waters. +It lingered only in some low islands where life was difficult to maintain, +and among inveterate savages like the New-Zealanders or the Marquesans. +The Marquesans intertwined man-eating with the whole texture of their +lives; long-pig was in a sense their currency and sacrament; it formed +the hire of the artist, illustrated public events, and was the occasion +and attraction of a feast. To-day they are paying the penalty +of this bloody commixture. The civil power, in its crusade against +man-eating, has had to examine one after another all Marquesan arts +and pleasures, has found them one after another tainted with a cannibal +element, and one after another has placed them on the proscript list. +Their art of tattooing stood by itself, the execution exquisite, the +designs most beautiful and intricate; nothing more handsomely sets off +a handsome man; it may cost some pain in the beginning, but I doubt +if it be near so painful in the long-run, and I am sure it is far more +becoming than the ignoble European practice of tight-lacing among women. +And now it has been found needful to forbid the art. Their songs +and dances were numerous (and the law has had to abolish them by the +dozen). They now face empty-handed the tedium of their uneventful +days; and who shall pity them? The least rigorous will say that +they were justly served.<br> +<br> +Death alone could not satisfy Marquesan vengeance: the flesh must be +eaten. The chief who seized Mr. Whalon preferred to eat him; and +he thought he had justified the wish when he explained it was a vengeance. +Two or three years ago, the people of a valley seized and slew a wretch +who had offended them. His offence, it is to be supposed, was +dire; they could not bear to leave their vengeance incomplete, and, +under the eyes of the French, they did not dare to hold a public festival. +The body was accordingly divided; and every man retired to his own house +to consummate the rite in secret, carrying his proportion of the dreadful +meat in a Swedish match-box. The barbarous substance of the drama +and the European properties employed offer a seizing contrast to the +imagination. Yet more striking is another incident of the very +year when I was there myself, 1888. In the spring, a man and woman +skulked about the school-house in Hiva-oa till they found a particular +child alone. Him they approached with honeyed words and carneying +manners - ‘You are So-and-so, son of So-and-so?’ they asked; +and caressed and beguiled him deeper in the woods. Some instinct +woke in the child’s bosom, or some look betrayed the horrid purpose +of his deceivers. He sought to break from them; he screamed; and +they, casting off the mask, seized him the more strongly and began to +run. His cries were heard; his schoolmates, playing not far off, +came running to the rescue; and the sinister couple fled and vanished +in the woods. They were never identified; no prosecution followed; +but it was currently supposed they had some grudge against the boy’s +father, and designed to eat him in revenge. All over the islands, +as at home among our own ancestors, it will be observed that the avenger +takes no particular heed to strike an individual. A family, a +class, a village, a whole valley or island, a whole race of mankind, +share equally the guilt of any member. So, in the above story, +the son was to pay the penalty for his father; so Mr. Whalon, the mate +of an American whaler, was to bleed and be eaten for the misdeeds of +a Peruvian slaver. I am reminded of an incident in Jaluit in the +Marshall group, which was told me by an eye-witness, and which I tell +here again for the strangeness of the scene. Two men had awakened +the animosity of the Jaluit chiefs; and it was their wives who were +selected to be punished. A single native served as executioner. +Early in the morning, in the face of a large concourse of spectators, +he waded out upon the reef between his victims. These neither +complained nor resisted; accompanied their destroyer patiently; stooped +down, when they had waded deep enough, at his command; and he (laying +one hand upon the shoulders of each) held them under water till they +drowned. Doubtless, although my informant did not tell me so, +their families would be lamenting aloud upon the beach.<br> +<br> +It was from Hatiheu that I paid my first visit to a cannibal high place.<br> +<br> +The day was sultry and clouded. Drenching tropical showers succeeded +bursts of sweltering sunshine. The green pathway of the road wound +steeply upward. As we went, our little schoolboy guide a little +ahead of us, Father Simeon had his portfolio in his hand, and named +the trees for me, and read aloud from his notes the abstract of their +virtues. Presently the road, mounting, showed us the vale of Hatiheu, +on a larger scale; and the priest, with occasional reference to our +guide, pointed out the boundaries and told me the names of the larger +tribes that lived at perpetual war in the old days: one on the north-east, +one along the beach, one behind upon the mountain. With a survivor +of this latter clan Father Simeon had spoken; until the pacification +he had never been to the sea’s edge, nor, if I remember exactly, +eaten of sea-fish. Each in its own district, the septs lived cantoned +and beleaguered. One step without the boundaries was to affront +death. If famine came, the men must out to the woods to gather +chestnuts and small fruits; even as to this day, if the parents are +backward in their weekly doles, school must be broken up and the scholars +sent foraging. But in the old days, when there was trouble in +one clan, there would be activity in all its neighbours; the woods would +be laid full of ambushes; and he who went after vegetables for himself +might remain to be a joint for his hereditary foes. Nor was the +pointed occasion needful. A dozen different natural signs and +social junctures called this people to the war-path and the cannibal +hunt. Let one of chiefly rank have finished his tattooing, the +wife of one be near upon her time, two of the debauching streams have +deviated nearer on the beach of Hatiheu, a certain bird have been heard +to sing, a certain ominous formation of cloud observed above the northern +sea; and instantly the arms were oiled, and the man-hunters swarmed +into the wood to lay their fratricidal ambuscades. It appears +besides that occasionally, perhaps in famine, the priest would shut +himself in his house, where he lay for a stated period like a person +dead. When he came forth it was to run for three days through +the territory of the clan, naked and starving, and to sleep at night +alone in the high place. It was now the turn of the others to +keep the house, for to encounter the priest upon his rounds was death. +On the eve of the fourth day the time of the running was over; the priest +returned to his roof, the laymen came forth, and in the morning the +number of the victims was announced. I have this tale of the priest +on one authority - I think a good one, - but I set it down with diffidence. +The particulars are so striking that, had they been true, I almost think +I must have heard them oftener referred to. Upon one point there +seems to be no question: that the feast was sometimes furnished from +within the clan. In times of scarcity, all who were not protected +by their family connections - in the Highland expression, all the commons +of the clan - had cause to tremble. It was vain to resist, it +was useless to flee. They were begirt upon all hands by cannibals; +and the oven was ready to smoke for them abroad in the country of their +foes, or at home in the valley of their fathers.<br> +<br> +At a certain corner of the road our scholar-guide struck off to his +left into the twilight of the forest. We were now on one of the +ancient native roads, plunged in a high vault of wood, and clambering, +it seemed, at random over boulders and dead trees; but the lad wound +in and out and up and down without a check, for these paths are to the +natives as marked as the king’s highway is to us; insomuch that, +in the days of the man-hunt, it was their labour rather to block and +deface than to improve them. In the crypt of the wood the air +was clammy and hot and cold; overhead, upon the leaves, the tropical +rain uproariously poured, but only here and there, as through holes +in a leaky roof, a single drop would fall, and make a spot upon my mackintosh. +Presently the huge trunk of a banyan hove in sight, standing upon what +seemed the ruins of an ancient fort; and our guide, halting and holding +forth his arm, announced that we had reached the <i>paepae tapu.<br> +<br> +Paepae</i> signifies a floor or platform such as a native house is built +on; and even such a paepae - a paepae hae - may be called a paepae tapu +in a lesser sense when it is deserted and becomes the haunt of spirits; +but the public high place, such as I was now treading, was a thing on +a great scale. As far as my eyes could pierce through the dark +undergrowth, the floor of the forest was all paved. Three tiers +of terrace ran on the slope of the hill; in front, a crumbling parapet +contained the main arena; and the pavement of that was pierced and parcelled +out with several wells and small enclosures. No trace remained +of any superstructure, and the scheme of the amphitheatre was difficult +to seize. I visited another in Hiva-oa, smaller but more perfect, +where it was easy to follow rows of benches, and to distinguish isolated +seats of honour for eminent persons; and where, on the upper platform, +a single joist of the temple or dead-house still remained, its uprights +richly carved. In the old days the high place was sedulously tended. +No tree except the sacred banyan was suffered to encroach upon its grades, +no dead leaf to rot upon the pavement. The stones were smoothly +set, and I am told they were kept bright with oil. On all sides +the guardians lay encamped in their subsidiary huts to watch and cleanse +it. No other foot of man was suffered to draw near; only the priest, +in the days of his running, came there to sleep - perhaps to dream of +his ungodly errand; but, in the time of the feast, the clan trooped +to the high place in a body, and each had his appointed seat. +There were places for the chiefs, the drummers, the dancers, the women, +and the priests. The drums - perhaps twenty strong, and some of +them twelve feet high - continuously throbbed in time. In time +the singers kept up their long-drawn, lugubrious, ululating song; in +time, too, the dancers, tricked out in singular finery, stepped, leaped, +swayed, and gesticulated - their plumed fingers fluttering in the air +like butterflies. The sense of time, in all these ocean races, +is extremely perfect; and I conceive in such a festival that almost +every sound and movement fell in one. So much the more unanimously +must have grown the agitation of the feasters; so much the more wild +must have been the scene to any European who could have beheld them +there, in the strong sun and the strong shadow of the banyan, rubbed +with saffron to throw in a more high relief the arabesque of the tattoo; +the women bleached by days of confinement to a complexion almost European; +the chiefs crowned with silver plumes of old men’s beards and +girt with kirtles of the hair of dead women. All manner of island +food was meanwhile spread for the women and the commons; and, for those +who were privileged to eat of it, there were carried up to the dead-house +the baskets of long-pig. It is told that the feasts were long +kept up; the people came from them brutishly exhausted with debauchery, +and the chiefs heavy with their beastly food. There are certain +sentiments which we call emphatically human - denying the honour of +that name to those who lack them. In such feasts - particularly +where the victim has been slain at home, and men banqueted on the poor +clay of a comrade with whom they had played in infancy, or a woman whose +favours they had shared - the whole body of these sentiments is outraged. +To consider it too closely is to understand, if not to excuse, the fervours +of self-righteous old ship-captains, who would man their guns, and open +fire in passing, on a cannibal island.<br> +<br> +And yet it was strange. There, upon the spot, as I stood under +the high, dripping vault of the forest, with the young priest on the +one hand, in his kilted gown, and the bright-eyed Marquesan schoolboy +on the other, the whole business appeared infinitely distant, and fallen +in the cold perspective and dry light of history. The bearing +of the priest, perhaps, affected me. He smiled; he jested with the boy, +the heir both of these feasters and their meat; he clapped his hands, +and gave me a stave of one of the old, ill-omened choruses. Centuries +might have come and gone since this slimy theatre was last in operation; +and I beheld the place with no more emotion than I might have felt in +visiting Stonehenge. In Hiva-oa, as I began to appreciate that +the thing was still living and latent about my footsteps, and that it +was still within the bounds of possibility that I might hear the cry +of the trapped victim, my historic attitude entirely failed, and I was +sensible of some repugnance for the natives. But here, too, the +priests maintained their jocular attitude: rallying the cannibals as +upon an eccentricity rather absurd than horrible; seeking, I should +say, to shame them from the practice by good-natured ridicule, as we +shame a child from stealing sugar. We may here recognise the temperate +and sagacious mind of Bishop Dordillon.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER XII - THE STORY OF A PLANTATION<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +Taahauku, on the south-westerly coast of the island of Hiva-oa - Tahuku, +say the slovenly whites - may be called the port of Atuona. It +is a narrow and small anchorage, set between low cliffy points, and +opening above upon a woody valley: a little French fort, now disused +and deserted, overhangs the valley and the inlet. Atuona itself, +at the head of the next bay, is framed in a theatre of mountains, which +dominate the more immediate settling of Taahauku and give the salient +character of the scene. They are reckoned at no higher than four +thousand feet; but Tahiti with eight thousand, and Hawaii with fifteen, +can offer no such picture of abrupt, melancholy alps. In the morning, +when the sun falls directly on their front, they stand like a vast wall: +green to the summit, if by any chance the summit should be clear - water-courses +here and there delineated on their face, as narrow as cracks. +Towards afternoon, the light falls more obliquely, and the sculpture +of the range comes in relief, huge gorges sinking into shadow, huge, +tortuous buttresses standing edged with sun. At all hours of the +day they strike the eye with some new beauty, and the mind with the +same menacing gloom.<br> +<br> +The mountains, dividing and deflecting the endless airy deluge of the +Trade, are doubtless answerable for the climate. A strong draught +of wind blew day and night over the anchorage. Day and night the +same fantastic and attenuated clouds fled across the heavens, the same +dusky cap of rain and vapour fell and rose on the mountain. The +land-breezes came very strong and chill, and the sea, like the air, +was in perpetual bustle. The swell crowded into the narrow anchorage +like sheep into a fold; broke all along both sides, high on the one, +low on the other; kept a certain blowhole sounding and smoking like +a cannon; and spent itself at last upon the beach.<br> +<br> +On the side away from Atuona, the sheltering promontory was a nursery +of coco-trees. Some were mere infants, none had attained to any +size, none had yet begun to shoot skyward with that whip-like shaft +of the mature palm. In the young trees the colour alters with +the age and growth. Now all is of a grass-like hue, infinitely +dainty; next the rib grows golden, the fronds remaining green as ferns; +and then, as the trunk continues to mount and to assume its final hue +of grey, the fans put on manlier and more decided depths of verdure, +stand out dark upon the distance, glisten against the sun, and flash +like silver fountains in the assault of the wind. In this young +wood of Taahauku, all these hues and combinations were exampled and +repeated by the score. The trees grew pleasantly spaced upon a +hilly sward, here and there interspersed with a rack for drying copra, +or a tumble-down hut for storing it. Every here and there the +stroller had a glimpse of the <i>Casco</i> tossing in the narrow anchorage +below; and beyond he had ever before him the dark amphitheatre of the +Atuona mountains and the cliffy bluff that closes it to seaward. +The trade-wind moving in the fans made a ceaseless noise of summer rain; +and from time to time, with the sound of a sudden and distant drum-beat, +the surf would burst in a sea-cave.<br> +<br> +At the upper end of the inlet, its low, cliffy lining sinks, at both +sides, into a beach. A copra warehouse stands in the shadow of +the shoreside trees, flitted about for ever by a clan of dwarfish swallows; +and a line of rails on a high wooden staging bends back into the mouth +of the valley. Walking on this, the new-landed traveller becomes +aware of a broad fresh-water lagoon (one arm of which he crosses), and +beyond, of a grove of noble palms, sheltering the house of the trader, +Mr. Keane. Overhead, the cocos join in a continuous and lofty +roof; blackbirds are heard lustily singing; the island cock springs +his jubilant rattle and airs his golden plumage; cow-bells sound far +and near in the grove; and when you sit in the broad verandah, lulled +by this symphony, you may say to yourself, if you are able: ‘Better +fifty years of Europe . . .’ Farther on, the floor of the +valley is flat and green, and dotted here and there with stripling coco-palms. +Through the midst, with many changes of music, the river trots and brawls; +and along its course, where we should look for willows, puraos grow +in clusters, and make shadowy pools after an angler’s heart. +A vale more rich and peaceful, sweeter air, a sweeter voice of rural +sounds, I have found nowhere. One circumstance alone might strike +the experienced: here is a convenient beach, deep soil, good water, +and yet nowhere any paepaes, nowhere any trace of island habitation.<br> +<br> +It is but a few years since this valley was a place choked with jungle, +the debatable land and battle-ground of cannibals. Two clans laid +claim to it - neither could substantiate the claim, and the roads lay +desert, or were only visited by men in arms. It is for this very +reason that it wears now so smiling an appearance: cleared, planted, +built upon, supplied with railways, boat-houses, and bath-houses. +For, being no man’s land, it was the more readily ceded to a stranger. +The stranger was Captain John Hart: Ima Hati, ‘Broken-arm,’ +the natives call him, because when he first visited the islands his +arm was in a sling. Captain Hart, a man of English birth, but +an American subject, had conceived the idea of cotton culture in the +Marquesas during the American War, and was at first rewarded with success. +His plantation at Anaho was highly productive; island cotton fetched +a high price, and the natives used to debate which was the stronger +power, Ima Hati or the French: deciding in favour of the captain, because, +though the French had the most ships, he had the more money.<br> +<br> +He marked Taahauku for a suitable site, acquired it, and offered the +superintendence to Mr. Robert Stewart, a Fifeshire man, already some +time in the islands, who had just been ruined by a war on Tauata. +Mr. Stewart was somewhat averse to the adventure, having some acquaintance +with Atuona and its notorious chieftain, Moipu. He had once landed +there, he told me, about dusk, and found the remains of a man and woman +partly eaten. On his starting and sickening at the sight, one +of Moipu’s young men picked up a human foot, and provocatively +staring at the stranger, grinned and nibbled at the heel. None +need be surprised if Mr. Stewart fled incontinently to the bush, lay +there all night in a great horror of mind, and got off to sea again +by daylight on the morrow. ‘It was always a bad place, Atuona,’ +commented Mr. Stewart, in his homely Fifeshire voice. In spite +of this dire introduction, he accepted the captain’s offer, was +landed at Taahauku with three Chinamen, and proceeded to clear the jungle.<br> +<br> +War was pursued at that time, almost without interval, between the men +of Atuona and the men of Haamau; and one day, from the opposite sides +of the valley, battle - or I should rather say the noise of battle - +raged all the afternoon: the shots and insults of the opposing clans +passing from hill to hill over the heads of Mr. Stewart and his Chinamen. +There was no genuine fighting; it was like a bicker of schoolboys, only +some fool had given the children guns. One man died of his exertions +in running, the only casualty. With night the shots and insults +ceased; the men of Haamau withdrew; and victory, on some occult principle, +was scored to Moipu. Perhaps, in consequence, there came a day +when Moipu made a feast, and a party from Haamau came under safe-conduct +to eat of it. These passed early by Taahauku, and some of Moipu’s +young men were there to be a guard of honour. They were not long +gone before there came down from Haamau, a man, his wife, and a girl +of twelve, their daughter, bringing fungus. Several Atuona lads +were hanging round the store; but the day being one of truce none apprehended +danger. The fungus was weighed and paid for; the man of Haamau +proposed he should have his axe ground in the bargain; and Mr. Stewart +demurring at the trouble, some of the Atuona lads offered to grind it +for him, and set it on the wheel. While the axe was grinding, +a friendly native whispered Mr. Stewart to have a care of himself, for +there was trouble in hand; and, all at once, the man of Haamau was seized, +and his head and arm stricken from his body, the head at one sweep of +his own newly sharpened axe. In the first alert, the girl escaped +among the cotton; and Mr. Stewart, having thrust the wife into the house +and locked her in from the outside, supposed the affair was over. +But the business had not passed without noise, and it reached the ears +of an older girl who had loitered by the way, and who now came hastily +down the valley, crying as she came for her father. Her, too, +they seized and beheaded; I know not what they had done with the axe, +it was a blunt knife that served their butcherly turn upon the girl; +and the blood spurted in fountains and painted them from head to foot. +Thus horrible from crime, the party returned to Atuona, carrying the +heads to Moipu. It may be fancied how the feast broke up; but +it is notable that the guests were honourably suffered to retire. +These passed back through Taahauku in extreme disorder; a little after +the valley began to be overrun with shouting and triumphing braves; +and a letter of warning coming at the same time to Mr. Stewart, he and +his Chinamen took refuge with the Protestant missionary in Atuona. +That night the store was gutted, and the bodies cast in a pit and covered +with leaves. Three days later the schooner had come in; and things +appearing quieter, Mr. Stewart and the captain landed in Taahauku to +compute the damage and to view the grave, which was already indicated +by the stench. While they were so employed, a party of Moipu’s +young men, decked with red flannel to indicate martial sentiments, came +over the hills from Atuona, dug up the bodies, washed them in the river, +and carried them away on sticks. That night the feast began.<br> +<br> +Those who knew Mr. Stewart before this experience declare the man to +be quite altered. He stuck, however, to his post; and somewhat +later, when the plantation was already well established, and gave employment +to sixty Chinamen and seventy natives, he found himself once more in +dangerous times. The men of Haamau, it was reported, had sworn +to plunder and erase the settlement; letters came continually from the +Hawaiian missionary, who acted as intelligence department; and for six +weeks Mr. Stewart and three other whites slept in the cotton-house at +night in a rampart of bales, and (what was their best defence) ostentatiously +practised rifle-shooting by day upon the beach. Natives were often +there to watch them; the practice was excellent; and the assault was +never delivered - if it ever was intended, which I doubt, for the natives +are more famous for false rumours than for deeds of energy. I +was told the late French war was a case in point; the tribes on the +beach accusing those in the mountains of designs which they had never +the hardihood to entertain. And the same testimony to their backwardness +in open battle reached me from all sides. Captain Hart once landed +after an engagement in a certain bay; one man had his hand hurt, an +old woman and two children had been slain; and the captain improved +the occasion by poulticing the hand, and taunting both sides upon so +wretched an affair. It is true these wars were often merely formal +- comparable with duels to the first blood. Captain Hart visited +a bay where such a war was being carried on between two brothers, one +of whom had been thought wanting in civility to the guests of the other. +About one-half of the population served day about on alternate sides, +so as to be well with each when the inevitable peace should follow. +The forts of the belligerents were over against each other, and close +by. Pigs were cooking. Well-oiled braves, with well-oiled +muskets, strutted on the paepae or sat down to feast. No business, +however needful, could be done, and all thoughts were supposed to be +centred in this mockery of war. A few days later, by a regrettable +accident, a man was killed; it was felt at once the thing had gone too +far, and the quarrel was instantly patched up. But the more serious +wars were prosecuted in a similar spirit; a gift of pigs and a feast +made their inevitable end; the killing of a single man was a great victory, +and the murder of defenceless solitaries counted a heroic deed.<br> +<br> +The foot of the cliffs, about all these islands, is the place of fishing. +Between Taahauku and Atuona we saw men, but chiefly women, some nearly +naked, some in thin white or crimson dresses, perched in little surf-beat +promontories - the brown precipice overhanging them, and the convolvulus +overhanging that, as if to cut them off the more completely from assistance. +There they would angle much of the morning; and as fast as they caught +any fish, eat them, raw and living, where they stood. It was such +helpless ones that the warriors from the opposite island of Tauata slew, +and carried home and ate, and were thereupon accounted mighty men of +valour. Of one such exploit I can give the account of an eye-witness. +‘Portuguese Joe,’ Mr. Keane’s cook, was once pulling +an oar in an Atuona boat, when they spied a stranger in a canoe with +some fish and a piece of tapu. The Atuona men cried upon him to +draw near and have a smoke. He complied, because, I suppose, he +had no choice; but he knew, poor devil, what he was coming to, and (as +Joe said) ‘he didn’t seem to care about the smoke.’ +A few questions followed, as to where he came from, and what was his +business. These he must needs answer, as he must needs draw at +the unwelcome pipe, his heart the while drying in his bosom. And +then, of a sudden, a big fellow in Joe’s boat leaned over, plucked +the stranger from his canoe, struck him with a knife in the neck - inward +and downward, as Joe showed in pantomime more expressive than his words +- and held him under water, like a fowl, until his struggles ceased. +Whereupon the long-pig was hauled on board, the boat’s head turned +about for Atuona, and these Marquesan braves pulled home rejoicing. +Moipu was on the beach and rejoiced with them on their arrival. +Poor Joe toiled at his oar that day with a white face, yet he had no +fear for himself. ‘They were very good to me - gave me plenty +grub: never wished to eat white man,’ said he.<br> +<br> +If the most horrible experience was Mr. Stewart’s, it was Captain +Hart himself who ran the nearest danger. He had bought a piece +of land from Timau, chief of a neighbouring bay, and put some Chinese +there to work. Visiting the station with one of the Godeffroys, +he found his Chinamen trooping to the beach in terror: Timau had driven +them out, seized their effects, and was in war attire with his young +men. A boat was despatched to Taahauku for reinforcement; as they +awaited her return, they could see, from the deck of the schooner, Timau +and his young men dancing the war-dance on the hill-top till past twelve +at night; and so soon as the boat came (bringing three gendarmes, armed +with chassepots, two white men from Taahauku station, and some native +warriors) the party set out to seize the chief before he should awake. +Day was not come, and it was a very bright moonlight morning, when they +reached the hill-top where (in a house of palm-leaves) Timau was sleeping +off his debauch. The assailants were fully exposed, the interior +of the hut quite dark; the position far from sound. The gendarmes +knelt with their pieces ready, and Captain Hart advanced alone. +As he drew near the door he heard the snap of a gun cocking from within, +and in sheer self-defence - there being no other escape - sprang into +the house and grappled Timau. ‘Timau, come with me!’ +he cried. But Timau - a great fellow, his eyes blood-red with +the abuse of kava, six foot three in stature - cast him on one side; +and the captain, instantly expecting to be either shot or brained, discharged +his pistol in the dark. When they carried Timau out at the door +into the moonlight, he was already dead, and, upon this unlooked-for +termination of their sally, the whites appeared to have lost all conduct, +and retreated to the boats, fired upon by the natives as they went. +Captain Hart, who almost rivals Bishop Dordillon in popularity, shared +with him the policy of extreme indulgence to the natives, regarding +them as children, making light of their defects, and constantly in favour +of mild measures. The death of Timau has thus somewhat weighed +upon his mind; the more so, as the chieftain’s musket was found +in the house unloaded. To a less delicate conscience the matter +will seem light. If a drunken savage elects to cock a fire-arm, +a gentleman advancing towards him in the open cannot wait to make sure +if it be charged.<br> +<br> +I have touched on the captain’s popularity. It is one of +the things that most strikes a stranger in the Marquesas. He comes +instantly on two names, both new to him, both locally famous, both mentioned +by all with affection and respect - the bishop’s and the captain’s. +It gave me a strong desire to meet with the survivor, which was subsequently +gratified - to the enrichment of these pages. Long after that +again, in the Place Dolorous - Molokai - I came once more on the traces +of that affectionate popularity. There was a blind white leper +there, an old sailor - ‘an old tough,’ he called himself +- who had long sailed among the eastern islands. Him I used to +visit, and, being fresh from the scenes of his activity, gave him the +news. This (in the true island style) was largely a chronicle +of wrecks; and it chanced I mentioned the case of one not very successful +captain, and how he had lost a vessel for Mr. Hart; thereupon the blind +leper broke forth in lamentation. ‘Did he lose a ship of +John Hart’s?’ he cried; ‘poor John Hart! Well, +I’m sorry it was Hart’s,’ with needless force of epithet, +which I neglect to reproduce.<br> +<br> +Perhaps, if Captain Hart’s affairs had continued to prosper, his +popularity might have been different. Success wins glory, but +it kills affection, which misfortune fosters. And the misfortune +which overtook the captain’s enterprise was truly singular. +He was at the top of his career. Ile Masse belonged to him, given +by the French as an indemnity for the robberies at Taahauku. But +the Ile Masse was only suitable for cattle; and his two chief stations +were Anaho, in Nuka-hiva, facing the north-east, and Taahauku in Hiva-oa, +some hundred miles to the southward, and facing the south-west. +Both these were on the same day swept by a tidal wave, which was not +felt in any other bay or island of the group. The south coast +of Hiva-oa was bestrewn with building timber and camphor-wood chests, +containing goods; which, on the promise of a reasonable salvage, the +natives very honestly brought back, the chests apparently not opened, +and some of the wood after it had been built into their houses. +But the recovery of such jetsam could not affect the result. It +was impossible the captain should withstand this partiality of fortune; +and with his fall the prosperity of the Marquesas ended. Anaho +is truly extinct, Taahauku but a shadow of itself; nor has any new plantation +arisen in their stead.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER XIII - CHARACTERS<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +There was a certain traffic in our anchorage at Atuona; different indeed +from the dead inertia and quiescence of the sister island, Nuka-hiva. +Sails were seen steering from its mouth; now it would be a whale-boat +manned with native rowdies, and heavy with copra for sale; now perhaps +a single canoe come after commodities to buy. The anchorage was +besides frequented by fishers; not only the lone females perched in +niches of the cliff, but whole parties, who would sometimes camp and +build a fire upon the beach, and sometimes lie in their canoes in the +midst of the haven and jump by turns in the water; which they would +cast eight or nine feet high, to drive, as we supposed, the fish into +their nets. The goods the purchasers came to buy were sometimes +quaint. I remarked one outrigger returning with a single ham swung +from a pole in the stern. And one day there came into Mr. Keane’s +store a charming lad, excellently mannered, speaking French correctly +though with a babyish accent; very handsome too, and much of a dandy, +as was shown not only in his shining raiment, but by the nature of his +purchases. These were five ship-biscuits, a bottle of scent, and +two balls of washing blue. He was from Tauata, whither he returned +the same night in an outrigger, daring the deep with these young-ladyish +treasures. The gross of the native passengers were more ill-favoured: +tall, powerful fellows, well tattooed, and with disquieting manners. +Something coarse and jeering distinguished them, and I was often reminded +of the slums of some great city. One night, as dusk was falling, +a whale-boat put in on that part of the beach where I chanced to be +alone. Six or seven ruffianly fellows scrambled out; all had enough +English to give me ‘good-bye,’ which was the ordinary salutation; +or ‘good-morning,’ which they seemed to regard as an intensitive; +jests followed, they surrounded me with harsh laughter and rude looks, +and I was glad to move away. I had not yet encountered Mr. Stewart, +or I should have been reminded of his first landing at Atuona and the +humorist who nibbled at the heel. But their neighbourhood depressed +me; and I felt, if I had been there a castaway and out of reach of help, +my heart would have been sick.<br> +<br> +Nor was the traffic altogether native. While we lay in the anchorage +there befell a strange coincidence. A schooner was observed at +sea and aiming to enter. We knew all the schooners in the group, +but this appeared larger than any; she was rigged, besides, after the +English manner; and, coming to an anchor some way outside the <i>Casco</i>, +showed at last the blue ensign. There were at that time, according +to rumour, no fewer than four yachts in the Pacific; but it was strange +that any two of them should thus lie side by side in that outlandish +inlet: stranger still that in the owner of the <i>Nyanza</i>, Captain +Dewar, I should find a man of the same country and the same county with +myself, and one whom I had seen walking as a boy on the shores of the +Alpes Maritimes.<br> +<br> +We had besides a white visitor from shore, who came and departed in +a crowded whale-boat manned by natives; having read of yachts in the +Sunday papers, and being fired with the desire to see one. Captain +Chase, they called him, an old whaler-man, thickset and white-bearded, +with a strong Indiana drawl; years old in the country, a good backer +in battle, and one of those dead shots whose practice at the target +struck terror in the braves of Haamau. Captain Chase dwelt farther +east in a bay called Hanamate, with a Mr. M’Callum; or rather +they had dwelt together once, and were now amicably separated. +The captain is to be found near one end of the bay, in a wreck of a +house, and waited on by a Chinese. At the point of the opposing +corner another habitation stands on a tall paepae. The surf runs +there exceeding heavy, seas of seven and eight feet high bursting under +the walls of the house, which is thus continually filled with their +clamour, and rendered fit only for solitary, or at least for silent, +inmates. Here it is that Mr. M’Callum, with a Shakespeare +and a Burns, enjoys the society of the breakers. His name and +his Burns testify to Scottish blood; but he is an American born, somewhere +far east; followed the trade of a ship-carpenter; and was long employed, +the captain of a hundred Indians, breaking up wrecks about Cape Flattery. +Many of the whites who are to be found scattered in the South Seas represent +the more artistic portion of their class; and not only enjoy the poetry +of that new life, but came there on purpose to enjoy it. I have +been shipmates with a man, no longer young, who sailed upon that voyage, +his first time to sea, for the mere love of Samoa; and it was a few +letters in a newspaper that sent him on that pilgrimage. Mr. M’Callum +was another instance of the same. He had read of the South Seas; +loved to read of them; and let their image fasten in his heart: till +at length he could refrain no longer - must set forth, a new Rudel, +for that unseen homeland - and has now dwelt for years in Hiva-oa, and +will lay his bones there in the end with full content; having no desire +to behold again the places of his boyhood, only, perhaps - once, before +he dies - the rude and wintry landscape of Cape Flattery. Yet +he is an active man, full of schemes; has bought land of the natives; +has planted five thousand coco-palms; has a desert island in his eye, +which he desires to lease, and a schooner in the stocks, which he has +laid and built himself, and even hopes to finish. Mr. M’Callum +and I did not meet, but, like gallant troubadours, corresponded in verse. +I hope he will not consider it a breach of copyright if I give here +a specimen of his muse. He and Bishop Dordillon are the two European +bards of the Marquesas.<br> +<br> +<br> +‘Sail, ho! Ahoy! <i>Casco,<br> +</i>First among the pleasure fleet<br> +That came around to greet<br> +These isles from San Francisco,<br> +<br> +And first, too; only one<br> +Among the literary men<br> +That this way has ever been -<br> +Welcome, then, to Stevenson.<br> +<br> +Please not offended be<br> +At this little notice<br> +Of the <i>Casco</i>, Captain Otis,<br> +With the novelist’s family.<br> +<br> +<i>Avoir une voyage magnifical<br> +</i>Is our wish sincere,<br> +That you’ll have from here<br> +<i>Allant sur la Grande Pacifical</i>.’<br> +<br> +<br> +But our chief visitor was one Mapiao, a great Tahuku - which seems to +mean priest, wizard, tattooer, practiser of any art, or, in a word, +esoteric person - and a man famed for his eloquence on public occasions +and witty talk in private. His first appearance was typical of +the man. He came down clamorous to the eastern landing, where +the surf was running very high; scorned all our signals to go round +the bay; carried his point, was brought aboard at some hazard to our +skiff, and set down in one corner of the cockpit to his appointed task. +He had been hired, as one cunning in the art, to make my old men’s +beards into a wreath: what a wreath for Celia’s arbour! +His own beard (which he carried, for greater safety, in a sailor’s +knot) was not merely the adornment of his age, but a substantial piece +of property. One hundred dollars was the estimated value; and +as Brother Michel never knew a native to deposit a greater sum with +Bishop Dordillon, our friend was a rich man in virtue of his chin. +He had something of an East Indian cast, but taller and stronger: his +nose hooked, his face narrow, his forehead very high, the whole elaborately +tattooed. I may say I have never entertained a guest so trying. +In the least particular he must be waited on; he would not go to the +scuttle-butt for water; he would not even reach to get the glass, it +must be given him in his hand; if aid were denied him, he would fold +his arms, bow his head, and go without: only the work would suffer. +Early the first forenoon he called aloud for biscuit and salmon; biscuit +and ham were brought; he looked on them inscrutably, and signed they +should be set aside. A number of considerations crowded on my +mind; how the sort of work on which he was engaged was probably tapu +in a high degree; should by rights, perhaps, be transacted on a tapu +platform which no female might approach; and it was possible that fish +might be the essential diet. Some salted fish I therefore brought +him, and along with that a glass of rum: at sight of which Mapiao displayed +extraordinary animation, pointed to the zenith, made a long speech in +which I picked up <i>umati</i> - the word for the sun - and signed to +me once more to place these dainties out of reach. At last I had +understood, and every day the programme was the same. At an early +period of the morning his dinner must be set forth on the roof of the +house and at a proper distance, full in view but just out of reach; +and not until the fit hour, which was the point of noon, would the artificer +partake. This solemnity was the cause of an absurd misadventure. +He was seated plaiting, as usual, at the beards, his dinner arrayed +on the roof, and not far off a glass of water standing. It appears +he desired to drink; was of course far too great a gentleman to rise +and get the water for himself; and spying Mrs. Stevenson, imperiously +signed to her to hand it. The signal was misunderstood; Mrs. Stevenson +was, by this time, prepared for any eccentricity on the part of our +guest; and instead of passing him the water, flung his dinner overboard. +I must do Mapiao justice: all laughed, but his laughter rang the loudest.<br> +<br> +These troubles of service were at worst occasional; the embarrassment +of the man’s talk incessant. He was plainly a practised +conversationalist; the nicety of his inflections, the elegance of his +gestures, and the fine play of his expression, told us that. We, +meanwhile, sat like aliens in a playhouse; we could see the actors were +upon some material business and performing well, but the plot of the +drama remained undiscoverable. Names of places, the name of Captain +Hart, occasional disconnected words, tantalised without enlightening +us; and the less we understood, the more gallantly, the more copiously, +and with still the more explanatory gestures, Mapiao returned to the +assault. We could see his vanity was on the rack; being come to +a place where that fine jewel of his conversational talent could earn +him no respect; and he had times of despair when he desisted from the +endeavour, and instants of irritation when he regarded us with unconcealed +contempt. Yet for me, as the practitioner of some kindred mystery +to his own, he manifested to the last a measure of respect. As +we sat under the awning in opposite corners of the cockpit, he braiding +hairs from dead men’s chins, I forming runes upon a sheet of folio +paper, he would nod across to me as one Tahuku to another, or, crossing +the cockpit, study for a while my shapeless scrawl and encourage me +with a heartfelt ‘<i>mitai</i>! - good!’ So might +a deaf painter sympathise far off with a musician, as the slave and +master of some uncomprehended and yet kindred art. A silly trade, +he doubtless considered it; but a man must make allowance for barbarians +- <i>chaque pays a ses coutumes</i> - and he felt the principle was +there.<br> +<br> +The time came at last when his labours, which resembled those rather +of Penelope than Hercules, could be no more spun out, and nothing remained +but to pay him and say farewell. After a long, learned argument +in Marquesan, I gathered that his mind was set on fish-hooks; with three +of which, and a brace of dollars, I thought he was not ill rewarded +for passing his forenoons in our cockpit, eating, drinking, delivering +his opinions, and pressing the ship’s company into his menial +service. For all that, he was a man of so high a bearing, and +so like an uncle of my own who should have gone mad and got tattooed, +that I applied to him, when we were both on shore, to know if he were +satisfied. ‘<i>Mitai ehipe</i>?’ I asked. And +he, with rich unction, offering at the same time his hand - ‘<i>Mitai +ehipe, mitai</i> <i>kaehae; kaoha nui</i>!’ - or, to translate +freely: ‘The ship is good, the victuals are up to the mark, and +we part in friendship.’ Which testimonial uttered, he set +off along the beach with his head bowed and the air of one deeply injured.<br> +<br> +I saw him go, on my side, with relief. It would be more interesting +to learn how our relation seemed to Mapiao. His exigence, we may +suppose, was merely loyal. He had been hired by the ignorant to +do a piece of work; and he was bound that he would do it the right way. +Countless obstacles, continual ignorant ridicule, availed not to dissuade +him. He had his dinner laid out; watched it, as was fit, the while +he worked; ate it at the fit hour; was in all things served and waited +on; and could take his hire in the end with a clear conscience, telling +himself the mystery was performed duly, the beards rightfully braided, +and we (in spite of ourselves) correctly served. His view of our +stupidity, even he, the mighty talker, must have lacked language to +express. He never interfered with my Tahuku work; civilly praised +it, idle as it seemed; civilly supposed that I was competent in my own +mystery: such being the attitude of the intelligent and the polite. +And we, on the other hand - who had yet the most to gain or lose, since +the product was to be ours - who had professed our disability by the +very act of hiring him to do it - were never weary of impeding his own +more important labours, and sometimes lacked the sense and the civility +to refrain from laughter.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER XIV - IN A CANNIBAL VALLEY<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +The road from Taahauku to Atuona skirted the north-westerly side of +the anchorage, somewhat high up, edged, and sometimes shaded, by the +splendid flowers of the <i>flamboyant</i> - its English name I do not +know. At the turn of the hand, Atuona came in view: a long beach, +a heavy and loud breach of surf, a shore-side village scattered among +trees, and the guttered mountains drawing near on both sides above a +narrow and rich ravine. Its infamous repute perhaps affected me; +but I thought it the loveliest, and by far the most ominous and gloomy, +spot on earth. Beautiful it surely was; and even more salubrious. +The healthfulness of the whole group is amazing; that of Atuona almost +in the nature of a miracle. In Atuona, a village planted in a +shore-side marsh, the houses standing everywhere intermingled with the +pools of a taro-garden, we find every condition of tropical danger and +discomfort; and yet there are not even mosquitoes - not even the hateful +day-fly of Nuka-hiva - and fever, and its concomitant, the island fe’efe’e, +are unknown.<br> +<br> +This is the chief station of the French on the man-eating isle of Hiva-oa. +The sergeant of gendarmerie enjoys the style of the vice-resident, and +hoists the French colours over a quite extensive compound. A Chinaman, +a waif from the plantation, keeps a restaurant in the rear quarters +of the village; and the mission is well represented by the sister’s +school and Brother Michel’s church. Father Orens, a wonderful +octogenarian, his frame scarce bowed, the fire of his eye undimmed, +has lived, and trembled, and suffered in this place since 1843. +Again and again, when Moipu had made coco-brandy, he has been driven +from his house into the woods. ‘A mouse that dwelt in a +cat’s ear’ had a more easy resting-place; and yet I have +never seen a man that bore less mark of years. He must show us +the church, still decorated with the bishop’s artless ornaments +of paper - the last work of industrious old hands, and the last earthly +amusement of a man that was much of a hero. In the sacristy we +must see his sacred vessels, and, in particular, a vestment which was +a ‘<i>vraie curiosité</i>,’ because it had been given +by a gendarme. To the Protestant there is always something embarrassing +in the eagerness with which grown and holy men regard these trifles; +but it was touching and pretty to see Orens, his aged eyes shining in +his head, display his sacred treasures.<br> +<br> +<i>August</i> 26. - The vale behind the village, narrowing swiftly to +a mere ravine, was choked with profitable trees. A river gushed +in the midst. Overhead, the tall coco-palms made a primary covering; +above that, from one wall of the mountain to another, the ravine was +roofed with cloud; so that we moved below, amid teeming vegetation, +in a covered house of heat. On either hand, at every hundred yards, +instead of the houseless, disembowelling paepaes of Nuka-hiva, populous +houses turned out their inhabitants to cry ‘Kaoha!’ to the +passers-by. The road, too, was busy: strings of girls, fair and +foul, as in less favoured countries; men bearing breadfruit; the sisters, +with a little guard of pupils; a fellow bestriding a horse - passed +and greeted us continually; and now it was a Chinaman who came to the +gate of his flower-yard, and gave us ‘Good-day’ in excellent +English; and a little farther on it would be some natives who set us +down by the wayside, made us a feast of mummy-apple, and entertained +us as we ate with drumming on a tin case. With all this fine plenty +of men and fruit, death is at work here also. The population, +according to the highest estimate, does not exceed six hundred in the +whole vale of Atuona; and yet, when I once chanced to put the question, +Brother Michel counted up ten whom he knew to be sick beyond recovery. +It was here, too, that I could at last gratify my curiosity with the +sight of a native house in the very article of dissolution. It +had fallen flat along the paepae, its poles sprawling ungainly; the +rains and the mites contended against it; what remained seemed sound +enough, but much was gone already; and it was easy to see how the insects +consumed the walls as if they had been bread, and the air and the rain +ate into them like vitriol.<br> +<br> +A little ahead of us, a young gentleman, very well tattooed, and dressed +in a pair of white trousers and a flannel shirt, had been marching unconcernedly. +Of a sudden, without apparent cause, he turned back, took us in possession, +and led us undissuadably along a by-path to the river’s edge. +There, in a nook of the most attractive amenity, he bade us to sit down: +the stream splashing at our elbow, a shock of nondescript greenery enshrining +us from above; and thither, after a brief absence, he brought us a cocoa-nut, +a lump of sandal-wood, and a stick he had begun to carve: the nut for +present refreshment, the sandal-wood for a precious gift, and the stick +- in the simplicity of his vanity - to harvest premature praise. +Only one section was yet carved, although the whole was pencil-marked +in lengths; and when I proposed to buy it, Poni (for that was the artist’s +name) recoiled in horror. But I was not to be moved, and simply +refused restitution, for I had long wondered why a people who displayed, +in their tattooing, so great a gift of arabesque invention, should display +it nowhere else. Here, at last, I had found something of the same +talent in another medium; and I held the incompleteness, in these days +of world-wide brummagem, for a happy mark of authenticity. Neither +my reasons nor my purpose had I the means of making clear to Poni; I +could only hold on to the stick, and bid the artist follow me to the +gendarmerie, where I should find interpreters and money; but we gave +him, in the meanwhile, a boat-call in return for his sandal-wood. +As he came behind us down the vale he sounded upon this continually. +And continually, from the wayside houses, there poured forth little +groups of girls in crimson, or of men in white. And to these must +Poni pass the news of who the strangers were, of what they had been +doing, of why it was that Poni had a boat-whistle; and of why he was +now being haled to the vice-residency, uncertain whether to be punished +or rewarded, uncertain whether he had lost a stick or made a bargain, +but hopeful on the whole, and in the meanwhile highly consoled by the +boat-whistle. Whereupon he would tear himself away from this particular +group of inquirers, and once more we would hear the shrill call in our +wake.<br> +<br> +<i>August</i> 27. - I made a more extended circuit in the vale with +Brother Michel. We were mounted on a pair of sober nags, suitable +to these rude paths; the weather was exquisite, and the company in which +I found myself no less agreeable than the scenes through which I passed. +We mounted at first by a steep grade along the summit of one of those +twisted spurs that, from a distance, mark out provinces of sun and shade +upon the mountain-side. The ground fell away on either hand with +an extreme declivity. From either hand, out of profound ravines, +mounted the song of falling water and the smoke of household fires. +Here and there the hills of foliage would divide, and our eye would +plunge down upon one of these deep-nested habitations. And still, +high in front, arose the precipitous barrier of the mountain, greened +over where it seemed that scarce a harebell could find root, barred +with the zigzags of a human road where it seemed that not a goat could +scramble. And in truth, for all the labour that it cost, the road +is regarded even by the Marquesans as impassable; they will not risk +a horse on that ascent; and those who lie to the westward come and go +in their canoes. I never knew a hill to lose so little on a near +approach: a consequence, I must suppose, of its surprising steepness. +When we turned about, I was amazed to behold so deep a view behind, +and so high a shoulder of blue sea, crowned by the whale-like island +of Motane. And yet the wall of mountain had not visibly dwindled, +and I could even have fancied, as I raised my eyes to measure it, that +it loomed higher than before.<br> +<br> +We struck now into covert paths, crossed and heard more near at hand +the bickering of the streams, and tasted the coolness of those recesses +where the houses stood. The birds sang about us as we descended. +All along our path my guide was being hailed by voices: ‘Mikaël +- Kaoha, Mikaël!’ From the doorstep, from the cotton-patch, +or out of the deep grove of island-chestnuts, these friendly cries arose, +and were cheerily answered as we passed. In a sharp angle of a +glen, on a rushing brook and under fathoms of cool foliage, we struck +a house upon a well-built paepae, the fire brightly burning under the +popoi-shed against the evening meal; and here the cries became a chorus, +and the house folk, running out, obliged us to dismount and breathe. +It seemed a numerous family: we saw eight at least; and one of these +honoured me with a particular attention. This was the mother, +a woman naked to the waist, of an aged countenance, but with hair still +copious and black, and breasts still erect and youthful. On our +arrival I could see she remarked me, but instead of offering any greeting, +disappeared at once into the bush. Thence she returned with two +crimson flowers. ‘Good-bye!’ was her salutation, uttered +not without coquetry; and as she said it she pressed the flowers into +my hand - ‘Good-bye! I speak Inglis.’ It was +from a whaler-man, who (she informed me) was ‘a plenty good chap,’ +that she had learned my language; and I could not but think how handsome +she must have been in these times of her youth, and could not but guess +that some memories of the dandy whaler-man prompted her attentions to +myself. Nor could I refrain from wondering what had befallen her +lover; in the rain and mire of what sea-ports he had tramped since then; +in what close and garish drinking-dens had found his pleasure; and in +the ward of what infirmary dreamed his last of the Marquesas. +But she, the more fortunate, lived on in her green island. The +talk, in this lost house upon the mountains, ran chiefly upon Mapiao +and his visits to the <i>Casco</i>: the news of which had probably gone +abroad by then to all the island, so that there was no paepae in Hiva-oa +where they did not make the subject of excited comment.<br> +<br> +Not much beyond we came upon a high place in the foot of the ravine. +Two roads divided it, and met in the midst. Save for this intersection +the amphitheatre was strangely perfect, and had a certain ruder air +of things Roman. Depths of foliage and the bulk of the mountain +kept it in a grateful shadow. On the benches several young folk +sat clustered or apart. One of these, a girl perhaps fourteen +years of age, buxom and comely, caught the eye of Brother Michel. +Why was she not at school? - she was done with school now. What +was she doing here? - she lived here now. Why so? - no answer +but a deepening blush. There was no severity in Brother Michel’s +manner; the girl’s own confusion told her story. ‘<i>Elle +a honte</i>,’ was the missionary’s comment, as we rode away. +Near by in the stream, a grown girl was bathing naked in a goyle between +two stepping-stones; and it amused me to see with what alacrity and +real alarm she bounded on her many-coloured under-clothes. Even +in these daughters of cannibals shame was eloquent.<br> +<br> +It is in Hiva-oa, owing to the inveterate cannibalism of the natives, +that local beliefs have been most rudely trodden underfoot. It +was here that three religious chiefs were set under a bridge, and the +women of the valley made to defile over their heads upon the road-way: +the poor, dishonoured fellows sitting there (all observers agree) with +streaming tears. Not only was one road driven across the high +place, but two roads intersected in its midst. There is no reason +to suppose that the last was done of purpose, and perhaps it was impossible +entirely to avoid the numerous sacred places of the islands. But +these things are not done without result. I have spoken already +of the regard of Marquesans for the dead, making (as it does) so strange +a contrast with their unconcern for death. Early on this day’s +ride, for instance, we encountered a petty chief, who inquired (of course) +where we were going, and suggested by way of amendment. ‘Why +do you not rather show him the cemetery?’ I saw it; it was +but newly opened, the third within eight years. They are great +builders here in Hiva-oa; I saw in my ride paepaes that no European +dry-stone mason could have equalled, the black volcanic stones were +laid so justly, the corners were so precise, the levels so true; but +the retaining-wall of the new graveyard stood apart, and seemed to be +a work of love. The sentiment of honour for the dead is therefore +not extinct. And yet observe the consequence of violently countering +men’s opinions. Of the four prisoners in Atuona gaol, three +were of course thieves; the fourth was there for sacrilege. He +had levelled up a piece of the graveyard - to give a feast upon, as +he informed the court - and declared he had no thought of doing wrong. +Why should he? He had been forced at the point of the bayonet +to destroy the sacred places of his own piety; when he had recoiled +from the task, he had been jeered at for a superstitious fool. +And now it is supposed he will respect our European superstitions as +by second nature.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER XV - THE TWO CHIEFS OF ATUONA<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +It had chanced (as the <i>Casco</i> beat through the Bordelais Straits +for Taahauku) she approached on one board very near the land in the +opposite isle of Tauata, where houses were to be seen in a grove of +tall coco-palms. Brother Michel pointed out the spot. ‘I +am at home now,’ said he. ‘I believe I have a large +share in these cocoa-nuts; and in that house madame my mother lives +with her two husbands!’ ‘With two husbands?’ +somebody inquired. ‘<i>C’est ma honte</i>,’ +replied the brother drily.<br> +<br> +A word in passing on the two husbands. I conceive the brother +to have expressed himself loosely. It seems common enough to find +a native lady with two consorts; but these are not two husbands. +The first is still the husband; the wife continues to be referred to +by his name; and the position of the coadjutor, or <i>pikio</i>, although +quite regular, appears undoubtedly subordinate. We had opportunities +to observe one household of the sort. The <i>pikio</i> was recognised; +appeared openly along with the husband when the lady was thought to +be insulted, and the pair made common cause like brothers. At +home the inequality was more apparent. The husband sat to receive +and entertain visitors; the <i>pikio</i> was running the while to fetch +cocoa-nuts like a hired servant, and I remarked he was sent on these +errands in preference even to the son. Plainly we have here no +second husband; plainly we have the tolerated lover. Only, in +the Marquesas, instead of carrying his lady’s fan and mantle, +he must turn his hand to do the husband’s housework.<br> +<br> +The sight of Brother Michel’s family estate led the conversation +for some while upon the method and consequence of artificial kinship. +Our curiosity became extremely whetted; the brother offered to have +the whole of us adopted, and some two days later we became accordingly +the children of Paaaeua, appointed chief of Atuona. I was unable +to be present at the ceremony, which was primitively simple. The +two Mrs. Stevensons and Mr. Osbourne, along with Paaaeua, his wife, +and an adopted child of theirs, son of a shipwrecked Austrian, sat down +to an excellent island meal, of which the principal and the only necessary +dish was pig. A concourse watched them through the apertures of +the house; but none, not even Brother Michel, might partake; for the +meal was sacramental, and either creative or declaratory of the new +relationship. In Tahiti things are not so strictly ordered; when +Ori and I ‘made brothers,’ both our families sat with us +at table, yet only he and I, who had eaten with intention were supposed +to be affected by the ceremony. For the adoption of an infant +I believe no formality to be required; the child is handed over by the +natural parents, and grows up to inherit the estates of the adoptive. +Presents are doubtless exchanged, as at all junctures of island life, +social or international; but I never heard of any banquet - the child’s +presence at the daily board perhaps sufficing. We may find the +rationale in the ancient Arabian idea that a common diet makes a common +blood, with its derivative axiom that ‘he is the father who gives +the child its morning draught.’ In the Marquesan practice, +the sense would thus be evanescent; from the Tahitian, a mere survival, +it will have entirely fled. An interesting parallel will probably +occur to many of my readers.<br> +<br> +What is the nature of the obligation assumed at such a festival? +It will vary with the characters of those engaged, and with the circumstances +of the case. Thus it would be absurd to take too seriously our +adoption at Atuona. On the part of Paaaeua it was an affair of +social ambition; when he agreed to receive us in his family the man +had not so much as seen us, and knew only that we were inestimably rich +and travelled in a floating palace. We, upon our side, ate of +his baked meats with no true <i>animus affiliandi</i>, but moved by +the single sentiment of curiosity. The affair was formal, and +a matter of parade, as when in Europe sovereigns call each other cousin. +Yet, had we stayed at Atuona, Paaaeua would have held himself bound +to establish us upon his land, and to set apart young men for our service, +and trees for our support. I have mentioned the Austrian. +He sailed in one of two sister ships, which left the Clyde in coal; +both rounded the Horn, and both, at several hundred miles of distance, +though close on the same point of time, took fire at sea on the Pacific. +One was destroyed; the derelict iron frame of the second, after long, +aimless cruising, was at length recovered, refitted, and hails to-day +from San Francisco. A boat’s crew from one of these disasters +reached, after great hardships, the isle of Hiva-oa. Some of these +men vowed they would never again confront the chances of the sea; but +alone of them all the Austrian has been exactly true to his engagement, +remains where he landed, and designs to die where he has lived. +Now, with such a man, falling and taking root among islanders, the processes +described may be compared to a gardener’s graft. He passes +bodily into the native stock; ceases wholly to be alien; has entered +the commune of the blood, shares the prosperity and consideration of +his new family, and is expected to impart with the same generosity the +fruits of his European skill and knowledge. It is this implied +engagement that so frequently offends the ingrafted white. To +snatch an immediate advantage - to get (let us say) a station for his +store - he will play upon the native custom and become a son or a brother +for the day, promising himself to cast down the ladder by which he shall +have ascended, and repudiate the kinship so soon as it shall grow burdensome. +And he finds there are two parties to the bargain. Perhaps his +Polynesian relative is simple, and conceived the blood-bond literally; +perhaps he is shrewd, and himself entered the covenant with a view to +gain. And either way the store is ravaged, the house littered +with lazy natives; and the richer the man grows, the more numerous, +the more idle, and the more affectionate he finds his native relatives. +Most men thus circumstanced contrive to buy or brutally manage to enforce +their independence; but many vegetate without hope, strangled by parasites.<br> +<br> +We had no cause to blush with Brother Michel. Our new parents +were kind, gentle, well-mannered, and generous in gifts; the wife was +a most motherly woman, the husband a man who stood justly high with +his employers. Enough has been said to show why Moipu should be +deposed; and in Paaaeua the French had found a reputable substitute. +He went always scrupulously dressed, and looked the picture of propriety, +like a dark, handsome, stupid, and probably religious young man hot +from a European funeral. In character he seemed the ideal of what +is known as the good citizen. He wore gravity like an ornament. +None could more nicely represent the desired character as an appointed +chief, the outpost of civilisation and reform. And yet, were the +French to go and native manners to revive, fancy beholds him crowned +with old men’s beards and crowding with the first to a man-eating +festival. But I must not seem to be unjust to Paaaeua. His +respectability went deeper than the skin; his sense of the becoming +sometimes nerved him for unexpected rigours.<br> +<br> +One evening Captain Otis and Mr. Osbourne were on shore in the village. +All was agog; dancing had begun; it was plain it was to be a night of +festival, and our adventurers were overjoyed at their good fortune. +A strong fall of rain drove them for shelter to the house of Paaaeua, +where they were made welcome, wiled into a chamber, and shut in. +Presently the rain took off, the fun was to begin in earnest, and the +young bloods of Atuona came round the house and called to my fellow-travellers +through the interstices of the wall. Late into the night the calls +were continued and resumed, and sometimes mingled with taunts; late +into the night the prisoners, tantalised by the noises of the festival, +renewed their efforts to escape. But all was vain; right across +the door lay that god-fearing householder, Paaaeua, feigning sleep; +and my friends had to forego their junketing. In this incident, +so delightfully European, we thought we could detect three strands of +sentiment. In the first place, Paaaeua had a charge of souls: +these were young men, and he judged it right to withhold them from the +primrose path. Secondly, he was a public character, and it was +not fitting that his guests should countenance a festival of which he +disapproved. So might some strict clergyman at home address a +worldly visitor: ‘Go to the theatre if you like, but, by your +leave, not from my house!’ Thirdly, Paaaeua was a man jealous, +and with some cause (as shall be shown) for jealousy; and the feasters +were the satellites of his immediate rival, Moipu.<br> +<br> +For the adoption had caused much excitement in the village; it made +the strangers popular. Paaaeua, in his difficult posture of appointed +chief, drew strength and dignity from their alliance, and only Moipu +and his followers were malcontent. For some reason nobody (except +myself) appears to dislike Moipu. Captain Hart, who has been robbed +and threatened by him; Father Orens, whom he has fired at, and repeatedly +driven to the woods; my own family, and even the French officials - +all seemed smitten with an irrepressible affection for the man. +His fall had been made soft; his son, upon his death, was to succeed +Paaaeua in the chieftaincy; and he lived, at the time of our visit, +in the shoreward part of the village in a good house, and with a strong +following of young men, his late braves and pot-hunters. In this +society, the coming of the <i>Casco</i>, the adoption, the return feast +on board, and the presents exchanged between the whites and their new +parents, were doubtless eagerly and bitterly canvassed. It was +felt that a few years ago the honours would have gone elsewhere. +In this unwonted business, in this reception of some hitherto undreamed-of +and outlandish potentate - some Prester John or old Assaracus - a few +years back it would have been the part of Moipu to play the hero and +the host, and his young men would have accompanied and adorned the various +celebrations as the acknowledged leaders of society. And now, +by a malign vicissitude of fortune, Moipu must sit in his house quite +unobserved; and his young men could but look in at the door while their +rivals feasted. Perhaps M. Grévy felt a touch of bitterness +towards his successor when he beheld him figure on the broad stage of +the centenary of eighty-nine; the visit of the <i>Casco</i> which Moipu +had missed by so few years was a more unusual occasion in Atuona than +a centenary in France; and the dethroned chief determined to reassert +himself in the public eye.<br> +<br> +Mr. Osbourne had gone into Atuona photographing; the population of the +village had gathered together for the occasion on the place before the +church, and Paaaeua, highly delighted with this new appearance of his +family, played the master of ceremonies. The church had been taken, +with its jolly architect before the door; the nuns with their pupils; +sundry damsels in the ancient and singularly unbecoming robes of tapa; +and Father Orens in the midst of a group of his parishioners. +I know not what else was in hand, when the photographer became aware +of a sensation in the crowd, and, looking around, beheld a very noble +figure of a man appear upon the margin of a thicket and stroll nonchalantly +near. The nonchalance was visibly affected; it was plain he came +there to arouse attention, and his success was instant. He was +introduced; he was civil, he was obliging, he was always ineffably superior +and certain of himself; a well-graced actor. It was presently +suggested that he should appear in his war costume; he gracefully consented; +and returned in that strange, inappropriate and ill-omened array (which +very well became his handsome person) to strut in a circle of admirers, +and be thenceforth the centre of photography. Thus had Moipu effected +his introduction, as by accident, to the white strangers, made it a +favour to display his finery, and reduced his rival to a secondary <i>rôle</i> +on the theatre of the disputed village. Paaaeua felt the blow; +and, with a spirit which we never dreamed he could possess, asserted +his priority. It was found impossible that day to get a photograph +of Moipu alone; for whenever he stood up before the camera his successor +placed himself unbidden by his side, and gently but firmly held to his +position. The portraits of the pair, Jacob and Esau, standing +shoulder to shoulder, one in his careful European dress, one in his +barbaric trappings, figure the past and present of their island. +A graveyard with its humble crosses would be the aptest symbol of the +future.<br> +<br> +We are all impressed with the belief that Moipu had planned his campaign +from the beginning to the end. It is certain that he lost no time +in pushing his advantage. Mr. Osbourne was inveigled to his house; +various gifts were fished out of an old sea-chest; Father Orens was +called into service as interpreter, and Moipu formally proposed to ‘make +brothers’ with Mata-Galahi - Glass-Eyes, - the not very euphonious +name under which Mr. Osbourne passed in the Marquesas. The feast +of brotherhood took place on board the <i>Casco</i>. Paaaeua had +arrived with his family, like a plain man; and his presents, which had +been numerous, had followed one another, at intervals through several +days. Moipu, as if to mark at every point the opposition, came +with a certain feudal pomp, attended by retainers bearing gifts of all +descriptions, from plumes of old men’s beard to little, pious, +Catholic engravings.<br> +<br> +I had met the man before this in the village, and detested him on sight; +there was something indescribably raffish in his looks and ways that +raised my gorge; and when man-eating was referred to, and he laughed +a low, cruel laugh, part boastful, part bashful, like one reminded of +some dashing peccadillo, my repugnance was mingled with nausea. +This is no very human attitude, nor one at all becoming in a traveller. +And, seen more privately, the man improved. Something negroid +in character and face was still displeasing; but his ugly mouth became +attractive when he smiled, his figure and bearing were certainly noble, +and his eyes superb. In his appreciation of jams and pickles, +in is delight in the reverberating mirrors of the dining cabin, and +consequent endless repetition of Moipus and Mata-Galahis, he showed +himself engagingly a child. And yet I am not sure; and what seemed +childishness may have been rather courtly art. His manners struck +me as beyond the mark; they were refined and caressing to the point +of grossness, and when I think of the serene absent-mindedness with +which he first strolled in upon our party, and then recall him running +on hands and knees along the cabin sofas, pawing the velvet, dipping +into the beds, and bleating commendatory ‘<i>mitais</i>’ +with exaggerated emphasis, like some enormous over-mannered ape, I feel +the more sure that both must have been calculated. And I sometimes +wonder next, if Moipu were quite alone in this polite duplicity, and +ask myself whether the <i>Casco</i> were quite so much admired in the +Marquesas as our visitors desired us to suppose.<br> +<br> +I will complete this sketch of an incurable cannibal grandee with two +incongruous traits. His favourite morsel was the human hand, of +which he speaks to-day with an ill-favoured lustfulness. And when +he said good-bye to Mrs. Stevenson, holding her hand, viewing her with +tearful eyes, and chanting his farewell improvisation in the falsetto +of Marquesan high society, he wrote upon her mind a sentimental impression +which I try in vain to share.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +PART II: THE PAUMOTUS<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER I - THE DANGEROUS ARCHIPELAGO - ATOLLS AT A DISTANCE<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +In the early morning of 4th September a whale-boat manned by natives +dragged us down the green lane of the anchorage and round the spouting +promontory. On the shore level it was a hot, breathless, and yet +crystal morning; but high overhead the hills of Atuona were all cowled +in cloud, and the ocean-river of the trades streamed without pause. +As we crawled from under the immediate shelter of the land, we reached +at last the limit of their influence. The wind fell upon our sails +in puffs, which strengthened and grew more continuous; presently the +<i>Casco</i> heeled down to her day’s work; the whale-boat, quite +outstripped, clung for a noisy moment to her quarter; the stipulated +bread, rum, and tobacco were passed in; a moment more and the boat was +in our wake, and our late pilots were cheering our departure.<br> +<br> +This was the more inspiriting as we were bound for scenes so different, +and though on a brief voyage, yet for a new province of creation. +That wide field of ocean, called loosely the South Seas, extends from +tropic to tropic, and from perhaps 123 degrees W. to 150 degrees E., +a parallelogram of one hundred degrees by forty-seven, where degrees +are the most spacious. Much of it lies vacant, much is closely +sown with isles, and the isles are of two sorts. No distinction +is so continually dwelt upon in South Sea talk as that between the ‘low’ +and the ‘high’ island, and there is none more broadly marked +in nature. The Himalayas are not more different from the Sahara. +On the one hand, and chiefly in groups of from eight to a dozen, volcanic +islands rise above the sea; few reach an altitude of less than 4000 +feet; one exceeds 13,000; their tops are often obscured in cloud, they +are all clothed with various forests, all abound in food, and are all +remarkable for picturesque and solemn scenery. On the other hand, +we have the atoll; a thing of problematic origin and history, the reputed +creature of an insect apparently unidentified; rudely annular in shape; +enclosing a lagoon; rarely extending beyond a quarter of a mile at its +chief width; often rising at its highest point to less than the stature +of a man - man himself, the rat and the land crab, its chief inhabitants; +not more variously supplied with plants; and offering to the eye, even +when perfect, only a ring of glittering beach and verdant foliage, enclosing +and enclosed by the blue sea.<br> +<br> +In no quarter are the atolls so thickly congregated, in none are they +so varied in size from the greatest to the least, and in none is navigation +so beset with perils, as in that archipelago that we were now to thread. +The huge system of the trades is, for some reason, quite confounded +by this multiplicity of reefs, the wind intermits, squalls are frequent +from the west and south-west, hurricanes are known. The currents +are, besides, inextricably intermixed; dead reckoning becomes a farce; +the charts are not to be trusted; and such is the number and similarity +of these islands that, even when you have picked one up, you may be +none the wiser. The reputation of the place is consequently infamous; +insurance offices exclude it from their field, and it was not without +misgiving that my captain risked the <i>Casco</i> in such waters. +I believe, indeed, it is almost understood that yachts are to avoid +this baffling archipelago; and it required all my instances - and all +Mr. Otis’s private taste for adventure - to deflect our course +across its midst.<br> +<br> +For a few days we sailed with a steady trade, and a steady westerly +current setting us to leeward; and toward sundown of the seventh it +was supposed we should have sighted Takaroa, one of Cook’s so-called +King George Islands. The sun set; yet a while longer the old moon +- semi-brilliant herself, and with a silver belly, which was her successor +- sailed among gathering clouds; she, too, deserted us; stars of every +degree of sheen, and clouds of every variety of form disputed the sub-lustrous +night; and still we gazed in vain for Takaroa. The mate stood +on the bowsprit, his tall grey figure slashing up and down against the +stars, and still<br> +<br> +<br> +‘nihil astra praeter<br> +Vidit et undas.<br> +<br> +<br> +The rest of us were grouped at the port anchor davit, staring with no +less assiduity, but with far less hope on the obscure horizon. +Islands we beheld in plenty, but they were of ‘such stuff as dreams +are made on,’ and vanished at a wink, only to appear in other +places; and by and by not only islands, but refulgent and revolving +lights began to stud the darkness; lighthouses of the mind or of the +wearied optic nerve, solemnly shining and winking as we passed. +At length the mate himself despaired, scrambled on board again from +his unrestful perch, and announced that we had missed our destination. +He was the only man of practice in these waters, our sole pilot, shipped +for that end at Tai-o-hae. If he declared we had missed Takaroa, +it was not for us to quarrel with the fact, but, if we could, to explain +it. We had certainly run down our southing. Our canted wake +upon the sea and our somewhat drunken-looking course upon the chart +both testified with no less certainty to an impetuous westward current. +We had no choice but to conclude we were again set down to leeward; +and the best we could do was to bring the <i>Casco</i> to the wind, +keep a good watch, and expect morning.<br> +<br> +I slept that night, as was then my somewhat dangerous practice, on deck +upon the cockpit bench. A stir at last awoke me, to see all the +eastern heaven dyed with faint orange, the binnacle lamp already dulled +against the brightness of the day, and the steersman leaning eagerly +across the wheel. ‘There it is, sir!’ he cried, and +pointed in the very eyeball of the dawn. For awhile I could see +nothing but the bluish ruins of the morning bank, which lay far along +the horizon, like melting icebergs. Then the sun rose, pierced +a gap in these <i>débris</i> of vapours, and displayed an inconsiderable +islet, flat as a plate upon the sea, and spiked with palms of disproportioned +altitude.<br> +<br> +So far, so good. Here was certainly an atoll; and we were certainly +got among the archipelago. But which? And where? The +isle was too small for either Takaroa: in all our neighbourhood, indeed, +there was none so inconsiderable, save only Tikei; and Tikei, one of +Roggewein’s so-called Pernicious Islands, seemed beside the question. +At that rate, instead of drifting to the west, we must have fetched +up thirty miles to windward. And how about the current? +It had been setting us down, by observation, all these days: by the +deflection of our wake, it should be setting us down that moment. +When had it stopped? When had it begun again? and what kind of +torrent was that which had swept us eastward in the interval? +To these questions, so typical of navigation in that range of isles, +I have no answer. Such were at least the facts; Tikei our island +turned out to be; and it was our first experience of the dangerous archipelago, +to make our landfall thirty miles out.<br> +<br> +The sight of Tikei, thrown direct against the splendour of the morning, +robbed of all its colour, and deformed with disproportioned trees like +bristles on a broom, had scarce prepared us to be much in love with +atolls. Later the same day we saw under more fit conditions the +island of Taiaro. <i>Lost in the Sea</i> is possibly the meaning +of the name. And it was so we saw it; lost in blue sea and sky: +a ring of white beach, green underwood, and tossing palms, gem-like +in colour; of a fairy, of a heavenly prettiness. The surf ran +all around it, white as snow, and broke at one point, far to seaward, +on what seems an uncharted reef. There was no smoke, no sign of +man; indeed, the isle is not inhabited, only visited at intervals. +And yet a trader (Mr. Narii Salmon) was watching from the shore +and wondering at the unexpected ship. I have spent since then +long months upon low islands; I know the tedium of their undistinguished +days; I know the burden of their diet. With whatever envy we may +have looked from the deck on these green coverts, it was with a tenfold +greater that Mr. Salmon and his comrades saw us steer, in our trim ship, +to seaward.<br> +<br> +The night fell lovely in the extreme. After the moon went down, +the heaven was a thing to wonder at for stars. And as I lay in +the cockpit and looked upon the steersman I was haunted by Emerson’s +verses:<br> +<br> +<br> +‘And the lone seaman all the night<br> +Sails astonished among stars.’<br> +<br> +<br> +By this glittering and imperfect brightness, about four bells in the +first watch we made our third atoll, Raraka. The low line of the +isle lay straight along the sky; so that I was at first reminded of +a towpath, and we seemed to be mounting some engineered and navigable +stream. Presently a red star appeared, about the height and brightness +of a danger signal, and with that my simile was changed; we seemed rather +to skirt the embankment of a railway, and the eye began to look instinctively +for the telegraph-posts, and the ear to expect the coming of a train. +Here and there, but rarely, faint tree-tops broke the level. And +the sound of the surf accompanied us, now in a drowsy monotone, now +with a menacing swing.<br> +<br> +The isle lay nearly east and west, barring our advance on Fakarava. +We must, therefore, hug the coast until we gained the western end, where, +through a passage eight miles wide, we might sail southward between +Raraka and the next isle, Kauehi. We had the wind free, a lightish +air; but clouds of an inky blackness were beginning to arise, and at +times it lightened - without thunder. Something, I know not what, +continually set us up upon the island. We lay more and more to +the nor’ard; and you would have thought the shore copied our manoeuvre +and outsailed us. Once and twice Raraka headed us again - again, in +the sea fashion, the quite innocent steersman was abused - and again +the <i>Casco</i> kept away. Had I been called on, with no more +light than that of our experience, to draw the configuration of that +island, I should have shown a series of bow-window promontories, each +overlapping the other to the nor’ard, and the trend of the land +from the south-east to the north-west, and behold, on the chart it lay +near east and west in a straight line.<br> +<br> +We had but just repeated our manoeuvre and kept away - for not more +than five minutes the railway embankment had been lost to view and the +surf to hearing - when I was aware of land again, not only on the weather +bow, but dead ahead. I played the part of the judicious landsman, +holding my peace till the last moment; and presently my mariners perceived +it for themselves.<br> +<br> +‘Land ahead!’ said the steersman.<br> +<br> +‘By God, it’s Kauehi!’ cried the mate.<br> +<br> +And so it was. And with that I began to be sorry for cartographers. +We were scarce doing three and a half; and they asked me to believe +that (in five minutes) we had dropped an island, passed eight miles +of open water, and run almost high and dry upon the next. But +my captain was more sorry for himself to be afloat in such a labyrinth; +laid the <i>Casco</i> to, with the log line up and down, and sat on +the stern rail and watched it till the morning. He had enough +of night in the Paumotus.<br> +<br> +By daylight on the 9th we began to skirt Kauehi, and had now an opportunity +to see near at hand the geography of atolls. Here and there, where +it was high, the farther side loomed up; here and there the near side +dipped entirely and showed a broad path of water into the lagoon; here +and there both sides were equally abased, and we could look right through +the discontinuous ring to the sea horizon on the south. Conceive, +on a vast scale, the submerged hoop of the duck-hunter, trimmed with +green rushes to conceal his head - water within, water without - you +have the image of the perfect atoll. Conceive one that has been +partly plucked of its rush fringe; you have the atoll of Kauehi. +And for either shore of it at closer quarters, conceive the line of +some old Roman highway traversing a wet morass, and here sunk out of +view and there re-arising, crowned with a green tuft of thicket; only +instead of the stagnant waters of a marsh, the live ocean now boiled +against, now buried the frail barrier. Last night’s impression +in the dark was thus confirmed by day, and not corrected. We sailed +indeed by a mere causeway in the sea, of nature’s handiwork, yet +of no greater magnitude than many of the works of man.<br> +<br> +The isle was uninhabited; it was all green brush and white sand, set +in transcendently blue water; even the coco-palms were rare, though +some of these completed the bright harmony of colour by hanging out +a fan of golden yellow. For long there was no sign of life beyond +the vegetable, and no sound but the continuous grumble of the surf. +In silence and desertion these fair shores slipped past, and were submerged +and rose again with clumps of thicket from the sea. And then a +bird or two appeared, hovering and crying; swiftly these became more +numerous, and presently, looking ahead, we were aware of a vast effervescence +of winged life. In this place the annular isle was mostly under +water, carrying here and there on its submerged line a wooded islet. +Over one of these the birds hung and flew with an incredible density +like that of gnats or hiving bees; the mass flashed white and black, +and heaved and quivered, and the screaming of the creatures rose over +the voice of the surf in a shrill clattering whirr. As you descend +some inland valley a not dissimilar sound announces the nearness of +a mill and pouring river. Some stragglers, as I said, came to +meet our approach; a few still hung about the ship as we departed. +The crying died away, the last pair of wings was left behind, and once +more the low shores of Kauehi streamed past our eyes in silence like +a picture. I supposed at the time that the birds lived, like ants +or citizens, concentred where we saw them. I have been told since +(I know not if correctly) that the whole isle, or much of it, is similarly +peopled; and that the effervescence at a single spot would be the mark +of a boat’s crew of egg-hunters from one of the neighbouring inhabited +atolls. So that here at Kauehi, as the day before at Taiaro, the +<i>Casco</i> sailed by under the fire of unsuspected eyes. And +one thing is surely true, that even on these ribbons of land an army +might lie hid and no passing mariner divine its presence.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER II - FAKARAVA: AN ATOLL AT HAND<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +By a little before noon we were running down the coast of our destination, +Fakarava: the air very light, the sea near smooth; though still we were +accompanied by a continuous murmur from the beach, like the sound of +a distant train. The isle is of a huge longitude, the enclosed +lagoon thirty miles by ten or twelve, and the coral tow-path, which +they call the land, some eighty or ninety miles by (possibly) one furlong. +That part by which we sailed was all raised; the underwood excellently +green, the topping wood of coco-palms continuous - a mark, if I had +known it, of man’s intervention. For once more, and once +more unconsciously, we were within hail of fellow-creatures, and that +vacant beach was but a pistol-shot from the capital city of the archipelago. +But the life of an atoll, unless it be enclosed, passes wholly on the +shores of the lagoon; it is there the villages are seated, there the +canoes ply and are drawn up; and the beach of the ocean is a place accursed +and deserted, the fit scene only for wizardry and shipwreck, and in +the native belief a haunting ground of murderous spectres.<br> +<br> +By and by we might perceive a breach in the low barrier; the woods ceased; +a glittering point ran into the sea, tipped with an emerald shoal the +mark of entrance. As we drew near we met a little run of sea - +the private sea of the lagoon having there its origin and end, and here, +in the jaws of the gateway, trying vain conclusions with the more majestic +heave of the Pacific. The <i>Casco</i> scarce avowed a shock; +but there are times and circumstances when these harbour mouths of inland +basins vomit floods, deflecting, burying, and dismasting ships. +For, conceive a lagoon perfectly sealed but in the one point, and that +of merely navigable width; conceive the tide and wind to have heaped +for hours together in that coral fold a superfluity of waters, and the +tide to change and the wind fall - the open sluice of some great reservoirs +at home will give an image of the unstemmable effluxion.<br> +<br> +We were scarce well headed for the pass before all heads were craned +over the rail. For the water, shoaling under our board, became +changed in a moment to surprising hues of blue and grey; and in its +transparency the coral branched and blossomed, and the fish of the inland +sea cruised visibly below us, stained and striped, and even beaked like +parrots. I have paid in my time to view many curiosities; never +one so curious as that first sight over the ship’s rail in the +lagoon of Fakarava. But let not the reader be deceived with hope. +I have since entered, I suppose, some dozen atolls in different parts +of the Pacific, and the experience has never been repeated. That +exquisite hue and transparency of submarine day, and these shoals of +rainbow fish, have not enraptured me again.<br> +<br> +Before we could raise our eyes from that engaging spectacle the schooner +had slipped betwixt the pierheads of the reef, and was already quite +committed to the sea within. The containing shores are so little +erected, and the lagoon itself is so great, that, for the more part, +it seemed to extend without a check to the horizon. Here and there, +indeed, where the reef carried an inlet, like a signet-ring upon a finger, +there would be a pencilling of palms; here and there, the green wall +of wood ran solid for a length of miles; and on the port hand, under +the highest grove of trees, a few houses sparkled white - Rotoava, the +metropolitan settlement of the Paumotus. Hither we beat in three +tacks, and came to an anchor close in shore, in the first smooth water +since we had left San Francisco, five fathoms deep, where a man might +look overboard all day at the vanishing cable, the coral patches, and +the many-coloured fish.<br> +<br> +Fakarava was chosen to be the seat of Government from nautical considerations +only. It is eccentrically situate; the productions, even for a +low island, poor; the population neither many nor - for Low Islanders +- industrious. But the lagoon has two good passages, one to leeward, +one to windward, so that in all states of the wind it can be left and +entered, and this advantage, for a government of scattered islands, +was decisive. A pier of coral, landing-stairs, a harbour light +upon a staff and pillar, and two spacious Government bungalows in a +handsome fence, give to the northern end of Rotoava a great air of consequence. +This is confirmed on the one hand by an empty prison, on the other by +a gendarmerie pasted over with hand-bills in Tahitian, land-law notices +from Papeete, and republican sentiments from Paris, signed (a little +after date) ‘Jules Grévy, <i>Perihidente</i>.’ +Quite at the far end a belfried Catholic chapel concludes the town; +and between, on a smooth floor of white coral sand and under the breezy +canopy of coco-palms, the houses of the natives stand irregularly scattered, +now close on the lagoon for the sake of the breeze, now back under the +palms for love of shadow.<br> +<br> +Not a soul was to be seen. But for the thunder of the surf on +the far side, it seemed you might have heard a pin drop anywhere about +that capital city. There was something thrilling in the unexpected +silence, something yet more so in the unexpected sound. Here before +us a sea reached to the horizon, rippling like an inland mere; and behold! +close at our back another sea assaulted with assiduous fury the reverse +of the position. At night the lantern was run up and lit a vacant +pier. In one house lights were seen and voices heard, where the +population (I was told) sat playing cards. A little beyond, from +deep in the darkness of the palm-grove, we saw the glow and smelt the +aromatic odour of a coal of cocoa-nut husk, a relic of the evening kitchen. +Crickets sang; some shrill thing whistled in a tuft of weeds; and the +mosquito hummed and stung. There was no other trace that night +of man, bird, or insect in the isle. The moon, now three days +old, and as yet but a silver crescent on a still visible sphere, shone +through the palm canopy with vigorous and scattered lights. The +alleys where we walked were smoothed and weeded like a boulevard; here +and there were plants set out; here and there dusky cottages clustered +in the shadow, some with verandahs. A public garden by night, +a rich and fashionable watering-place in a by-season, offer sights and +vistas not dissimilar. And still, on the one side, stretched the +lapping mere, and from the other the deep sea still growled in the night. +But it was most of all on board, in the dead hours, when I had been +better sleeping, that the spell of Fakarava seized and held me. +The moon was down. The harbour lantern and two of the greater +planets drew vari-coloured wakes on the lagoon. From shore the +cheerful watch-cry of cocks rang out at intervals above the organ-point +of surf. And the thought of this depopulated capital, this protracted +thread of annular island with its crest of coco-palms and fringe of +breakers, and that tranquil inland sea that stretched before me till +it touched the stars, ran in my head for hours with delight.<br> +<br> +So long as I stayed upon that isle these thoughts were constant. +I lay down to sleep, and woke again with an unblunted sense of my surroundings. +I was never weary of calling up the image of that narrow causeway, on +which I had my dwelling, lying coiled like a serpent, tail to mouth, +in the outrageous ocean, and I was never weary of passing - a mere quarter-deck +parade - from the one side to the other, from the shady, habitable shores +of the lagoon to the blinding desert and uproarious breakers of the +opposite beach. The sense of insecurity in such a thread of residence +is more than fanciful. Hurricanes and tidal waves over-leap these +humble obstacles; Oceanus remembers his strength, and, where houses +stood and palms flourished, shakes his white beard again over the barren +coral. Fakarava itself has suffered; the trees immediately beyond +my house were all of recent replantation; and Anaa is only now recovered +from a heavier stroke. I knew one who was then dwelling in the +isle. He told me that he and two ship captains walked to the sea +beach. There for a while they viewed the oncoming breakers, till +one of the captains clapped suddenly his hand before his eyes and cried +aloud that he could endure no longer to behold them. This was +in the afternoon; in the dark hours of the night the sea burst upon +the island like a flood; the settlement was razed all but the church +and presbytery; and, when day returned, the survivors saw themselves +clinging in an abattis of uprooted coco-palms and ruined houses.<br> +<br> +Danger is but a small consideration. But men are more nicely sensible +of a discomfort; and the atoll is a discomfortable home. There +are some, and these probably ancient, where a deep soil has formed and +the most valuable fruit-trees prosper. I have walked in one, with +equal admiration and surprise, through a forest of huge breadfruits, +eating bananas and stumbling among taro as I went. This was in +the atoll of Namorik in the Marshall group, and stands alone in my experience. +To give the opposite extreme, which is yet far more near the average, +I will describe the soil and productions of Fakarava. The surface +of that narrow strip is for the more part of broken coral lime-stone, +like volcanic clinkers, and excruciating to the naked foot; in some +atolls, I believe, not in Fakarava, it gives a fine metallic ring when +struck. Here and there you come upon a bank of sand, exceeding +fine and white, and these parts are the least productive. The +plants (such as they are) spring from and love the broken coral, whence +they grow with that wonderful verdancy that makes the beauty of the +atoll from the sea. The coco-palm in particular luxuriates in +that stern <i>solum</i>, striking down his roots to the brackish, percolated +water, and bearing his green head in the wind with every evidence of +health and pleasure. And yet even the coco-palm must be helped +in infancy with some extraneous nutriment, and through much of the low +archipelago there is planted with each nut a piece of ship’s biscuit +and a rusty nail. The pandanus comes next in importance, being +also a food tree; and he, too, does bravely. A green bush called +<i>miki</i> runs everywhere; occasionally a purao is seen; and there +are several useless weeds. According to M. Cuzent, the whole number +of plants on an atoll such as Fakarava will scarce exceed, even if it +reaches to, one score. Not a blade of grass appears; not a grain +of humus, save when a sack or two has been imported to make the semblance +of a garden; such gardens as bloom in cities on the window-sill. +Insect life is sometimes dense; a cloud o’ mosquitoes, and, what +is far worse, a plague of flies blackening our food, has sometimes driven +us from a meal on Apemama; and even in Fakarava the mosquitoes were +a pest. The land crab may be seen scuttling to his hole, and at +night the rats besiege the houses and the artificial gardens. +The crab is good eating; possibly so is the rat; I have not tried. +Pandanus fruit is made, in the Gilberts, into an agreeable sweetmeat, +such as a man may trifle with at the end of a long dinner; for a substantial +meal I have no use for it. The rest of the food-supply, in a destitute +atoll such as Fakarava, can be summed up in the favourite jest of the +archipelago - cocoa-nut beefsteak. Cocoa-nut green, cocoa-nut +ripe, cocoa-nut germinated; cocoa-nut to eat and cocoa-nut to drink; +cocoa-nut raw and cooked, cocoa-nut hot and cold - such is the bill +of fare. And some of the entrées are no doubt delicious. +The germinated nut, cooked in the shell and eaten with a spoon, forms +a good pudding; cocoa-nut milk - the expressed juice of a ripe nut, +not the water of a green one - goes well in coffee, and is a valuable +adjunct in cookery through the South Seas; and cocoa-nut salad, if you +be a millionaire, and can afford to eat the value of a field of corn +for your dessert, is a dish to be remembered with affection. But +when all is done there is a sameness, and the Israelites of the low +islands murmur at their manna.<br> +<br> +The reader may think I have forgot the sea. The two beaches do +certainly abound in life, and they are strangely different. In +the lagoon the water shallows slowly on a bottom of the fine slimy sand, +dotted with clumps of growing coral. Then comes a strip of tidal +beach on which the ripples lap. In the coral clumps the great +holy-water clam <i>(Tridacna</i>) grows plentifully; a little deeper +lie the beds of the pearl-oyster and sail the resplendent fish that +charmed us at our entrance; and these are all more or less vigorously +coloured. But the other shells are white like lime, or faintly +tinted with a little pink, the palest possible display; many of them +dead besides, and badly rolled. On the ocean side, on the mounds +of the steep beach, over all the width of the reef right out to where +the surf is bursting, in every cranny, under every scattered fragment +of the coral, an incredible plenty of marine life displays the most +wonderful variety and brilliancy of hues. The reef itself has +no passage of colour but is imitated by some shell. Purple and +red and white, and green and yellow, pied and striped and clouded, the +living shells wear in every combination the livery of the dead reef +- if the reef be dead - so that the eye is continually baffled and the +collector continually deceived. I have taken shells for stones +and stones for shells, the one as often as the other. A prevailing +character of the coral is to be dotted with small spots of red, and +it is wonderful how many varieties of shell have adopted the same fashion +and donned the disguise of the red spot. A shell I had found in +plenty in the Marquesas I found here also unchanged in all things else, +but there were the red spots. A lively little crab wore the same +markings. The case of the hermit or soldier crab was more conclusive, +being the result of conscious choice. This nasty little wrecker, +scavenger, and squatter has learned the value of a spotted house; so +it be of the right colour he will choose the smallest shard, tuck himself +in a mere corner of a broken whorl, and go about the world half naked; +but I never found him in this imperfect armour unless it was marked +with the red spot.<br> +<br> +Some two hundred yards distant is the beach of the lagoon. Collect +the shells from each, set them side by side, and you would suppose they +came from different hemispheres; the one so pale, the other so brilliant; +the one prevalently white, the other of a score of hues, and infected +with the scarlet spot like a disease. This seems the more strange, +since the hermit crabs pass and repass the island, and I have met them +by the Residency well, which is about central, journeying either way. +Without doubt many of the shells in the lagoon are dead. But why +are they dead? Without doubt the living shells have a very different +background set for imitation. But why are these so different? +We are only on the threshold of the mysteries.<br> +<br> +Either beach, I have said, abounds with life. On the sea-side +and in certain atolls this profusion of vitality is even shocking: the +rock under foot is mined with it. I have broken off - notably +in Funafuti and Arorai - great lumps of ancient weathered rock that +rang under my blows like iron, and the fracture has been full of pendent +worms as long as my hand, as thick as a child’s finger, of a slightly +pinkish white, and set as close as three or even four to the square +inch. Even in the lagoon, where certain shell-fish seem to sicken, +others (it is notorious) prosper exceedingly and make the riches of +these islands. Fish, too, abound; the lagoon is a closed fish-pond, +such as might rejoice the fancy of an abbot; sharks swarm there, and +chiefly round the passages, to feast upon this plenty, and you would +suppose that man had only to prepare his angle. Alas! it is not +so. Of these painted fish that came in hordes about the entering +<i>Casco</i>, some bore poisonous spines, and others were poisonous +if eaten. The stranger must refrain, or take his chance of painful +and dangerous sickness. The native, on his own isle, is a safe +guide; transplant him to the next, and he is helpless as yourself. +For it is a question both of time and place. A fish caught in +a lagoon may be deadly; the same fish caught the same day at sea, and +only a few hundred yards without the passage, will be wholesome eating: +in a neighbouring isle perhaps the case will be reversed; and perhaps +a fortnight later you shall be able to eat of them indifferently from +within and from without. According to the natives, these bewildering +vicissitudes are ruled by the movement of the heavenly bodies. +The beautiful planet Venus plays a great part in all island tales and +customs; and among other functions, some of them more awful, she regulates +the season of good fish. With Venus in one phase, as we had her, +certain fish were poisonous in the lagoon: with Venus in another, the +same fish was harmless and a valued article of diet. White men +explain these changes by the phases of the coral.<br> +<br> +It adds a last touch of horror to the thought of this precarious annular +gangway in the sea, that even what there is of it is not of honest rock, +but organic, part alive, part putrescent; even the clean sea and the +bright fish about it poisoned, the most stubborn boulder burrowed in +by worms, the lightest dust venomous as an apothecary’s drugs.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER III - A HOUSE TO LET IN A LOW ISLAND<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +Never populous, it was yet by a chapter of accidents that I found the +island so deserted that no sound of human life diversified the hours; +that we walked in that trim public garden of a town, among closed houses, +without even a lodging-bill in a window to prove some tenancy in the +back quarters; and, when we visited the Government bungalow, that Mr. +Donat, acting Vice-Resident, greeted us alone, and entertained us with +cocoa-nut punches in the Sessions Hall and seat of judgment of that +widespread archipelago, our glasses standing arrayed with summonses +and census returns. The unpopularity of a late Vice-Resident had +begun the movement of exodus, his native employés resigning court +appointments and retiring each to his own coco-patch in the remoter +districts of the isle. Upon the back of that, the Governor in +Papeete issued a decree: All land in the Paumotus must be defined and +registered by a certain date. Now, the folk of the archipelago +are half nomadic; a man can scarce be said to belong to a particular +atoll; he belongs to several, perhaps holds a stake and counts cousinship +in half a score; and the inhabitants of Rotoava in particular, man, +woman, and child, and from the gendarme to the Mormon prophet and the +schoolmaster, owned - I was going to say land - owned at least coral +blocks and growing coco-palms in some adjacent isle. Thither - +from the gendarme to the babe in arms, the pastor followed by his flock, +the schoolmaster carrying along with him his scholars, and the scholars +with their books and slates - they had taken ship some two days previous +to our arrival, and were all now engaged disputing boundaries. +Fancy overhears the shrillness of their disputation mingle with the +surf and scatter sea-fowl. It was admirable to observe the completeness +of their flight, like that of hibernating birds; nothing left but empty +houses, like old nests to be reoccupied in spring; and even the harmless +necessary dominie borne with them in their transmigration. Fifty +odd set out, and only seven, I was informed, remained. But when +I made a feast on board the <i>Casco</i>, more than seven, and nearer +seven times seven, appeared to be my guests. Whence they appeared, +how they were summoned, whither they vanished when the feast was eaten, +I have no guess. In view of Low Island tales, and that awful frequentation +which makes men avoid the seaward beaches of an atoll, some two score +of those that ate with us may have returned, for the occasion, from +the kingdom of the dead.<br> +<br> +It was this solitude that put it in our minds to hire a house, and become, +for the time being, indwellers of the isle - a practice I have ever +since, when it was possible, adhered to. Mr. Donat placed us, +with that intent, under the convoy of one Taniera Mahinui, who combined +the incongruous characters of catechist and convict. The reader +may smile, but I affirm he was well qualified for either part. +For that of convict, first of all, by a good substantial felony, such +as in all lands casts the perpetrator in chains and dungeons. +Taniera was a man of birth - the chief a while ago, as he loved to tell, +of a district in Anaa of 800 souls. In an evil hour it occurred +to the authorities in Papeete to charge the chiefs with the collection +of the taxes. It is a question if much were collected; it is certain +that nothing was handed on; and Taniera, who had distinguished himself +by a visit to Papeete and some high living in restaurants, was chosen +for the scapegoat. The reader must understand that not Taniera +but the authorities in Papeete were first in fault. The charge +imposed was disproportioned. I have not yet heard of any Polynesian +capable of such a burden; honest and upright Hawaiians - one in particular, +who was admired even by the whites as an inflexible magistrate - have +stumbled in the narrow path of the trustee. And Taniera, when +the pinch came, scorned to denounce accomplices; others had shared the +spoil, he bore the penalty alone. He was condemned in five years. +The period, when I had the pleasure of his friendship, was not yet expired; +he still drew prison rations, the sole and not unwelcome reminder of +his chains, and, I believe, looked forward to the date of his enfranchisement +with mere alarm. For he had no sense of shame in the position; +complained of nothing but the defective table of his place of exile; +regretted nothing but the fowls and eggs and fish of his own more favoured +island. And as for his parishioners, they did not think one hair +the less of him. A schoolboy, mulcted in ten thousand lines of +Greek and dwelling sequestered in the dormitories, enjoys unabated consideration +from his fellows. So with Taniera: a marked man, not a dishonoured; +having fallen under the lash of the unthinkable gods; a Job, perhaps, +or say a Taniera in the den of lions. Songs are likely made and +sung about this saintly Robin Hood. On the other hand, he was +even highly qualified for his office in the Church; being by nature +a grave, considerate, and kindly man; his face rugged and serious, his +smile bright; the master of several trades, a builder both of boats +and houses; endowed with a fine pulpit voice; endowed besides with such +a gift of eloquence that at the grave of the late chief of Fakarava +he set all the assistants weeping. I never met a man of a mind +more ecclesiastical; he loved to dispute and to inform himself of doctrine +and the history of sects; and when I showed him the cuts in a volume +of Chambers’s <i>Encyclopaedia</i> - except for one of an ape +- reserved his whole enthusiasm for cardinals’ hats, censers, +candlesticks, and cathedrals. Methought when he looked upon the +cardinal’s hat a voice said low in his ear: ‘Your foot is +on the ladder.’<br> +<br> +Under the guidance of Taniera we were soon installed in what I believe +to have been the best-appointed private house in Fakarava. It +stood just beyond the church in an oblong patch of cultivation. +More than three hundred sacks of soil were imported from Tahiti for +the Residency garden; and this must shortly be renewed, for the earth +blows away, sinks in crevices of the coral, and is sought for at last +in vain. I know not how much earth had gone to the garden of my +villa; some at least, for an alley of prosperous bananas ran to the +gate, and over the rest of the enclosure, which was covered with the +usual clinker-like fragments of smashed coral, not only coco-palms and +mikis but also fig-trees flourished, all of a delicious greenness. +Of course there was no blade of grass. In front a picket fence +divided us from the white road, the palm-fringed margin of the lagoon, +and the lagoon itself, reflecting clouds by day and stars by night. +At the back, a bulwark of uncemented coral enclosed us from the narrow +belt of bush and the nigh ocean beach where the seas thundered, the +roar and wash of them still humming in the chambers of the house.<br> +<br> +This itself was of one story, verandahed front and back. It contained +three rooms, three sewing-machines, three sea-chests, chairs, tables, +a pair of beds, a cradle, a double-barrelled gun, a pair of enlarged +coloured photographs, a pair of coloured prints after Wilkie and Mulready, +and a French lithograph with the legend: ‘<i>Le brigade du Général +Lepasset brûlant son drapeau</i> <i>devant Metz</i>.’ +Under the stilts of the house a stove was rusting, till we drew it forth +and put it in commission. Not far off was the burrow in the coral +whence we supplied ourselves with brackish water. There was live +stock, besides, on the estate - cocks and hens and a brace of ill-regulated +cats, whom Taniera came every morning with the sun to feed on grated +cocoa-nut. His voice was our regular réveille, ringing +pleasantly about the garden: ‘Pooty - pooty - poo - poo - poo!’<br> +<br> +Far as we were from the public offices, the nearness of the chapel made +our situation what is called eligible in advertisements, and gave us +a side look on some native life. Every morning, as soon as he +had fed the fowls, Taniera set the bell agoing in the small belfry; +and the faithful, who were not very numerous, gathered to prayers. +I was once present: it was the Lord’s day, and seven females and +eight males composed the congregation. A woman played precentor, +starting with a longish note; the catechist joined in upon the second +bar; and then the faithful in a body. Some had printed hymn-books +which they followed; some of the rest filled up with ‘eh - eh +- eh,’ the Paumotuan tol-de-rol. After the hymn, we had +an antiphonal prayer or two; and then Taniera rose from the front bench, +where he had been sitting in his catechist’s robes, passed within +the altar-rails, opened his Tahitian Bible, and began to preach from +notes. I understood one word - the name of God; but the preacher +managed his voice with taste, used rare and expressive gestures, and +made a strong impression of sincerity. The plain service, the +vernacular Bible, the hymn-tunes mostly on an English pattern - ‘God +save the Queen,’ I was informed, a special favourite, - all, save +some paper flowers upon the altar, seemed not merely but austerely Protestant. +It is thus the Catholics have met their low island proselytes half-way.<br> +<br> +Taniera had the keys of our house; it was with him I made my bargain, +if that could be called a bargain in which all was remitted to my generosity; +it was he who fed the cats and poultry, he who came to call and pick +a meal with us like an acknowledged friend; and we long fondly supposed +he was our landlord. This belief was not to bear the test of experience; +and, as my chapter has to relate, no certainty succeeded it.<br> +<br> +We passed some days of airless quiet and great heat; shell-gatherers +were warned from the ocean beach, where sunstroke waited them from ten +till four; the highest palm hung motionless, there was no voice audible +but that of the sea on the far side. At last, about four of a +certain afternoon, long cat’s-paws flawed the face of the lagoon; +and presently in the tree-tops there awoke the grateful bustle of the +trades, and all the houses and alleys of the island were fanned out. +To more than one enchanted ship, that had lain long becalmed in view +of the green shore, the wind brought deliverance; and by daylight on +the morrow a schooner and two cutters lay moored in the port of Rotoava. +Not only in the outer sea, but in the lagoon itself, a certain traffic +woke with the reviving breeze; and among the rest one François, +a half-blood, set sail with the first light in his own half-decked cutter. +He had held before a court appointment; being, I believe, the Residency +sweeper-out. Trouble arising with the unpopular Vice-Resident, +he had thrown his honours down, and fled to the far parts of the atoll +to plant cabbages - or at least coco-palms. Thence he was now +driven by such need as even a Cincinnatus must acknowledge, and fared +for the capital city, the seat of his late functions, to exchange half +a ton of copra for necessary flour. And here, for a while, the +story leaves to tell of his voyaging.<br> +<br> +It must tell, instead, of our house, where, toward seven at night, the +catechist came suddenly in with his pleased air of being welcome; armed +besides with a considerable bunch of keys. These he proceeded +to try on the sea-chests, drawing each in turn from its place against +the wall. Heads of strangers appeared in the doorway and volunteered +suggestions. All in vain. Either they were the wrong keys +or the wrong boxes, or the wrong man was trying them. For a little +Taniera fumed and fretted; then had recourse to the more summary method +of the hatchet; one of the chests was broken open, and an armful of +clothing, male and female, baled out and handed to the strangers on +the verandah.<br> +<br> +These were François, his wife, and their child. About eight +a.m., in the midst of the lagoon, their cutter had capsized in jibbing. +They got her righted, and though she was still full of water put the +child on board. The mainsail had been carried away, but the jib +still drew her sluggishly along, and François and the woman swam +astern and worked the rudder with their hands. The cold was cruel; +the fatigue, as time went on, became excessive; and in that preserve +of sharks, fear hunted them. Again and again, François, +the half-breed, would have desisted and gone down; but the woman, whole +blood of an amphibious race, still supported him with cheerful words. +I am reminded of a woman of Hawaii who swam with her husband, I dare +not say how many miles, in a high sea, and came ashore at last with +his dead body in her arms. It was about five in the evening, after +nine hours’ swimming, that François and his wife reached +land at Rotoava. The gallant fight was won, and instantly the +more childish side of native character appears. They had supped, +and told and retold their story, dripping as they came; the flesh of +the woman, whom Mrs. Stevenson helped to shift, was cold as stone; and +François, having changed to a dry cotton shirt and trousers, +passed the remainder of the evening on my floor and between open doorways, +in a thorough draught. Yet François, the son of a French +father, speaks excellent French himself and seems intelligent.<br> +<br> +It was our first idea that the catechist, true to his evangelical vocation, +was clothing the naked from his superfluity. Then it came out +that François was but dealing with his own. The clothes +were his, so was the chest, so was the house. François +was in fact the landlord. Yet you observe he had hung back on +the verandah while Taniera tried his ‘prentice hand upon the locks: +and even now, when his true character appeared, the only use he made +of the estate was to leave the clothes of his family drying on the fence. +Taniera was still the friend of the house, still fed the poultry, still +came about us on his daily visits, François, during the remainder +of his stay, holding bashfully aloof. And there was stranger matter. +Since François had lost the whole load of his cutter, the half +ton of copra, an axe, bowls, knives, and clothes - since he had in a +manner to begin the world again, and his necessary flour was not yet +bought or paid for - I proposed to advance him what he needed on the +rent. To my enduring amazement he refused, and the reason he gave +- if that can be called a reason which but darkens counsel - was that +Taniera was his friend. His friend, you observe; not his creditor. +I inquired into that, and was assured that Taniera, an exile in a strange +isle, might possibly be in debt himself, but certainly was no man’s +creditor.<br> +<br> +Very early one morning we were awakened by a bustling presence in the +yard, and found our camp had been surprised by a tall, lean old native +lady, dressed in what were obviously widow’s weeds. You +could see at a glance she was a notable woman, a housewife, sternly +practical, alive with energy, and with fine possibilities of temper. +Indeed, there was nothing native about her but the skin; and the type +abounds, and is everywhere respected, nearer home. It did us good +to see her scour the grounds, examining the plants and chickens; watering, +feeding, trimming them; taking angry, purpose-like possession. +When she neared the house our sympathy abated; when she came to the +broken chest I wished I were elsewhere. We had scarce a word in +common; but her whole lean body spoke for her with indignant eloquence. +‘My chest!’ it cried, with a stress on the possessive. +‘My chest - broken open! This is a fine state of things!’ +I hastened to lay the blame where it belonged - on François and +his wife - and found I had made things worse instead of better. +She repeated the names at first with incredulity, then with despair. +A while she seemed stunned, next fell to disembowelling the box, piling +the goods on the floor, and visibly computing the extent of François’s +ravages; and presently after she was observed in high speech with Taniera, +who seemed to hang an ear like one reproved.<br> +<br> +Here, then, by all known marks, should be my land-lady at last; here +was every character of the proprietor fully developed. Should +I not approach her on the still depending question of my rent? +I carried the point to an adviser. ‘Nonsense!’ he +cried. ‘That’s the old woman, the mother. It +doesn’t belong to her. I believe that’s the man the +house belongs to,’ and he pointed to one of the coloured photographs +on the wall. On this I gave up all desire of understanding; and +when the time came for me to leave, in the judgment-hall of the archipelago, +and with the awful countenance of the acting Governor, I duly paid my +rent to Taniera. He was satisfied, and so was I. But what +had he to do with it? Mr. Donat, acting magistrate and a man of +kindred blood, could throw no light upon the mystery; a plain private +person, with a taste for letters, cannot be expected to do more.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER IV - TRAITS AND SECTS IN THE PAUMOTUS<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +The most careless reader must have remarked a change of air since the +Marquesas. The house, crowded with effects, the bustling housewife +counting her possessions, the serious, indoctrinated island pastor, +the long fight for life in the lagoon: here are traits of a new world. +I read in a pamphlet (I will not give the author’s name) that +the Marquesan especially resembles the Paumotuan. I should take +the two races, though so near in neighbourhood, to be extremes of Polynesian +diversity. The Marquesan is certainly the most beautiful of human +races, and one of the tallest - the Paumotuan averaging a good inch +shorter, and not even handsome; the Marquesan open-handed, inert, insensible +to religion, childishly self-indulgent - the Paumotuan greedy, hardy, +enterprising, a religious disputant, and with a trace of the ascetic +character.<br> +<br> +Yet a few years ago, and the people of the archipelago were crafty savages. +Their isles might be called sirens’ isles, not merely from the +attraction they exerted on the passing mariner, but from the perils +that awaited him on shore. Even to this day, in certain outlying +islands, danger lingers; and the civilized Paumotuan dreads to land +and hesitates to accost his backward brother. But, except in these, +to-day the peril is a memory. When our generation were yet in +the cradle and playroom it was still a living fact. Between 1830 +and 1840, Hao, for instance, was a place of the most dangerous approach, +where ships were seized and crews kidnapped. As late as 1856, +the schooner <i>Sarah Ann</i> sailed from Papeete and was seen no more. +She had women on board, and children, the captain’s wife, a nursemaid, +a baby, and the two young sons of a Captain Steven on their way to the +mainland for schooling. All were supposed to have perished in +a squall. A year later, the captain of the <i>Julia</i>, coasting +along the island variously called Bligh, Lagoon, and Tematangi saw armed +natives follow the course of his schooner, clad in many-coloured stuffs. +Suspicion was at once aroused; the mother of the lost children was profuse +of money; and one expedition having found the place deserted, and returned +content with firing a few shots, she raised and herself accompanied +another. None appeared to greet or to oppose them; they roamed +a while among abandoned huts and empty thickets; then formed two parties +and set forth to beat, from end to end, the pandanus jungle of the island. +One man remained alone by the landing-place - Teina, a chief of Anaa, +leader of the armed natives who made the strength of the expedition. +Now that his comrades were departed this way and that, on their laborious +exploration, the silence fell profound; and this silence was the ruin +of the islanders. A sound of stones rattling caught the ear of +Teina. He looked, thinking to perceive a crab, and saw instead +the brown hand of a human being issue from a fissure in the ground. +A shout recalled the search parties and announced their doom to the +buried caitiffs. In the cave below, sixteen were found crouching +among human bones and singular and horrid curiosities. One was +a head of golden hair, supposed to be a relic of the captain’s +wife; another was half of the body of a European child, sun-dried and +stuck upon a stick, doubtless with some design of wizardry.<br> +<br> +The Paumotuan is eager to be rich. He saves, grudges, buries money, +fears not work. For a dollar each, two natives passed the hours +of daylight cleaning our ship’s copper. It was strange to +see them so indefatigable and so much at ease in the water - working +at times with their pipes lighted, the smoker at times submerged and +only the glowing bowl above the surface; it was stranger still to think +they were next congeners to the incapable Marquesan. But the Paumotuan +not only saves, grudges, and works, he steals besides; or, to be more +precise, he swindles. He will never deny a debt, he only flees +his creditor. He is always keen for an advance; so soon as he +has fingered it he disappears. He knows your ship; so soon as +it nears one island, he is off to another. You may think you know +his name; he has already changed it. Pursuit in that infinity +of isles were fruitless. The result can be given in a nutshell. +It has been actually proposed in a Government report to secure debts +by taking a photograph of the debtor; and the other day in Papeete credits +on the Paumotus to the amount of sixteen thousand pounds were sold for +less than forty - <i>quatre cent mille francs pour moins de mille</i> +<i>francs</i>. Even so, the purchase was thought hazardous; and +only the man who made it and who had special opportunities could have +dared to give so much.<br> +<br> +The Paumotuan is sincerely attached to those of his own blood and household. +A touching affection sometimes unites wife and husband. Their +children, while they are alive, completely rule them; after they are +dead, their bones or their mummies are often jealously preserved and +carried from atoll to atoll in the wanderings of the family. I +was told there were many houses in Fakarava with the mummy of a child +locked in a sea-chest; after I heard it, I would glance a little jealously +at those by my own bed; in that cupboard, also, it was possible there +was a tiny skeleton.<br> +<br> +The race seems in a fair way to survive. From fifteen islands, +whose rolls I had occasion to consult, I found a proportion of 59 births +to 47 deaths for 1887. Dropping three out of the fifteen, there +remained for the other twelve the comfortable ratio of 50 births to +32 deaths. Long habits of hardship and activity doubtless explain +the contrast with Marquesan figures. But the Paumotuan displays, +besides, a certain concern for health and the rudiments of a sanitary +discipline. Public talk with these free-spoken people plays the +part of the Contagious Diseases Act; in-comers to fresh islands anxiously +inquire if all be well; and syphilis, when contracted, is successfully +treated with indigenous herbs. Like their neighbours of Tahiti, +from whom they have perhaps imbibed the error, they regard leprosy with +comparative indifference, elephantiasis with disproportionate fear. +But, unlike indeed to the Tahitian, their alarm puts on the guise of +self-defence. Any one stricken with this painful and ugly malady +is confined to the ends of villages, denied the use of paths and highways, +and condemned to transport himself between his house and coco-patch +by water only, his very footprint being held infectious. Fe’efe’e, +being a creature of marshes and the sequel of malarial fever, is not +original in atolls. On the single isle of Makatea, where the lagoon +is now a marsh, the disease has made a home. Many suffer; they +are excluded (if Mr. Wilmot be right) from much of the comfort of society; +and it is believed they take a secret vengeance. The defections +of the sick are considered highly poisonous. Early in the morning, +it is narrated, aged and malicious persons creep into the sleeping village, +and stealthily make water at the doors of the houses of young men. +Thus they propagate disease; thus they breathe on and obliterate comeliness +and health, the objects of their envy. Whether horrid fact or +more abominable legend, it equally depicts that something bitter and +energetic which distinguishes Paumotuan man.<br> +<br> +The archipelago is divided between two main religions, Catholic and +Mormon. They front each other proudly with a false air of permanence; +yet are but shapes, their membership in a perpetual flux. The +Mormon attends mass with devotion: the Catholic sits attentive at a +Mormon sermon, and to-morrow each may have transferred allegiance. +One man had been a pillar of the Church of Rome for fifteen years; his +wife dying, he decided that must be a poor religion that could not save +a man his wife, and turned Mormon. According to one informant, +Catholicism was the more fashionable in health, but on the approach +of sickness it was judged prudent to secede. As a Mormon, there +were five chances out of six you might recover; as a Catholic, your +hopes were small; and this opinion is perhaps founded on the comfortable +rite of unction.<br> +<br> +We all know what Catholics are, whether in the Paumotus or at home. +But the Paumotuan Mormon seemed a phenomenon apart. He marries +but the one wife, uses the Protestant Bible, observes Protestant forms +of worship, forbids the use of liquor and tobacco, practises adult baptism +by immersion, and after every public sin, rechristens the backslider. +I advised with Mahinui, whom I found well informed in the history of +the American Mormons, and he declared against the least connection. +‘<i>Pour moi</i>,’ said he, with a fine charity, ‘<i>les +Mormons ici un petit Catholiques</i>.’ Some months later +I had an opportunity to consult an orthodox fellow-countryman, an old +dissenting Highlander, long settled in Tahiti, but still breathing of +the heather of Tiree. ‘Why do they call themselves Mormons?’ +I asked. ‘My dear, and that is my question!’ he exclaimed. +‘For by all that I can hear of their doctrine, I have nothing +to say against it, and their life, it is above reproach.’ +And for all that, Mormons they are, but of the earlier sowing: the so-called +Josephites, the followers of Joseph Smith, the opponents of Brigham +Young.<br> +<br> +Grant, then, the Mormons to be Mormons. Fresh points at once arise: +What are the Israelites? and what the Kanitus? For a long while +back the sect had been divided into Mormons proper and so-called Israelites, +I never could hear why. A few years since there came a visiting +missionary of the name of Williams, who made an excellent collection, +and retired, leaving fresh disruption imminent. Something irregular +(as I was told) in his way of ‘opening the service’ had +raised partisans and enemies; the church was once more rent asunder; +and a new sect, the Kanitu, issued from the division. Since then +Kanitus and Israelites, like the Cameronians and the United Presbyterians, +have made common cause; and the ecclesiastical history of the Paumotus +is, for the moment, uneventful. There will be more doing before +long, and these isles bid fair to be the Scotland of the South. +Two things I could never learn. The nature of the innovations +of the Rev. Mr. Williams none would tell me, and of the meaning of the +name Kanitu none had a guess. It was not Tahitian, it was not +Marquesan; it formed no part of that ancient speech of the Paumotus, +now passing swiftly into obsolescence. One man, a priest, God +bless him! said it was the Latin for a little dog. I have found +it since as the name of a god in New Guinea; it must be a bolder man +than I who should hint at a connection. Here, then, is a singular +thing: a brand-new sect, arising by popular acclamation, and a nonsense +word invented for its name.<br> +<br> +The design of mystery seems obvious, and according to a very intelligent +observer, Mr. Magee of Mangareva, this element of the mysterious is +a chief attraction of the Mormon Church. It enjoys some of the +status of Freemasonry at home, and there is for the convert some of +the exhilaration of adventure. Other attractions are certainly +conjoined. Perpetual rebaptism, leading to a succession of baptismal +feasts, is found, both from the social and the spiritual side, a pleasing +feature. More important is the fact that all the faithful enjoy +office; perhaps more important still, the strictness of the discipline. +‘The veto on liquor,’ said Mr. Magee, ‘brings them +plenty members.’ There is no doubt these islanders are fond +of drink, and no doubt they refrain from the indulgence; a bout on a +feast-day, for instance, may be followed by a week or a month of rigorous +sobriety. Mr. Wilmot attributes this to Paumotuan frugality and +the love of hoarding; it goes far deeper. I have mentioned that +I made a feast on board the <i>Casco</i>. To wash down ship’s +bread and jam, each guest was given the choice of rum or syrup, and +out of the whole number only one man voted - in a defiant tone, and +amid shouts of mirth - for ‘Trum’! This was in public. +I had the meanness to repeat the experiment, whenever I had a chance, +within the four walls of my house; and three at least, who had refused +at the festival, greedily drank rum behind a door. But there were +others thoroughly consistent. I said the virtues of the race were +bourgeois and puritan; and how bourgeois is this! how puritanic! how +Scottish! and how Yankee! - the temptation, the resistance, the public +hypocritical conformity, the Pharisees, the Holy Willies, and the true +disciples. With such a people the popularity of an ascetic Church +appears legitimate; in these strict rules, in this perpetual supervision, +the weak find their advantage, the strong a certain pleasure; and the +doctrine of rebaptism, a clean bill and a fresh start, will comfort +many staggering professors.<br> +<br> +There is yet another sect, or what is called a sect - no doubt improperly +- that of the Whistlers. Duncan Cameron, so clear in favour of +the Mormons, was no less loud in condemnation of the Whistlers. +Yet I do not know; I still fancy there is some connection, perhaps fortuitous, +probably disavowed. Here at least are some doings in the house +of an Israelite clergyman (or prophet) in the island of Anaa, of which +I am equally sure that Duncan would disclaim and the Whistlers hail +them for an imitation of their own. My informant, a Tahitian and +a Catholic, occupied one part of the house; the prophet and his family +lived in the other. Night after night the Mormons, in the one +end, held their evening sacrifice of song; night after night, in the +other, the wife of the Tahitian lay awake and listened to their singing +with amazement. At length she could contain herself no longer, +woke her husband, and asked him what he heard. ‘I hear several +persons singing hymns,’ said he. ‘Yes,’ she +returned, ‘but listen again! Do you not hear something supernatural?’ +His attention thus directed, he was aware of a strange buzzing voice +- and yet he declared it was beautiful - which justly accompanied the +singers. The next day he made inquiries. ‘It is a +spirit,’ said the prophet, with entire simplicity, ‘which +has lately made a practice of joining us at family worship.’ +It did not appear the thing was visible, and like other spirits raised +nearer home in these degenerate days, it was rudely ignorant, at first +could only buzz, and had only learned of late to bear a part correctly +in the music.<br> +<br> +The performances of the Whistlers are more business-like. Their +meetings are held publicly with open doors, all being ‘cordially +invited to attend.’ The faithful sit about the room - according +to one informant, singing hymns; according to another, now singing and +now whistling; the leader, the wizard - let me rather say, the medium +- sits in the midst, enveloped in a sheet and silent; and presently, +from just above his head, or sometimes from the midst of the roof, an +aerial whistling proceeds, appalling to the inexperienced. This, +it appears, is the language of the dead; its purport is taken down progressively +by one of the experts, writing, I was told, ‘as fast as a telegraph +operator’; and the communications are at last made public. +They are of the baldest triviality; a schooner is, perhaps, announced, +some idle gossip reported of a neighbour, or if the spirit shall have +been called to consultation on a case of sickness, a remedy may be suggested. +One of these, immersion in scalding water, not long ago proved fatal +to the patient. The whole business is very dreary, very silly, +and very European; it has none of the picturesque qualities of similar +conjurations in New Zealand; it seems to possess no kernel of possible +sense, like some that I shall describe among the Gilbert islanders. +Yet I was told that many hardy, intelligent natives were inveterate +Whistlers. ‘Like Mahinui?’ I asked, willing to have +a standard; and I was told ‘Yes.’ Why should I wonder? +Men more enlightened than my convict-catechist sit down at home to follies +equally sterile and dull.<br> +<br> +The medium is sometimes female. It was a woman, for instance, +who introduced these practices on the north coast of Taiarapu, to the +scandal of her own connections, her brother-in-law in particular declaring +she was drunk. But what shocked Tahiti might seem fit enough in +the Paumotus, the more so as certain women there possess, by the gift +of nature, singular and useful powers. They say they are honest, +well-intentioned ladies, some of them embarrassed by their weird inheritance. +And indeed the trouble caused by this endowment is so great, and the +protection afforded so infinitesimally small, that I hesitate whether +to call it a gift or a hereditary curse. You may rob this lady’s +coco-patch, steal her canoes, burn down her house, and slay her family +scatheless; but one thing you must not do: you must not lay a hand upon +her sleeping-mat, or your belly will swell, and you can only be cured +by the lady or her husband. Here is the report of an eye-witness, +Tasmanian born, educated, a man who has made money - certainly no fool. +In 1886 he was present in a house on Makatea, where two lads began to +skylark on the mats, and were (I think) ejected. Instantly after, +their bellies began to swell; pains took hold on them; all manner of +island remedies were exhibited in vain, and rubbing only magnified their +sufferings. The man of the house was called, explained the nature +of the visitation, and prepared the cure. A cocoa-nut was husked, +filled with herbs, and with all the ceremonies of a launch, and the +utterance of spells in the Paumotuan language, committed to the sea. +From that moment the pains began to grow more easy and the swelling +to subside. The reader may stare. I can assure him, if he +moved much among old residents of the archipelago, he would be driven +to admit one thing of two - either that there is something in the swollen +bellies or nothing in the evidence of man.<br> +<br> +I have not met these gifted ladies; but I had an experience of my own, +for I have played, for one night only, the part of the whistling spirit. +It had been blowing wearily all day, but with the fall of night the +wind abated, and the moon, which was then full, rolled in a clear sky. +We went southward down the island on the side of the lagoon, walking +through long-drawn forest aisles of palm, and on a floor of snowy sand. +No life was abroad, nor sound of life; till in a clear part of the isle +we spied the embers of a fire, and not far off, in a dark house, heard +natives talking softly. To sit without a light, even in company, +and under cover, is for a Paumotuan a somewhat hazardous extreme. +The whole scene - the strong moonlight and crude shadows on the sand, +the scattered coals, the sound of the low voices from the house, and +the lap of the lagoon along the beach - put me (I know not how) on thoughts +of superstition. I was barefoot, I observed my steps were noiseless, +and drawing near to the dark house, but keeping well in shadow, began +to whistle. ‘The Heaving of the Lead’ was my air - +no very tragic piece. With the first note the conversation and +all movement ceased; silence accompanied me while I continued; and when +I passed that way on my return I found the lamp was lighted in the house, +but the tongues were still mute. All night, as I now think, the +wretches shivered and were silent. For indeed, I had no guess +at the time at the nature and magnitude of the terrors I inflicted, +or with what grisly images the notes of that old song had peopled the +dark house.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER V - A PAUMOTUAN FUNERAL<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +No, I had no guess of these men’s terrors. Yet I had received +ere that a hint, if I had understood; and the occasion was a funeral.<br> +<br> +A little apart in the main avenue of Rotoava, in a low hut of leaves +that opened on a small enclosure, like a pigsty on a pen, an old man +dwelt solitary with his aged wife. Perhaps they were too old to +migrate with the others; perhaps they were too poor, and had no possessions +to dispute. At least they had remained behind; and it thus befell +that they were invited to my feast. I dare say it was quite a +piece of politics in the pigsty whether to come or not to come, and +the husband long swithered between curiosity and age, till curiosity +conquered, and they came, and in the midst of that last merrymaking +death tapped him on the shoulder. For some days, when the sky +was bright and the wind cool, his mat would be spread in the main highway +of the village, and he was to be seen lying there inert, a mere handful +of a man, his wife inertly seated by his head. They seemed to +have outgrown alike our needs and faculties; they neither spoke nor +listened; they suffered us to pass without a glance; the wife did not +fan, she seemed not to attend upon her husband, and the two poor antiques +sat juxtaposed under the high canopy of palms, the human tragedy reduced +to its bare elements, a sight beyond pathos, stirring a thrill of curiosity. +And yet there was one touch of the pathetic haunted me: that so much +youth and expectation should have run in these starved veins, and the +man should have squandered all his lees of life on a pleasure party.<br> +<br> +On the morning of 17th September the sufferer died, and, time pressing, +he was buried the same day at four. The cemetery lies to seaward +behind Government House; broken coral, like so much road-metal, forms +the surface; a few wooden crosses, a few inconsiderable upright stones, +designate graves; a mortared wall, high enough to lean on, rings it +about; a clustering shrub surrounds it with pale leaves. Here +was the grave dug that morning, doubtless by uneasy diggers, to the +sound of the nigh sea and the cries of sea-birds; meanwhile the dead +man waited in his house, and the widow and another aged woman leaned +on the fence before the door, no speech upon their lips, no speculation +in their eyes.<br> +<br> +Sharp at the hour the procession was in march, the coffin wrapped in +white and carried by four bearers; mourners behind - not many, for not +many remained in Rotoava, and not many in black, for these were poor; +the men in straw hats, white coats, and blue trousers or the gorgeous +parti-coloured pariu, the Tahitian kilt; the women, with a few exceptions, +brightly habited. Far in the rear came the widow, painfully carrying +the dead man’s mat; a creature aged beyond humanity, to the likeness +of some missing link.<br> +<br> +The dead man had been a Mormon; but the Mormon clergyman was gone with +the rest to wrangle over boundaries in the adjacent isle, and a layman +took his office. Standing at the head of the open grave, in a +white coat and blue pariu, his Tahitian Bible in his hand and one eye +bound with a red handkerchief, he read solemnly that chapter in Job +which has been read and heard over the bones of so many of our fathers, +and with a good voice offered up two prayers. The wind and the +surf bore a burthen. By the cemetery gate a mother in crimson +suckled an infant rolled in blue. In the midst the widow sat upon +the ground and polished one of the coffin-stretchers with a piece of +coral; a little later she had turned her back to the grave and was playing +with a leaf. Did she understand? God knows. The officiant +paused a moment, stooped, and gathered and threw reverently on the coffin +a handful of rattling coral. Dust to dust: but the grains of this +dust were gross like cherries, and the true dust that was to follow +sat near by, still cohering (as by a miracle) in the tragic semblance +of a female ape.<br> +<br> +So far, Mormon or not, it was a Christian funeral. The well-known +passage had been read from Job, the prayers had been rehearsed, the +grave was filled, the mourners straggled homeward. With a little +coarser grain of covering earth, a little nearer outcry of the sea, +a stronger glare of sunlight on the rude enclosure, and some incongruous +colours of attire, the well-remembered form had been observed.<br> +<br> +By rights it should have been otherwise. The mat should have been +buried with its owner; but, the family being poor, it was thriftily +reserved for a fresh service. The widow should have flung herself +upon the grave and raised the voice of official grief, the neighbours +have chimed in, and the narrow isle rung for a space with lamentation. +But the widow was old; perhaps she had forgotten, perhaps never understood, +and she played like a child with leaves and coffin-stretchers. +In all ways my guest was buried with maimed rites. Strange to +think that his last conscious pleasure was the <i>Casco</i> and my feast; +strange to think that he had limped there, an old child, looking for +some new good. And the good thing, rest, had been allotted him.<br> +<br> +But though the widow had neglected much, there was one part she must +not utterly neglect. She came away with the dispersing funeral; +but the dead man’s mat was left behind upon the grave, and I learned +that by set of sun she must return to sleep there. This vigil +is imperative. From sundown till the rising of the morning star +the Paumotuan must hold his watch above the ashes of his kindred. +Many friends, if the dead have been a man of mark, will keep the watchers +company; they will be well supplied with coverings against the weather; +I believe they bring food, and the rite is persevered in for two weeks. +Our poor survivor, if, indeed, she properly survived, had little to +cover, and few to sit with her; on the night of the funeral a strong +squall chased her from her place of watch; for days the weather held +uncertain and outrageous; and ere seven nights were up she had desisted, +and returned to sleep in her low roof. That she should be at the +pains of returning for so short a visit to a solitary house, that this +borderer of the grave should fear a little wind and a wet blanket, filled +me at the time with musings. I could not say she was indifferent; +she was so far beyond me in experience that the court of my criticism +waived jurisdiction; but I forged excuses, telling myself she had perhaps +little to lament, perhaps suffered much, perhaps understood nothing. +And lo! in the whole affair there was no question whether of tenderness +or piety, and the sturdy return of this old remnant was a mark either +of uncommon sense or of uncommon fortitude.<br> +<br> +Yet one thing had occurred that partly set me on the trail. I +have said the funeral passed much as at home. But when all was +over, when we were trooping in decent silence from the graveyard gate +and down the path to the settlement, a sudden inbreak of a different +spirit startled and perhaps dismayed us. Two people walked not +far apart in our procession: my friend Mr. Donat - Donat-Rimarau: ‘Donat +the much-handed’ - acting Vice-Resident, present ruler of the +archipelago, by far the man of chief importance on the scene, but known +besides for one of an unshakable good temper; and a certain comely, +strapping young Paumotuan woman, the comeliest on the isle, not (let +us hope) the bravest or the most polite. Of a sudden, ere yet +the grave silence of the funeral was broken, she made a leap at the +Resident, with pointed finger, shrieked a few words, and fell back again +with a laughter, not a natural mirth. ‘What did she say +to you?’ I asked. ‘She did not speak to <i>me</i>,’ +said Donat, a shade perturbed; ‘she spoke to the ghost of the +dead man.’ And the purport of her speech was this: ‘See +there! Donat will be a fine feast for you to-night.’<br> +<br> +‘M. Donat called it a jest,’ I wrote at the time in my diary. +‘It seemed to me more in the nature of a terrified conjuration, +as though she would divert the ghost’s attention from herself. +A cannibal race may well have cannibal phantoms.’ The guesses +of the traveller appear foredoomed to be erroneous; yet in these I was +precisely right. The woman had stood by in terror at the funeral, +being then in a dread spot, the graveyard. She looked on in terror +to the coming night, with that ogre, a new spirit, loosed upon the isle. +And the words she had cried in Donat’s face were indeed a terrified +conjuration, basely to shield herself, basely to dedicate another in +her stead. One thing is to be said in her excuse. Doubtless +she partly chose Donat because he was a man of great good-nature, but +partly, too, because he was a man of the half-caste. For I believe +all natives regard white blood as a kind of talisman against the powers +of hell. In no other way can they explain the unpunished recklessness +of Europeans.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER VI - GRAVEYARD STORIES<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +WITH my superstitious friend, the islander, I fear I am not wholly frank, +often leading the way with stories of my own, and being always a grave +and sometimes an excited hearer. But the deceit is scarce mortal, +since I am as pleased to hear as he to tell, as pleased with the story +as he with the belief; and, besides, it is entirely needful. For +it is scarce possible to exaggerate the extent and empire of his superstitions; +they mould his life, they colour his thinking; and when he does not +speak to me of ghosts, and gods, and devils, he is playing the dissembler +and talking only with his lips. With thoughts so different, one +must indulge the other; and I would rather that I should indulge his +superstition than he my incredulity. Of one thing, besides, I +may be sure: Let me indulge it as I please, I shall not hear the whole; +for he is already on his guard with me, and the amount of the lore is +boundless.<br> +<br> +I will give but a few instances at random, chiefly from my own doorstep +in Upolu, during the past month (October 1890). One of my workmen +was sent the other day to the banana patch, there to dig; this is a +hollow of the mountain, buried in woods, out of all sight and cry of +mankind; and long before dusk Lafaele was back again beside the cook-house +with embarrassed looks; he dared not longer stay alone, he was afraid +of ‘spirits in the bush.’ It seems these are the souls +of the unburied dead, haunting where they fell, and wearing woodland +shapes of pig, or bird, or insect; the bush is full of them, they seem +to eat nothing, slay solitary wanderers apparently in spite, and at +times, in human form, go down to villages and consort with the inhabitants +undetected. So much I learned a day or so after, walking in the +bush with a very intelligent youth, a native. It was a little +before noon; a grey day and squally; and perhaps I had spoken lightly. +A dark squall burst on the side of the mountain; the woods shook and +cried; the dead leaves rose from the ground in clouds, like butterflies; +and my companion came suddenly to a full stop. He was afraid, +he said, of the trees falling; but as soon as I had changed the subject +of our talk he proceeded with alacrity. A day or two before a +messenger came up the mountain from Apia with a letter; I was in the +bush, he must await my return, then wait till I had answered: and before +I was done his voice sounded shrill with terror of the coming night +and the long forest road. These are the commons. Take the +chiefs. There has been a great coming and going of signs and omens +in our group. One river ran down blood; red eels were captured +in another; an unknown fish was thrown upon the coast, an ominous word +found written on its scales. So far we might be reading in a monkish +chronicle; now we come on a fresh note, at once modern and Polynesian. +The gods of Upolu and Savaii, our two chief islands, contended recently +at cricket. Since then they are at war. Sounds of battle +are heard to roll along the coast. A woman saw a man swim from +the high seas and plunge direct into the bush; he was no man of that +neighbourhood; and it was known he was one of the gods, speeding to +a council. Most perspicuous of all, a missionary on Savaii, who +is also a medical man, was disturbed late in the night by knocking; +it was no hour for the dispensary, but at length he woke his servant +and sent him to inquire; the servant, looking from a window, beheld +crowds of persons, all with grievous wounds, lopped limbs, broken heads, +and bleeding bullet-holes; but when the door was opened all had disappeared. +They were gods from the field of battle. Now these reports have +certainly significance; it is not hard to trace them to political grumblers +or to read in them a threat of coming trouble; from that merely human +side I found them ominous myself. But it was the spiritual side +of their significance that was discussed in secret council by my rulers. +I shall best depict this mingled habit of the Polynesian mind by two +connected instances. I once lived in a village, the name of which +I do not mean to tell. The chief and his sister were persons perfectly +intelligent: gentlefolk, apt of speech. The sister was very religious, +a great church-goer, one that used to reprove me if I stayed away; I +found afterwards that she privately worshipped a shark. The chief +himself was somewhat of a freethinker; at the least, a latitudinarian: +he was a man, besides, filled with European knowledge and accomplishments; +of an impassive, ironical habit; and I should as soon have expected +superstition in Mr. Herbert Spencer. Hear the sequel. I +had discovered by unmistakable signs that they buried too shallow in +the village graveyard, and I took my friend, as the responsible authority, +to task. ‘There is something wrong about your graveyard,’ +said I, ‘which you must attend to, or it may have very bad results.’ +‘Something wrong? What is it?’ he asked, with an emotion +that surprised me. ‘If you care to go along there any evening +about nine o’clock you can see for yourself,’ said I. +He stepped backward. ‘A ghost!’ he cried.<br> +<br> +In short, in the whole field of the South Seas, there is not one to +blame another. Half blood and whole, pious and debauched, intelligent +and dull, all men believe in ghosts, all men combine with their recent +Christianity fear of and a lingering faith in the old island deities. +So, in Europe, the gods of Olympus slowly dwindled into village bogies; +so to-day, the theological Highlander sneaks from under the eye of the +Free Church divine to lay an offering by a sacred well.<br> +<br> +I try to deal with the whole matter here because of a particular quality +in Paumotuan superstitions. It is true I heard them told by a +man with a genius for such narrations. Close about our evening +lamp, within sound of the island surf, we hung on his words, thrilling. +The reader, in far other scenes, must listen close for the faint echo.<br> +<br> +This bundle of weird stories sprang from the burial and the woman’s +selfish conjuration. I was dissatisfied with what I heard, harped +upon questions, and struck at last this vein of metal. It is from +sundown to about four in the morning that the kinsfolk camp upon the +grave; and these are the hours of the spirits’ wanderings. +At any time of the night - it may be earlier, it may be later - a sound +is to be heard below, which is the noise of his liberation; at four +sharp, another and a louder marks the instant of the re-imprisonment; +between-whiles, he goes his malignant rounds. ‘Did you ever +see an evil spirit?’ was once asked of a Paumotuan. ‘Once.’ +‘Under what form?’ ‘It was in the form of a +crane.’ ‘And how did you know that crane to be a spirit?’ +was asked. ‘I will tell you,’ he answered; and this +was the purport of his inconclusive narrative. His father had +been dead nearly a fortnight; others had wearied of the watch; and as +the sun was setting, he found himself by the grave alone. It was +not yet dark, rather the hour of the afterglow, when he was aware of +a snow-white crane upon the coral mound; presently more cranes came, +some white, some black; then the cranes vanished, and he saw in their +place a white cat, to which there was silently joined a great company +of cats of every hue conceivable; then these also disappeared, and he +was left astonished.<br> +<br> +This was an anodyne appearance. Take instead the experience of +Rua-a-mariterangi on the isle of Katiu. He had a need for some +pandanus, and crossed the isle to the sea-beach, where it chiefly flourishes. +The day was still, and Rua was surprised to hear a crashing sound among +the thickets, and then the fall of a considerable tree. Here must +be some one building a canoe; and he entered the margin of the wood +to find and pass the time of day with this chance neighbour. The +crashing sounded more at hand; and then he was aware of something drawing +swiftly near among the tree-tops. It swung by its heels downward, +like an ape, so that its hands were free for murder; it depended safely +by the slightest twigs; the speed of its coming was incredible; and +soon Rua recognised it for a corpse, horrible with age, its bowels hanging +as it came. Prayer was the weapon of Christian in the Valley of +the Shadow, and it is to prayer that Rua-a-mariterangi attributes his +escape. No merely human expedition had availed.<br> +<br> +This demon was plainly from the grave; yet you will observe he was abroad +by day. And inconsistent as it may seem with the hours of the +night watch and the many references to the rising of the morning star, +it is no singular exception. I could never find a case of another +who had seen this ghost, diurnal and arboreal in its habits; but others +have heard the fall of the tree, which seems the signal of its coming. +Mr. Donat was once pearling on the uninhabited isle of Haraiki. +It was a day without a breath of wind, such as alternate in the archipelago +with days of contumelious breezes. The divers were in the midst +of the lagoon upon their employment; the cook, a boy of ten, was over +his pots in the camp. Thus were all souls accounted for except +a single native who accompanied Donat into the wood in quest of sea-fowls’ +eggs. In a moment, out of the stillness, came the sound of the +fall of a great tree. Donat would have passed on to find the cause. +‘No,’ cried his companion, ‘that was no tree. +It was something <i>not right</i>. Let us go back to camp.’ +Next Sunday the divers were turned on, all that part of the isle was +thoroughly examined, and sure enough no tree had fallen. A little +later Mr. Donat saw one of his divers flee from a similar sound, in +similar unaffected panic, on the same isle. But neither would +explain, and it was not till afterwards, when he met with Rua, that +he learned the occasion of their terrors.<br> +<br> +But whether by day or night, the purpose of the dead in these abhorred +activities is still the same. In Samoa, my informant had no idea +of the food of the bush spirits; no such ambiguity would exist in the +mind of a Paumotuan. In that hungry archipelago, living and dead +must alike toil for nutriment; and the race having been cannibal in +the past, the spirits are so still. When the living ate the dead, +horrified nocturnal imagination drew the shocking inference that the +dead might eat the living. Doubtless they slay men, doubtless +even mutilate them, in mere malice. Marquesan spirits sometimes +tear out the eyes of travellers; but even that may be more practical +than appears, for the eye is a cannibal dainty. And certainly +the root-idea of the dead, at least in the far eastern islands, is to +prowl for food. It was as a dainty morsel for a meal that the +woman denounced Donat at the funeral. There are spirits besides +who prey in particular not on the bodies but on the souls of the dead. +The point is clearly made in a Tahitian story. A child fell sick, +grew swiftly worse, and at last showed signs of death. The mother +hastened to the house of a sorcerer, who lived hard by. ‘You +are yet in time,’ said he; ‘a spirit has just run past my +door carrying the soul of your child wrapped in the leaf of a purao; +but I have a spirit stronger and swifter who will run him down ere he +has time to eat it.’ Wrapped in a leaf: like other things +edible and corruptible.<br> +<br> +Or take an experience of Mr. Donat’s on the island of Anaa. +It was a night of a high wind, with violent squalls; his child was very +sick, and the father, though he had gone to bed, lay wakeful, hearkening +to the gale. All at once a fowl was violently dashed on the house +wall. Supposing he had forgot to put it in shelter with the rest, +Donat arose, found the bird (a cock) lying on the verandah, and put +it in the hen-house, the door of which he securely fastened. Fifteen +minutes later the business was repeated, only this time, as it was being +dashed against the wall, the bird crew. Again Donat replaced it, +examining the hen-house thoroughly and finding it quite perfect; as +he was so engaged the wind puffed out his light, and he must grope back +to the door a good deal shaken. Yet a third time the bird was +dashed upon the wall; a third time Donat set it, now near dead, beside +its mates; and he was scarce returned before there came a rush, like +that of a furious strong man, against the door, and a whistle as loud +as that of a railway engine rang about the house. The sceptical +reader may here detect the finger of the tempest; but the women gave +up all for lost and clustered on the beds lamenting. Nothing followed, +and I must suppose the gale somewhat abated, for presently after a chief +came visiting. He was a bold man to be abroad so late, but doubtless +carried a bright lantern. And he was certainly a man of counsel, +for as soon as he heard the details of these disturbances he was in +a position to explain their nature. ‘Your child,’ +said he, ‘must certainly die. This is the evil spirit of +our island who lies in wait to eat the spirits of the newly dead.’ +And then he went on to expatiate on the strangeness of the spirit’s +conduct. He was not usually, he explained, so open of assault, +but sat silent on the house-top waiting, in the guise of a bird, while +within the people tended the dying and bewailed the dead, and had no +thought of peril. But when the day came and the doors were opened, +and men began to go abroad, blood-stains on the wall betrayed the tragedy.<br> +<br> +This is the quality I admire in Paumotuan legend. In Tahiti the +spirit-eater is said to assume a vesture which has much more of pomp, +but how much less of horror. It has been seen by all sorts and +conditions, native and foreign; only the last insist it is a meteor. +My authority was not so sure. He was riding with his wife about +two in the morning; both were near asleep, and the horses not much better. +It was a brilliant and still night, and the road wound over a mountain, +near by a deserted marae (old Tahitian temple). All at once the +appearance passed above them: a form of light; the head round and greenish; +the body long, red, and with a focus of yet redder brilliancy about +the midst. A buzzing hoot accompanied its passage; it flew direct +out of one marae, and direct for another down the mountain side. +And this, as my informant argued, is suggestive. For why should +a mere meteor frequent the altars of abominable gods? The horses, +I should say, were equally dismayed with their riders. Now I am +not dismayed at all - not even agreeably. Give me rather the bird +upon the house-top and the morning blood-gouts on the wall.<br> +<br> +But the dead are not exclusive in their diet. They carry with +them to the grave, in particular, the Polynesian taste for fish, and +enter at times with the living into a partnership in fishery. +Rua-a-mariterangi is again my authority; I feel it diminishes the credit +of the fact, but how it builds up the image of this inveterate ghost-seer! +He belongs to the miserably poor island of Taenga, yet his father’s +house was always well supplied. As Rua grew up he was called at +last to go a-fishing with this fortunate parent. They rowed the +lagoon at dusk, to an unlikely place, and the lay down in the stern, +and the father began vainly to cast his line over the bows. It +is to be supposed that Rua slept; and when he awoke there was the figure +of another beside his father, and his father was pulling in the fish +hand over hand. ‘Who is that man, father?’ Rua asked. +‘It is none of your business,’ said the father; and Rua +supposed the stranger had swum off to them from shore. Night after +night they fared into the lagoon, often to the most unlikely places; +night after night the stranger would suddenly be seen on board, and +as suddenly be missed; and morning after morning the canoe returned +laden with fish. ‘My father is a very lucky man,’ +thought Rua. At last, one fine day, there came first one boat +party and then another, who must be entertained; father and son put +off later than usual into the lagoon; and before the canoe was landed +it was four o’clock, and the morning star was close on the horizon. +Then the stranger appeared seized with some distress; turned about, +showing for the first time his face, which was that of one long dead, +with shining eyes; stared into the east, set the tips of his fingers +to his mouth like one a-cold, uttered a strange, shuddering sound between +a whistle and a moan - a thing to freeze the blood; and, the day-star +just rising from the sea, he suddenly was not. Then Rua understood +why his father prospered, why his fishes rotted early in the day, and +why some were always carried to the cemetery and laid upon the graves. +My informant is a man not certainly averse to superstition, but he keeps +his head, and takes a certain superior interest, which I may be allowed +to call scientific. The last point reminding him of some parallel +practice in Tahiti, he asked Rua if the fish were left, or carried home +again after a formal dedication. It appears old Mariterangi practised +both methods; sometimes treating his shadowy partner to a mere oblation, +sometimes honestly leaving his fish to rot upon the grave.<br> +<br> +It is plain we have in Europe stories of a similar complexion; and the +Polynesian <i>varua ino</i> or <i>aitu o le</i> <i>vao</i> is clearly +the near kinsman of the Transylvanian vampire. Here is a tale +in which the kinship appears broadly marked. On the atoll of Penrhyn, +then still partly savage, a certain chief was long the salutary terror +of the natives. He died, he was buried; and his late neighbours +had scarce tasted the delights of licence ere his ghost appeared about +the village. Fear seized upon all; a council was held of the chief +men and sorcerers; and with the approval of the Rarotongan missionary, +who was as frightened as the rest, and in the presence of several whites +- my friend Mr. Ben Hird being one - the grave was opened, deepened +until water came, and the body re-interred face down. The still +recent staking of suicides in England and the decapitation of vampires +in the east of Europe form close parallels.<br> +<br> +So in Samoa only the spirits of the unburied awake fear. During +the late war many fell in the bush; their bodies, sometimes headless, +were brought back by native pastors and interred; but this (I know not +why) was insufficient, and the spirit still lingered on the theatre +of death. When peace returned a singular scene was enacted in +many places, and chiefly round the high gorges of Lotoanuu, where the +struggle was long centred and the loss had been severe. Kinswomen +of the dead came carrying a mat or sheet and guided by survivors of +the fight. The place of death was earnestly sought out; the sheet +was spread upon the ground; and the women, moved with pious anxiety, +sat about and watched it. If any living thing alighted it was +twice brushed away; upon the third coming it was known to be the spirit +of the dead, was folded in, carried home and buried beside the body; +and the aitu rested. The rite was practised beyond doubt in simple +piety; the repose of the soul was its object: its motive, reverent affection. +The present king disowns indeed all knowledge of a dangerous aitu; he +declares the souls of the unburied were only wanderers in limbo, lacking +an entrance to the proper country of the dead, unhappy, nowise hurtful. +And this severely classic opinion doubtless represents the views of +the enlightened. But the flight of my Lafaele marks the grosser +terrors of the ignorant.<br> +<br> +This belief in the exorcising efficacy of funeral rites perhaps explains +a fact, otherwise amazing, that no Polynesian seems at all to share +our European horror of human bones and mummies. Of the first they +made their cherished ornaments; they preserved them in houses or in +mortuary caves; and the watchers of royal sepulchres dwelt with their +children among the bones of generations. The mummy, even in the +making, was as little feared. In the Marquesas, on the extreme +coast, it was made by the household with continual unction and exposure +to the sun; in the Carolines, upon the farthest west, it is still cured +in the smoke of the family hearth. Head-hunting, besides, still +lives around my doorstep in Samoa. And not ten years ago, in the +Gilberts, the widow must disinter, cleanse, polish, and thenceforth +carry about her, by day and night, the head of her dead husband. +In all these cases we may suppose the process, whether of cleansing +or drying, to have fully exorcised the aitu.<br> +<br> +But the Paumotuan belief is more obscure. Here the man is duly +buried, and he has to be watched. He is duly watched, and the +spirit goes abroad in spite of watches. Indeed, it is not the +purpose of the vigils to prevent these wanderings; only to mollify by +polite attention the inveterate malignity of the dead. Neglect +(it is supposed) may irritate and thus invite his visits, and the aged +and weakly sometimes balance risks and stay at home. Observe, +it is the dead man’s kindred and next friends who thus deprecate +his fury with nocturnal watchings. Even the placatory vigil is +held perilous, except in company, and a boy was pointed out to me in +Rotoava, because he had watched alone by his own father. Not the +ties of the dead, nor yet their proved character, affect the issue. +A late Resident, who died in Fakarava of sunstroke, was beloved in life +and is still remembered with affection; none the less his spirit went +about the island clothed with terrors, and the neighbourhood of Government +House was still avoided after dark. We may sum up the cheerful +doctrine thus: All men become vampires, and the vampire spares none. +And here we come face to face with a tempting inconsistency. For +the whistling spirits are notoriously clannish; I understood them to +wait upon and to enlighten kinsfolk only, and that the medium was always +of the race of the communicating spirit. Here, then, we have the +bonds of the family, on the one hand, severed at the hour of death; +on the other, helpfully persisting.<br> +<br> +The child’s soul in the Tahitian tale was wrapped in leaves. +It is the spirits of the newly dead that are the dainty. When +they are slain, the house is stained with blood. Rua’s dead +fisherman was decomposed; so - and horribly - was his arboreal demon. +The spirit, then, is a thing material; and it is by the material ensigns +of corruption that he is distinguished from the living man. This +opinion is widespread, adds a gross terror to the more ugly Polynesian +tales, and sometimes defaces the more engaging with a painful and incongruous +touch. I will give two examples sufficiently wide apart, one from +Tahiti, one from Samoa.<br> +<br> +And first from Tahiti. A man went to visit the husband of his +sister, then some time dead. In her life the sister had been dainty +in the island fashion, and went always adorned with a coronet of flowers. +In the midst of the night the brother awoke and was aware of a heavenly +fragrance going to and fro in the dark house. The lamp I must +suppose to have burned out; no Tahitian would have lain down without +one lighted. A while he lay wondering and delighted; then called +upon the rest. ‘Do none of you smell flowers?’ he +asked. ‘O,’ said his brother-in-law, ‘we are +used to that here.’ The next morning these two men went +walking, and the widower confessed that his dead wife came about the +house continually, and that he had even seen her. She was shaped +and dressed and crowned with flowers as in her lifetime; only she moved +a few inches above the earth with a very easy progress, and flitted +dryshod above the surface of the river. And now comes my point: +It was always in a back view that she appeared; and these brothers-in-law, +debating the affair, agreed that this was to conceal the inroads of +corruption.<br> +<br> +Now for the Samoan story. I owe it to the kindness of Dr. F. Otto +Sierich, whose collection of folk-tales I expect with a high degree +of interest. A man in Manu’a was married to two wives and +had no issue. He went to Savaii, married there a third, and was +more fortunate. When his wife was near her time he remembered +he was in a strange island, like a poor man; and when his child was +born he must be shamed for lack of gifts. It was in vain his wife +dissuaded him. He returned to his father in Manu’a seeking +help; and with what he could get he set off in the night to re-embark. +Now his wives heard of his coming; they were incensed that he did not +stay to visit them; and on the beach, by his canoe, intercepted and +slew him. Now the third wife lay asleep in Savaii; - her babe +was born and slept by her side; and she was awakened by the spirit of +her husband. ‘Get up,’ he said, ‘my father is +sick in Manu’a and we must go to visit him.’ ‘It +is well,’ said she; ‘take you the child, while I carry its +mats.’ ‘I cannot carry the child,’ said the +spirit; ‘I am too cold from the sea.’ When they were +got on board the canoe the wife smelt carrion. ‘How is this?’ +she said. ‘What have you in the canoe that I should smell +carrion?’ ‘It is nothing in the canoe,’ said +the spirit. ‘It is the land-wind blowing down the mountains, +where some beast lies dead.’ It appears it was still night +when they reached Manu’a - the swiftest passage on record - and +as they entered the reef the bale-fires burned in the village. +Again she asked him to carry the child; but now he need no more dissemble. +‘I cannot carry your child,’ said he, ‘for I am dead, +and the fires you see are burning for my funeral.’<br> +<br> +The curious may learn in Dr. Sierich’s book the unexpected sequel +of the tale. Here is enough for my purpose. Though the man +was but new dead, the ghost was already putrefied, as though putrefaction +were the mark and of the essence of a spirit. The vigil on the +Paumotuan grave does not extend beyond two weeks, and they told me this +period was thought to coincide with that of the resolution of the body. +The ghost always marked with decay - the danger seemingly ending with +the process of dissolution - here is tempting matter for the theorist. +But it will not do. The lady of the flowers had been long dead, +and her spirit was still supposed to bear the brand of perishability. +The Resident had been more than a fortnight buried, and his vampire +was still supposed to go the rounds.<br> +<br> +Of the lost state of the dead, from the lurid Mangaian legend, in which +infernal deities hocus and destroy the souls of all, to the various +submarine and aerial limbos where the dead feast, float idle, or resume +the occupations of their life on earth, it would be wearisome to tell. +One story I give, for it is singular in itself, is well-known in Tahiti, +and has this of interest, that it is post-Christian, dating indeed from +but a few years back. A princess of the reigning house died; was +transported to the neighbouring isle of Raiatea; fell there under the +empire of a spirit who condemned her to climb coco-palms all day and +bring him the nuts; was found after some time in this miserable servitude +by a second spirit, one of her own house; and by him, upon her lamentations, +reconveyed to Tahiti, where she found her body still waked, but already +swollen with the approaches of corruption. It is a lively point +in the tale that, on the sight of this dishonoured tabernacle, the princess +prayed she might continue to be numbered with the dead. But it +seems it was too late, her spirit was replaced by the least dignified +of entrances, and her startled family beheld the body move. The +seemingly purgatorial labours, the helpful kindred spirit, and the horror +of the princess at the sight of her tainted body, are all points to +be remarked.<br> +<br> +The truth is, the tales are not necessarily consistent in themselves; +and they are further darkened for the stranger by an ambiguity of language. +Ghosts, vampires, spirits, and gods are all confounded. And yet +I seem to perceive that (with exceptions) those whom we would count +gods were less maleficent. Permanent spirits haunt and do murder +in corners of Samoa; but those legitimate gods of Upolu and Savaii, +whose wars and cricketings of late convulsed society, I did not gather +to be dreaded, or not with a like fear. The spirit of Aana that +ate souls is certainly a fearsome inmate; but the high gods, even of +the archipelago, seem helpful. Mahinui - from whom our convict-catechist +had been named - the spirit of the sea, like a Proteus endowed with +endless avatars, came to the assistance of the shipwrecked and carried +them ashore in the guise of a ray fish. The same divinity bore +priests from isle to isle about the archipelago, and by his aid, within +the century, persons have been seen to fly. The tutelar deity +of each isle is likewise helpful, and by a particular form of wedge-shaped +cloud on the horizon announces the coming of a ship.<br> +<br> +To one who conceives of these atolls, so narrow, so barren, so beset +with sea, here would seem a superfluity of ghostly denizens. And +yet there are more. In the various brackish pools and ponds, beautiful +women with long red hair are seen to rise and bathe; only (timid as +mice) on the first sound of feet upon the coral they dive again for +ever. They are known to be healthy and harmless living people, +dwellers of an underworld; and the same fancy is current in Tahiti, +where also they have the hair red. <i>Tetea</i> is the Tahitian +name; the Paumotuan, <i>Mokurea</i>.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +PART III: THE GILBERTS<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER I - BUTARITARI<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +At Honolulu we had said farewell to the <i>Casco</i> and to Captain +Otis, and our next adventure was made in changed conditions. Passage +was taken for myself, my wife, Mr. Osbourne, and my China boy, Ah Fu, +on a pigmy trading schooner, the <i>Equator</i>, Captain Dennis Reid; +and on a certain bright June day in 1889, adorned in the Hawaiian fashion +with the garlands of departure, we drew out of port and bore with a +fair wind for Micronesia.<br> +<br> +The whole extent of the South Seas is a desert of ships; more especially +that part where we were now to sail. No post runs in these islands; +communication is by accident; where you may have designed to go is one +thing, where you shall be able to arrive another. It was my hope, +for instance, to have reached the Carolines, and returned to the light +of day by way of Manila and the China ports; and it was in Samoa that +we were destined to re-appear and be once more refreshed with the sight +of mountains. Since the sunset faded from the peaks of Oahu six +months had intervened, and we had seen no spot of earth so high as an +ordinary cottage. Our path had been still on the flat sea, our +dwellings upon unerected coral, our diet from the pickle-tub or out +of tins; I had learned to welcome shark’s flesh for a variety; +and a mountain, an onion, an Irish potato or a beef-steak, had been +long lost to sense and dear to aspiration.<br> +<br> +The two chief places of our stay, Butaritari and Apemama, lie near the +line; the latter within thirty miles. Both enjoy a superb ocean +climate, days of blinding sun and bracing wind, nights of a heavenly +brightness. Both are somewhat wider than Fakarava, measuring perhaps +(at the widest) a quarter of a mile from beach to beach. In both, +a coarse kind of <i>taro</i> thrives; its culture is a chief business +of the natives, and the consequent mounds and ditches make miniature +scenery and amuse the eye. In all else they show the customary +features of an atoll: the low horizon, the expanse of the lagoon, the +sedge-like rim of palm-tops, the sameness and smallness of the land, +the hugely superior size and interest of sea and sky. Life on +such islands is in many points like life on shipboard. The atoll, +like the ship, is soon taken for granted; and the islanders, like the +ship’s crew, become soon the centre of attention. The isles +are populous, independent, seats of kinglets, recently civilised, little +visited. In the last decade many changes have crept in; women +no longer go unclothed till marriage; the widow no longer sleeps at +night and goes abroad by day with the skull of her dead husband; and, +fire-arms being introduced, the spear and the shark-tooth sword are +sold for curiosities. Ten years ago all these things and practices +were to be seen in use; yet ten years more, and the old society will +have entirely vanished. We came in a happy moment to see its institutions +still erect and (in Apemama) scarce decayed.<br> +<br> +Populous and independent - warrens of men, ruled over with some rustic +pomp - such was the first and still the recurring impression of these +tiny lands. As we stood across the lagoon for the town of Butaritari, +a stretch of the low shore was seen to be crowded with the brown roofs +of houses; those of the palace and king’s summer parlour (which +are of corrugated iron) glittered near one end conspicuously bright; +the royal colours flew hard by on a tall flagstaff; in front, on an +artificial islet, the gaol played the part of a martello. Even +upon this first and distant view, the place had scarce the air of what +it truly was, a village; rather of that which it was also, a petty metropolis, +a city rustic and yet royal.<br> +<br> +The lagoon is shoal. The tide being out, we waded for some quarter +of a mile in tepid shallows, and stepped ashore at last into a flagrant +stagnancy of sun and heat. The lee side of a line island after +noon is indeed a breathless place; on the ocean beach the trade will +be still blowing, boisterous and cool; out in the lagoon it will be +blowing also, speeding the canoes; but the screen of bush completely +intercepts it from the shore, and sleep and silence and companies of +mosquitoes brood upon the towns.<br> +<br> +We may thus be said to have taken Butaritari by surprise. A few +inhabitants were still abroad in the north end, at which we landed. +As we advanced, we were soon done with encounter, and seemed to explore +a city of the dead. Only, between the posts of open houses, we +could see the townsfolk stretched in the siesta, sometimes a family +together veiled in a mosquito-net, sometimes a single sleeper on a platform +like a corpse on a bier.<br> +<br> +The houses were of all dimensions, from those of toys to those of churches. +Some might hold a battalion, some were so minute they could scarce receive +a pair of lovers; only in the playroom, when the toys are mingled, do +we meet such incongruities of scale. Many were open sheds; some +took the form of roofed stages; others were walled and the walls pierced +with little windows. A few were perched on piles in the lagoon; +the rest stood at random on a green, through which the roadway made +a ribbon of sand, or along the embankments of a sheet of water like +a shallow dock. One and all were the creatures of a single tree; +palm-tree wood and palm-tree leaf their materials; no nail had been +driven, no hammer sounded, in their building, and they were held together +by lashings of palm-tree sinnet.<br> +<br> +In the midst of the thoroughfare, the church stands like an island, +a lofty and dim house with rows of windows; a rich tracery of framing +sustains the roof; and through the door at either end the street shows +in a vista. The proportions of the place, in such surroundings, +and built of such materials, appeared august; and we threaded the nave +with a sentiment befitting visitors in a cathedral. Benches run +along either side. In the midst, on a crazy dais, two chairs stand +ready for the king and queen when they shall choose to worship; over +their heads a hoop, apparently from a hogshead, depends by a strip of +red cotton; and the hoop (which hangs askew) is dressed with streamers +of the same material, red and white.<br> +<br> +This was our first advertisement of the royal dignity, and presently +we stood before its seat and centre. The palace is built of imported +wood upon a European plan; the roof of corrugated iron, the yard enclosed +with walls, the gate surmounted by a sort of lych-house. It cannot +be called spacious; a labourer in the States is sometimes more commodiously +lodged; but when we had the chance to see it within, we found it was +enriched (beyond all island expectation) with coloured advertisements +and cuts from the illustrated papers. Even before the gate some +of the treasures of the crown stand public: a bell of a good magnitude, +two pieces of cannon, and a single shell. The bell cannot be rung +nor the guns fired; they are curiosities, proofs of wealth, a part of +the parade of the royalty, and stand to be admired like statues in a +square. A straight gut of water like a canal runs almost to the +palace door; the containing quay-walls excellently built of coral; over +against the mouth, by what seems an effect of landscape art, the martello-like +islet of the gaol breaks the lagoon. Vassal chiefs with tribute, +neighbour monarchs come a-roving, might here sail in, view with surprise +these extensive public works, and be awed by these mouths of silent +cannon. It was impossible to see the place and not to fancy it +designed for pageantry. But the elaborate theatre then stood empty; +the royal house deserted, its doors and windows gaping; the whole quarter +of the town immersed in silence. On the opposite bank of the canal, +on a roofed stage, an ancient gentleman slept publicly, sole visible +inhabitant; and beyond on the lagoon a canoe spread a striped lateen, +the sole thing moving.<br> +<br> +The canal is formed on the south by a pier or causeway with a parapet. +At the far end the parapet stops, and the quay expands into an oblong +peninsula in the lagoon, the breathing-place and summer parlour of the +king. The midst is occupied by an open house or permanent marquee +- called here a maniapa, or, as the word is now pronounced, a maniap’ +- at the lowest estimation forty feet by sixty. The iron roof, +lofty but exceedingly low-browed, so that a woman must stoop to enter, +is supported externally on pillars of coral, within by a frame of wood. +The floor is of broken coral, divided in aisles by the uprights of the +frame; the house far enough from shore to catch the breeze, which enters +freely and disperses the mosquitoes; and under the low eaves the sun +is seen to glitter and the waves to dance on the lagoon.<br> +<br> +It was now some while since we had met any but slumberers; and when +we had wandered down the pier and stumbled at last into this bright +shed, we were surprised to find it occupied by a society of wakeful +people, some twenty souls in all, the court and guardsmen of Butaritari. +The court ladies were busy making mats; the guardsmen yawned and sprawled. +Half a dozen rifles lay on a rock and a cutlass was leaned against a +pillar: the armoury of these drowsy musketeers. At the far end, +a little closed house of wood displayed some tinsel curtains, and proved, +upon examination, to be a privy on the European model. In front +of this, upon some mats, lolled Tebureimoa, the king; behind him, on +the panels of the house, two crossed rifles represented fasces. +He wore pyjamas which sorrowfully misbecame his bulk; his nose was hooked +and cruel, his body overcome with sodden corpulence, his eye timorous +and dull: he seemed at once oppressed with drowsiness and held awake +by apprehension: a pepper rajah muddled with opium, and listening for +the march of a Dutch army, looks perhaps not otherwise. We were +to grow better acquainted, and first and last I had the same impression; +he seemed always drowsy, yet always to hearken and start; and, whether +from remorse or fear, there is no doubt he seeks a refuge in the abuse +of drugs.<br> +<br> +The rajah displayed no sign of interest in our coming. But the +queen, who sat beside him in a purple sacque, was more accessible; and +there was present an interpreter so willing that his volubility became +at last the cause of our departure. He had greeted us upon our +entrance:- ‘That is the honourable King, and I am his interpreter,’ +he had said, with more stateliness than truth. For he held no +appointment in the court, seemed extremely ill-acquainted with the island +language, and was present, like ourselves, upon a visit of civility. +Mr. Williams was his name: an American darkey, runaway ship’s +cook, and bar-keeper at <i>The Land we Live in</i> tavern, Butaritari. +I never knew a man who had more words in his command or less truth to +communicate; neither the gloom of the monarch, nor my own efforts to +be distant, could in the least abash him; and when the scene closed, +the darkey was left talking.<br> +<br> +The town still slumbered, or had but just begun to turn and stretch +itself; it was still plunged in heat and silence. So much the +more vivid was the impression that we carried away of the house upon +the islet, the Micronesian Saul wakeful amid his guards, and his unmelodious +David, Mr. Williams, chattering through the drowsy hours.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER II - THE FOUR BROTHERS<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +The kingdom of Tebureimoa includes two islands, Great and Little Makin; +some two thousand subjects pay him tribute, and two semi-independent +chieftains do him qualified homage. The importance of the office +is measured by the man; he may be a nobody, he may be absolute; and +both extremes have been exemplified within the memory of residents.<br> +<br> +On the death of king Tetimararoa, Tebureimoa’s father, Nakaeia, +the eldest son, succeeded. He was a fellow of huge physical strength, +masterful, violent, with a certain barbaric thrift and some intelligence +of men and business. Alone in his islands, it was he who dealt +and profited; he was the planter and the merchant; and his subjects +toiled for his behoof in servitude. When they wrought long and +well their taskmaster declared a holiday, and supplied and shared a +general debauch. The scale of his providing was at times magnificent; +six hundred dollars’ worth of gin and brandy was set forth at +once; the narrow land resounded with the noise of revelry: and it was +a common thing to see the subjects (staggering themselves) parade their +drunken sovereign on the fore-hatch of a wrecked vessel, king and commons +howling and singing as they went. At a word from Nakaeia’s +mouth the revel ended; Makin became once more an isle of slaves and +of teetotalers; and on the morrow all the population must be on the +roads or in the taro-patches toiling under his bloodshot eye.<br> +<br> +The fear of Nakaeia filled the land. No regularity of justice +was affected; there was no trial, there were no officers of the law; +it seems there was but one penalty, the capital; and daylight assault +and midnight murder were the forms of process. The king himself +would play the executioner: and his blows were dealt by stealth, and +with the help and countenance of none but his own wives. These +were his oarswomen; one that caught a crab, he slew incontinently with +the tiller; thus disciplined, they pulled him by night to the scene +of his vengeance, which he would then execute alone and return well-pleased +with his connubial crew. The inmates of the harem held a station +hard for us to conceive. Beasts of draught, and driven by the +fear of death, they were yet implicitly trusted with their sovereign’s +life; they were still wives and queens, and it was supposed that no +man should behold their faces. They killed by the sight like basilisks; +a chance view of one of those boatwomen was a crime to be wiped out +with blood. In the days of Nakaeia the palace was beset with some +tall coco-palms which commanded the enclosure. It chanced one +evening, while Nakaeia sat below at supper with his wives, that the +owner of the grove was in a tree-top drawing palm-tree wine; it chanced +that he looked down, and the king at the same moment looking up, their +eyes encountered. Instant flight preserved the involuntary criminal. +But during the remainder of that reign he must lurk and be hid by friends +in remote parts of the isle; Nakaeia hunted him without remission, although +still in vain; and the palms, accessories to the fact, were ruthlessly +cut down. Such was the ideal of wifely purity in an isle where +nubile virgins went naked as in paradise. And yet scandal found +its way into Nakaeia’s well-guarded harem. He was at that +time the owner of a schooner, which he used for a pleasure-house, lodging +on board as she lay anchored; and thither one day he summoned a new +wife. She was one that had been sealed to him; that is to say +(I presume), that he was married to her sister, for the husband of an +elder sister has the call of the cadets. She would be arrayed +for the occasion; she would come scented, garlanded, decked with fine +mats and family jewels, for marriage, as her friends supposed; for death, +as she well knew. ‘Tell me the man’s name, and I will +spare you,’ said Nakaeia. But the girl was staunch; she +held her peace, saved her lover and the queens strangled her between +the mats.<br> +<br> +Nakaeia was feared; it does not appear that he was hated. Deeds +that smell to us of murder wore to his subjects the reverend face of +justice; his orgies made him popular; natives to this day recall with +respect the firmness of his government; and even the whites, whom he +long opposed and kept at arm’s-length, give him the name (in the +canonical South Sea phrase) of ‘a perfect gentleman when sober.’<br> +<br> +When he came to lie, without issue, on the bed of death, he summoned +his next brother, Nanteitei, made him a discourse on royal policy, and +warned him he was too weak to reign. The warning was taken to +heart, and for some while the government moved on the model of Nakaeia’s. +Nanteitei dispensed with guards, and walked abroad alone with a revolver +in a leather mail-bag. To conceal his weakness he affected a rude +silence; you might talk to him all day; advice, reproof, appeal, and +menace alike remained unanswered.<br> +<br> +The number of his wives was seventeen, many of them heiresses; for the +royal house is poor, and marriage was in these days a chief means of +buttressing the throne. Nakaeia kept his harem busy for himself; +Nanteitei hired it out to others. In his days, for instance, Messrs. +Wightman built a pier with a verandah at the north end of the town. +The masonry was the work of the seventeen queens, who toiled and waded +there like fisher lasses; but the man who was to do the roofing durst +not begin till they had finished, lest by chance he should look down +and see them.<br> +<br> +It was perhaps the last appearance of the harem gang. For some +time already Hawaiian missionaries had been seated at Butaritari - Maka +and Kanoa, two brave childlike men. Nakaeia would none of their +doctrine; he was perhaps jealous of their presence; being human, he +had some affection for their persons. In the house, before the +eyes of Kanoa, he slew with his own hand three sailors of Oahu, crouching +on their backs to knife them, and menacing the missionary if he interfered; +yet he not only spared him at the moment, but recalled him afterwards +(when he had fled) with some expressions of respect. Nanteitei, +the weaker man, fell more completely under the spell. Maka, a +light-hearted, lovable, yet in his own trade very rigorous man, gained +and improved an influence on the king which soon grew paramount. +Nanteitei, with the royal house, was publicly converted; and, with a +severity which liberal missionaries disavow, the harem was at once reduced. +It was a compendious act. The throne was thus impoverished, its +influence shaken, the queen’s relatives mortified, and sixteen +chief women (some of great possessions) cast in a body on the market. +I have been shipmates with a Hawaiian sailor who was successively married +to two of these <i>impromptu</i> widows, and successively divorced by +both for misconduct. That two great and rich ladies (for both +of these were rich) should have married ‘a man from another island’ +marks the dissolution of society. The laws besides were wholly +remodelled, not always for the better. I love Maka as a man; as +a legislator he has two defects: weak in the punishment of crime, stern +to repress innocent pleasures.<br> +<br> +War and revolution are the common successors of reform; yet Nanteitei +died (of an overdose of chloroform), in quiet possession of the throne, +and it was in the reign of the third brother, Nabakatokia, a man brave +in body and feeble of character, that the storm burst. The rule +of the high chiefs and notables seems to have always underlain and perhaps +alternated with monarchy. The Old Men (as they were called) have +a right to sit with the king in the Speak House and debate: and the +king’s chief superiority is a form of closure - ‘The Speaking +is over.’ After the long monocracy of Nakaeia and the changes +of Nanteitei, the Old Men were doubtless grown impatient of obscurity, +and they were beyond question jealous of the influence of Maka. +Calumny, or rather caricature, was called in use; a spoken cartoon ran +round society; Maka was reported to have said in church that the king +was the first man in the island and himself the second; and, stung by +the supposed affront, the chiefs broke into rebellion and armed gatherings. +In the space of one forenoon the throne of Nakaeia was humbled in the +dust. The king sat in the maniap’ before the palace gate +expecting his recruits; Maka by his side, both anxious men; and meanwhile, +in the door of a house at the north entry of the town, a chief had taken +post and diverted the succours as they came. They came singly +or in groups, each with his gun or pistol slung about his neck. +‘Where are you going?’ asked the chief. ‘The +king called us,’ they would reply. ‘Here is your place. +Sit down,’ returned the chief. With incredible disloyalty, +all obeyed; and sufficient force being thus got together from both sides, +Nabakatokia was summoned and surrendered. About this period, in +almost every part of the group, the kings were murdered; and on Tapituea, +the skeleton of the last hangs to this day in the chief Speak House +of the isle, a menace to ambition. Nabakatokia was more fortunate; +his life and the royal style were spared to him, but he was stripped +of power. The Old Men enjoyed a festival of public speaking; the +laws were continually changed, never enforced; the commons had an opportunity +to regret the merits of Nakaeia; and the king, denied the resource of +rich marriages and the service of a troop of wives, fell not only in +disconsideration but in debt.<br> +<br> +He died some months before my arrival on the islands, and no one regretted +him; rather all looked hopefully to his successor. This was by +repute the hero of the family. Alone of the four brothers, he +had issue, a grown son, Natiata, and a daughter three years old; it +was to him, in the hour of the revolution, that Nabakatokia turned too +late for help; and in earlier days he had been the right hand of the +vigorous Nakaeia. Nontemat’, <i>Mr. Corpse</i>, was his +appalling nickname, and he had earned it well. Again and again, +at the command of Nakaeia, he had surrounded houses in the dead of night, +cut down the mosquito bars and butchered families. Here was the +hand of iron; here was Nakaeia <i>redux</i>. He came, summoned +from the tributary rule of Little Makin: he was installed, he proved +a puppet and a trembler, the unwieldy shuttlecock of orators; and the +reader has seen the remains of him in his summer parlour under the name +of Tebureimoa.<br> +<br> +The change in the man’s character was much commented on in the +island, and variously explained by opium and Christianity. To +my eyes, there seemed no change at all, rather an extreme consistency. +Mr. Corpse was afraid of his brother: King Tebureimoa is afraid of the +Old Men. Terror of the first nerved him for deeds of desperation; +fear of the second disables him for the least act of government. +He played his part of bravo in the past, following the line of least +resistance, butchering others in his own defence: to-day, grown elderly +and heavy, a convert, a reader of the Bible, perhaps a penitent, conscious +at least of accumulated hatreds, and his memory charged with images +of violence and blood, he capitulates to the Old Men, fuddles himself +with opium, and sits among his guards in dreadful expectation. +The same cowardice that put into his hand the knife of the assassin +deprives him of the sceptre of a king.<br> +<br> +A tale that I was told, a trifling incident that fell in my observation, +depicts him in his two capacities. A chief in Little Makin asked, +in an hour of lightness, ‘Who is Kaeia?’ A bird carried +the saying; and Nakaeia placed the matter in the hands of a committee +of three. Mr. Corpse was chairman; the second commissioner died +before my arrival; the third was yet alive and green, and presented +so venerable an appearance that we gave him the name of Abou ben Adhem. +Mr. Corpse was troubled with a scruple; the man from Little Makin was +his adopted brother; in such a case it was not very delicate to appear +at all, to strike the blow (which it seems was otherwise expected of +him) would be worse than awkward. ‘I will strike the blow,’ +said the venerable Abou; and Mr. Corpse (surely with a sigh) accepted +the compromise. The quarry was decoyed into the bush; he was set +to carrying a log; and while his arms were raised Abou ripped up his +belly at a blow. Justice being thus done, the commission, in a +childish horror, turned to flee. But their victim recalled them +to his side. ‘You need not run away now,’ he said. +‘You have done this thing to me. Stay.’ He was +some twenty minutes dying, and his murderers sat with him the while: +a scene for Shakespeare. All the stages of a violent death, the +blood, the failing voice, the decomposing features, the changed hue, +are thus present in the memory of Mr. Corpse; and since he studied them +in the brother he betrayed, he has some reason to reflect on the possibilities +of treachery. I was never more sure of anything than the tragic +quality of the king’s thoughts; and yet I had but the one sight +of him at unawares. I had once an errand for his ear. It +was once more the hour of the siesta; but there were loiterers abroad, +and these directed us to a closed house on the bank of the canal where +Tebureimoa lay unguarded. We entered without ceremony, being in +some haste. He lay on the floor upon a bed of mats, reading in +his Gilbert Island Bible with compunction. On our sudden entrance +the unwieldy man reared himself half-sitting so that the Bible rolled +on the floor, stared on us a moment with blank eyes, and, having recognised +his visitors, sank again upon the mats. So Eglon looked on Ehud.<br> +<br> +The justice of facts is strange, and strangely just; Nakaeia, the author +of these deeds, died at peace discoursing on the craft of kings; his +tool suffers daily death for his enforced complicity. Not the +nature, but the congruity of men’s deeds and circumstances damn +and save them; and Tebureimoa from the first has been incongruously +placed. At home, in a quiet bystreet of a village, the man had +been a worthy carpenter, and, even bedevilled as he is, he shows some +private virtues. He has no lands, only the use of such as are +impignorate for fines; he cannot enrich himself in the old way by marriages; +thrift is the chief pillar of his future, and he knows and uses it. +Eleven foreign traders pay him a patent of a hundred dollars, some two +thousand subjects pay capitation at the rate of a dollar for a man, +half a dollar for a woman, and a shilling for a child: allowing for +the exchange, perhaps a total of three hundred pounds a year. +He had been some nine months on the throne: had bought his wife a silk +dress and hat, figure unknown, and himself a uniform at three hundred +dollars; had sent his brother’s photograph to be enlarged in San +Francisco at two hundred and fifty dollars; had greatly reduced that +brother’s legacy of debt and had still sovereigns in his pocket. +An affectionate brother, a good economist; he was besides a handy carpenter, +and cobbled occasionally on the woodwork of the palace. It is +not wonderful that Mr. Corpse has virtues; that Tebureimoa should have +a diversion filled me with surprise.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER III - AROUND OUR HOUSE<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +When we left the palace we were still but seafarers ashore; and within +the hour we had installed our goods in one of the six foreign houses +of Butaritari, namely, that usually occupied by Maka, the Hawaiian missionary. +Two San Francisco firms are here established, Messrs. Crawford and Messrs. +Wightman Brothers; the first hard by the palace of the mid town, the +second at the north entry; each with a store and bar-room. Our +house was in the Wightman compound, betwixt the store and bar, within +a fenced enclosure. Across the road a few native houses nestled +in the margin of the bush, and the green wall of palms rose solid, shutting +out the breeze. A little sandy cove of the lagoon ran in behind, +sheltered by a verandah pier, the labour of queens’ hands. +Here, when the tide was high, sailed boats lay to be loaded; when the +tide was low, the boats took ground some half a mile away, and an endless +series of natives descended the pier stair, tailed across the sand in +strings and clusters, waded to the waist with the bags of copra, and +loitered backward to renew their charge. The mystery of the copra +trade tormented me, as I sat and watched the profits drip on the stair +and the sands.<br> +<br> +In front, from shortly after four in the morning until nine at night, +the folk of the town streamed by us intermittingly along the road: families +going up the island to make copra on their lands; women bound for the +bush to gather flowers against the evening toilet; and, twice a day, +the toddy-cutters, each with his knife and shell. In the first +grey of the morning, and again late in the afternoon, these would straggle +past about their tree-top business, strike off here and there into the +bush, and vanish from the face of the earth. At about the same +hour, if the tide be low in the lagoon, you are likely to be bound yourself +across the island for a bath, and may enter close at their heels alleys +of the palm wood. Right in front, although the sun is not yet +risen, the east is already lighted with preparatory fires, and the huge +accumulations of the trade-wind cloud glow with and heliograph the coming +day. The breeze is in your face; overhead in the tops of the palms, +its playthings, it maintains a lively bustle; look where you will, above +or below, there is no human presence, only the earth and shaken forest. +And right overhead the song of an invisible singer breaks from the thick +leaves; from farther on a second tree-top answers; and beyond again, +in the bosom of the woods, a still more distant minstrel perches and +sways and sings. So, all round the isle, the toddy-cutters sit +on high, and are rocked by the trade, and have a view far to seaward, +where they keep watch for sails, and like huge birds utter their songs +in the morning. They sing with a certain lustiness and Bacchic +glee; the volume of sound and the articulate melody fall unexpected +from the tree-top, whence we anticipate the chattering of fowls. +And yet in a sense these songs also are but chatter; the words are ancient, +obsolete, and sacred; few comprehend them, perhaps no one perfectly; +but it was understood the cutters ‘prayed to have good toddy, +and sang of their old wars.’ The prayer is at least answered; +and when the foaming shell is brought to your door, you have a beverage +well ‘worthy of a grace.’ All forenoon you may return +and taste; it only sparkles, and sharpens, and grows to be a new drink, +not less delicious; but with the progress of the day the fermentation +quickens and grows acid; in twelve hours it will be yeast for bread, +in two days more a devilish intoxicant, the counsellor of crime.<br> +<br> +The men are of a marked Arabian cast of features, often bearded and +mustached, often gaily dressed, some with bracelets and anklets, all +stalking hidalgo-like, and accepting salutations with a haughty lip. +The hair (with the dandies of either sex) is worn turban-wise in a frizzled +bush; and like the daggers of the Japanese a pointed stick (used for +a comb) is thrust gallantly among the curls. The women from this +bush of hair look forth enticingly: the race cannot be compared with +the Tahitian for female beauty; I doubt even if the average be high; +but some of the prettiest girls, and one of the handsomest women I ever +saw, were Gilbertines. Butaritari, being the commercial centre +of the group, is Europeanised; the coloured sacque or the white shift +are common wear, the latter for the evening; the trade hat, loaded with +flowers, fruit, and ribbons, is unfortunately not unknown; and the characteristic +female dress of the Gilberts no longer universal. The <i>ridi</i> +is its name: a cutty petticoat or fringe of the smoked fibre of cocoa-nut +leaf, not unlike tarry string: the lower edge not reaching the mid-thigh, +the upper adjusted so low upon the haunches that it seems to cling by +accident. A sneeze, you think, and the lady must surely be left +destitute. ‘The perilous, hairbreadth ridi’ was our +word for it; and in the conflict that rages over women’s dress +it has the misfortune to please neither side, the prudish condemning +it as insufficient, the more frivolous finding it unlovely in itself. +Yet if a pretty Gilbertine would look her best, that must be her costume. +In that and naked otherwise, she moves with an incomparable liberty +and grace and life, that marks the poetry of Micronesia. Bundle +her in a gown, the charm is fled, and she wriggles like an Englishwoman.<br> +<br> +Towards dusk the passers-by became more gorgeous. The men broke +out in all the colours of the rainbow - or at least of the trade-room, +- and both men and women began to be adorned and scented with new flowers. +A small white blossom is the favourite, sometimes sown singly in a woman’s +hair like little stars, now composed in a thick wreath. With the +night, the crowd sometimes thickened in the road, and the padding and +brushing of bare feet became continuous; the promenades mostly grave, +the silence only interrupted by some giggling and scampering of girls; +even the children quiet. At nine, bed-time struck on a bell from +the cathedral, and the life of the town ceased. At four the next +morning the signal is repeated in the darkness, and the innocent prisoners +set free; but for seven hours all must lie - I was about to say within +doors, of a place where doors, and even walls, are an exception - housed, +at least, under their airy roofs and clustered in the tents of the mosquito-nets. +Suppose a necessary errand to occur, suppose it imperative to send abroad, +the messenger must then go openly, advertising himself to the police +with a huge brand of cocoa-nut, which flares from house to house like +a moving bonfire. Only the police themselves go darkling, and +grope in the night for misdemeanants. I used to hate their treacherous +presence; their captain in particular, a crafty old man in white, lurked +nightly about my premises till I could have found it in my heart to +beat him. But the rogue was privileged.<br> +<br> +Not one of the eleven resident traders came to town, no captain cast +anchor in the lagoon, but we saw him ere the hour was out. This +was owing to our position between the store and the bar - the <i>Sans +Souci</i>, as the last was called. Mr. Rick was not only Messrs. +Wightman’s manager, but consular agent for the States; Mrs. Rick +was the only white woman on the island, and one of the only two in the +archipelago; their house besides, with its cool verandahs, its bookshelves, +its comfortable furniture, could not be rivalled nearer than Jaluit +or Honolulu. Every one called in consequence, save such as might +be prosecuting a South Sea quarrel, hingeing on the price of copra and +the odd cent, or perhaps a difference about poultry. Even these, +if they did not appear upon the north, would be presently visible to +the southward, the <i>Sans Souci</i> drawing them as with cords. +In an island with a total population of twelve white persons, one of +the two drinking-shops might seem superfluous: but every bullet has +its billet, and the double accommodation of Butaritari is found in practice +highly convenient by the captains and the crews of ships: <i>The Land +we Live in</i> being tacitly resigned to the forecastle, the <i>Sans +Souci</i> tacitly reserved for the afterguard. So aristocratic +were my habits, so commanding was my fear of Mr. Williams, that I have +never visited the first; but in the other, which was the club or rather +the casino of the island, I regularly passed my evenings. It was +small, but neatly fitted, and at night (when the lamp was lit) sparkled +with glass and glowed with coloured pictures like a theatre at Christmas. +The pictures were advertisements, the glass coarse enough, the carpentry +amateur; but the effect, in that incongruous isle, was of unbridled +luxury and inestimable expense. Here songs were sung, tales told, +tricks performed, games played. The Ricks, ourselves, Norwegian +Tom the bar-keeper, a captain or two from the ships, and perhaps three +or four traders come down the island in their boats or by the road on +foot, made up the usual company. The traders, all bred to the +sea, take a humorous pride in their new business; ‘South Sea Merchants’ +is the title they prefer. ‘We are all sailors here’ +- ‘Merchants, if you please’ - ‘<i>South Sea</i> Merchants,’ +- was a piece of conversation endlessly repeated, that never seemed +to lose in savour. We found them at all times simple, genial, +gay, gallant, and obliging; and, across some interval of time, recall +with pleasure the traders of Butaritari. There was one black sheep +indeed. I tell of him here where he lived, against my rule; for +in this case I have no measure to preserve, and the man is typical of +a class of ruffians that once disgraced the whole field of the South +Seas, and still linger in the rarely visited isles of Micronesia. +He had the name on the beach of ‘a perfect gentleman when sober,’ +but I never saw him otherwise than drunk. The few shocking and +savage traits of the Micronesian he has singled out with the skill of +a collector, and planted in the soil of his original baseness. +He has been accused and acquitted of a treacherous murder; and has since +boastfully owned it, which inclines me to suppose him innocent. +His daughter is defaced by his erroneous cruelty, for it was his wife +he had intended to disfigure, and in the darkness of the night and the +frenzy of coco-brandy, fastened on the wrong victim. The wife +has since fled and harbours in the bush with natives; and the husband +still demands from deaf ears her forcible restoration. The best +of his business is to make natives drink, and then advance the money +for the fine upon a lucrative mortgage. ‘Respect for whites’ +is the man’s word: ‘What is the matter with this island +is the want of respect for whites.’ On his way to Butaritari, +while I was there, he spied his wife in the bush with certain natives +and made a dash to capture her; whereupon one of her companions drew +a knife and the husband retreated: ‘Do you call that proper respect +for whites?’ he cried. At an early stage of the acquaintance +we proved our respect for his kind of white by forbidding him our enclosure +under pain of death. Thenceforth he lingered often in the neighbourhood +with I knew not what sense of envy or design of mischief; his white, +handsome face (which I beheld with loathing) looked in upon us at all +hours across the fence; and once, from a safe distance, he avenged himself +by shouting a recondite island insult, to us quite inoffensive, on his +English lips incredibly incongruous.<br> +<br> +Our enclosure, round which this composite of degradations wandered, +was of some extent. In one corner was a trellis with a long table +of rough boards. Here the Fourth of July feast had been held not +long before with memorable consequences, yet to be set forth; here we +took our meals; here entertained to a dinner the king and notables of +Makin. In the midst was the house, with a verandah front and back, +and three is rooms within. In the verandah we slung our man-of-war +hammocks, worked there by day, and slept at night. Within were +beds, chairs, a round table, a fine hanging lamp, and portraits of the +royal family of Hawaii. Queen Victoria proves nothing; Kalakaua +and Mrs. Bishop are diagnostic; and the truth is we were the stealthy +tenants of the parsonage. On the day of our arrival Maka was away; +faithless trustees unlocked his doors; and the dear rigorous man, the +sworn foe of liquor and tobacco, returned to find his verandah littered +with cigarettes and his parlour horrible with bottles. He made +but one condition - on the round table, which he used in the celebration +of the sacraments, he begged us to refrain from setting liquor; in all +else he bowed to the accomplished fact, refused rent, retired across +the way into a native house, and, plying in his boat, beat the remotest +quarters of the isle for provender. He found us pigs - I could +not fancy where - no other pigs were visible; he brought us fowls and +taro; when we gave our feast to the monarch and gentry, it was he who +supplied the wherewithal, he who superintended the cooking, he who asked +grace at table, and when the king’s health was proposed, he also +started the cheering with an English hip-hip-hip. There was never +a more fortunate conception; the heart of the fatted king exulted in +his bosom at the sound.<br> +<br> +Take him for all in all, I have never known a more engaging creature +than this parson of Butaritari: his mirth, his kindness, his noble, +friendly feelings, brimmed from the man in speech and gesture. +He loved to exaggerate, to act and overact the momentary part, to exercise +his lungs and muscles, and to speak and laugh with his whole body. +He had the morning cheerfulness of birds and healthy children; and his +humour was infectious. We were next neighbours and met daily, +yet our salutations lasted minutes at a stretch - shaking hands, slapping +shoulders, capering like a pair of Merry-Andrews, laughing to split +our sides upon some pleasantry that would scarce raise a titter in an +infant-school. It might be five in the morning, the toddy-cutters +just gone by, the road empty, the shade of the island lying far on the +lagoon: and the ebullition cheered me for the day.<br> +<br> +Yet I always suspected Maka of a secret melancholy - these jubilant +extremes could scarce be constantly maintained. He was besides +long, and lean, and lined, and corded, and a trifle grizzled; and his +Sabbath countenance was even saturnine. On that day we made a +procession to the church, or (as I must always call it) the cathedral: +Maka (a blot on the hot landscape) in tall hat, black frock-coat, black +trousers; under his arm the hymn-book and the Bible; in his face, a +reverent gravity:- beside him Mary his wife, a quiet, wise, and handsome +elderly lady, seriously attired:- myself following with singular and +moving thoughts. Long before, to the sound of bells and streams +and birds, through a green Lothian glen, I had accompanied Sunday by +Sunday a minister in whose house I lodged; and the likeness, and the +difference, and the series of years and deaths, profoundly touched me. +In the great, dusky, palm-tree cathedral the congregation rarely numbered +thirty: the men on one side, the women on the other, myself posted (for +a privilege) amongst the women, and the small missionary contingent +gathered close around the platform, we were lost in that round vault. +The lessons were read antiphonally, the flock was catechised, a blind +youth repeated weekly a long string of psalms, hymns were sung - I never +heard worse singing, - and the sermon followed. To say I understood +nothing were untrue; there were points that I learned to expect with +certainty; the name of Honolulu, that of Kalakaua, the word Cap’n-man-o’-wa’, +the word ship, and a description of a storm at sea, infallibly occurred; +and I was not seldom rewarded with the name of my own Sovereign in the +bargain. The rest was but sound to the ears, silence for the mind: +a plain expanse of tedium, rendered unbearable by heat, a hard chair, +and the sight through the wide doors of the more happy heathen on the +green. Sleep breathed on my joints and eyelids, sleep hummed in +my ears; it reigned in the dim cathedral. The congregation stirred +and stretched; they moaned, they groaned aloud; they yawned upon a singing +note, as you may sometimes hear a dog when he has reached the tragic +bitterest of boredom. In vain the preacher thumped the table; +in vain he singled and addressed by name particular hearers. I +was myself perhaps a more effective excitant; and at least to one old +gentleman the spectacle of my successful struggles against sleep - and +I hope they were successful - cheered the flight of time. He, +when he was not catching flies or playing tricks upon his neighbours, +gloated with a fixed, truculent eye upon the stages of my agony; and +once, when the service was drawing towards a close, he winked at me +across the church.<br> +<br> +I write of the service with a smile; yet I was always there - always +with respect for Maka, always with admiration for his deep seriousness, +his burning energy, the fire of his roused eye, the sincere and various +accents of his voice. To see him weekly flogging a dead horse +and blowing a cold fire was a lesson in fortitude and constancy. +It may be a question whether if the mission were fully supported, and +he was set free from business avocations, more might not result; I think +otherwise myself; I think not neglect but rigour has reduced his flock, +that rigour which has once provoked a revolution, and which to-day, +in a man so lively and engaging, amazes the beholder. No song, +no dance, no tobacco, no liquor, no alleviative of life - only toil +and church-going; so says a voice from his face; and the face is the +face of the Polynesian Esau, but the voice is the voice of a Jacob from +a different world. And a Polynesian at the best makes a singular +missionary in the Gilberts, coming from a country recklessly unchaste +to one conspicuously strict; from a race hag-ridden with bogies to one +comparatively bold against the terrors of the dark. The thought +was stamped one morning in my mind, when I chanced to be abroad by moonlight, +and saw all the town lightless, but the lamp faithfully burning by the +missionary’s bed. It requires no law, no fire, and no scouting +police, to withhold Maka and his countrymen from wandering in the night +unlighted.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER IV - A TALE OF A TAPU<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +On the morrow of our arrival (Sunday, 14th July 1889) our photographers +were early stirring. Once more we traversed a silent town; many +were yet abed and asleep; some sat drowsily in their open houses; there +was no sound of intercourse or business. In that hour before the +shadows, the quarter of the palace and canal seemed like a landing-place +in the <i>Arabian Nights</i> or from the classic poets; here were the +fit destination of some ‘faery frigot,’ here some adventurous +prince might step ashore among new characters and incidents; and the +island prison, where it floated on the luminous face of the lagoon, +might have passed for the repository of the Grail. In such a scene, +and at such an hour, the impression received was not so much of foreign +travel - rather of past ages; it seemed not so much degrees of latitude +that we had crossed, as centuries of time that we had re-ascended; leaving, +by the same steps, home and to-day. A few children followed us, +mostly nude, all silent; in the clear, weedy waters of the canal some +silent damsels waded, baring their brown thighs; and to one of the maniap’s +before the palace gate we were attracted by a low but stirring hum of +speech.<br> +<br> +The oval shed was full of men sitting cross-legged. The king was +there in striped pyjamas, his rear protected by four guards with Winchesters, +his air and bearing marked by unwonted spirit and decision; tumblers +and black bottles went the round; and the talk, throughout loud, was +general and animated. I was inclined at first to view this scene +with suspicion. But the hour appeared unsuitable for a carouse; +drink was besides forbidden equally by the law of the land and the canons +of the church; and while I was yet hesitating, the king’s rigorous +attitude disposed of my last doubt. We had come, thinking to photograph +him surrounded by his guards, and at the first word of the design his +piety revolted. We were reminded of the day - the Sabbath, in +which thou shalt take no photographs - and returned with a flea in our +ear, bearing the rejected camera.<br> +<br> +At church, a little later, I was struck to find the throne unoccupied. +So nice a Sabbatarian might have found the means to be present; perhaps +my doubts revived; and before I got home they were transformed to certainties. +Tom, the bar-keeper of the <i>Sans Souci</i>, was in conversation with +two emissaries from the court. The ‘keen,’ they said, +wanted ‘din,’ failing which ‘perandi.’ +No din, was Tom’s reply, and no perandi; but ‘pira’ +if they pleased. It seems they had no use for beer, and departed +sorrowing.<br> +<br> +‘Why, what is the meaning of all this?’ I asked. ‘Is +the island on the spree?’<br> +<br> +Such was the fact. On the 4th of July a feast had been made, and +the king, at the suggestion of the whites, had raised the tapu against +liquor. There is a proverb about horses; it scarce applies to +the superior animal, of whom it may be rather said, that any one can +start him drinking, not any twenty can prevail on him to stop. +The tapu, raised ten days before, was not yet re-imposed; for ten days +the town had been passing the bottle or lying (as we had seen it the +afternoon before) in hoggish sleep; and the king, moved by the Old Men +and his own appetites, continued to maintain the liberty, to squander +his savings on liquor, and to join in and lead the debauch. The +whites were the authors of this crisis; it was upon their own proposal +that the freedom had been granted at the first; and for a while, in +the interests of trade, they were doubtless pleased it should continue. +That pleasure had now sometime ceased; the bout had been prolonged (it +was conceded) unduly; and it now began to be a question how it might +conclude. Hence Tom’s refusal. Yet that refusal was +avowedly only for the moment, and it was avowedly unavailing; the king’s +foragers, denied by Tom at the <i>Sans Souci</i>, would be supplied +at <i>The Land we Live in</i> by the gobbling Mr. Williams.<br> +<br> +The degree of the peril was not easy to measure at the time, and I am +inclined to think now it was easy to exaggerate. Yet the conduct +of drunkards even at home is always matter for anxiety; and at home +our populations are not armed from the highest to the lowest with revolvers +and repeating rifles, neither do we go on a debauch by the whole townful +- and I might rather say, by the whole polity - king, magistrates, police, +and army joining in one common scene of drunkenness. It must be +thought besides that we were here in barbarous islands, rarely visited, +lately and partly civilised. First and last, a really considerable +number of whites have perished in the Gilberts, chiefly through their +own misconduct; and the natives have displayed in at least one instance +a disposition to conceal an accident under a butchery, and leave nothing +but dumb bones. This last was the chief consideration against +a sudden closing of the bars; the bar-keepers stood in the immediate +breach and dealt direct with madmen; too surly a refusal might at any +moment precipitate a blow, and the blow might prove the signal for a +massacre.<br> +<br> +<i>Monday</i>, 15th. - At the same hour we returned to the same muniap’. +Kümmel (of all drinks) was served in tumblers; in the midst sat +the crown prince, a fatted youth, surrounded by fresh bottles and busily +plying the corkscrew; and king, chief, and commons showed the loose +mouth, the uncertain joints, and the blurred and animated eye of the +early drinker. It was plain we were impatiently expected; the +king retired with alacrity to dress, the guards were despatched after +their uniforms; and we were left to await the issue of these preparations +with a shedful of tipsy natives. The orgie had proceeded further +than on Sunday. The day promised to be of great heat; it was already +sultry, the courtiers were already fuddled; and still the kümmel +continued to go round, and the crown prince to play butler. Flemish +freedom followed upon Flemish excess; and a funny dog, a handsome fellow, +gaily dressed, and with a full turban of frizzed hair, delighted the +company with a humorous courtship of a lady in a manner not to be described. +It was our diversion, in this time of waiting, to observe the gathering +of the guards. They have European arms, European uniforms, and +(to their sorrow) European shoes. We saw one warrior (like Mars) +in the article of being armed; two men and a stalwart woman were scarce +strong enough to boot him; and after a single appearance on parade the +army is crippled for a week.<br> +<br> +At last, the gates under the king’s house opened; the army issued, +one behind another, with guns and epaulettes; the colours stooped under +the gateway; majesty followed in his uniform bedizened with gold lace; +majesty’s wife came next in a hat and feathers, and an ample trained +silk gown; the royal imps succeeded; there stood the pageantry of Makin +marshalled on its chosen theatre. Dickens might have told how +serious they were; how tipsy; how the king melted and streamed under +his cocked hat; how he took station by the larger of his two cannons +- austere, majestic, but not truly vertical; how the troops huddled, +and were straightened out, and clubbed again; how they and their firelocks +raked at various inclinations like the masts of ships; and how an amateur +photographer reviewed, arrayed, and adjusted them, to see his dispositions +change before he reached the camera.<br> +<br> +The business was funny to see; I do not know that it is graceful to +laugh at; and our report of these transactions was received on our return +with the shaking of grave heads.<br> +<br> +The day had begun ill; eleven hours divided us from sunset; and at any +moment, on the most trifling chance, the trouble might begin. +The Wightman compound was in a military sense untenable, commanded on +three sides by houses and thick bush; the town was computed to contain +over a thousand stand of excellent new arms; and retreat to the ships, +in the case of an alert, was a recourse not to be thought of. +Our talk that morning must have closely reproduced the talk in English +garrisons before the Sepoy mutiny; the sturdy doubt that any mischief +was in prospect, the sure belief that (should any come) there was nothing +left but to go down fighting, the half-amused, half-anxious attitude +of mind in which we were awaiting fresh developments.<br> +<br> +The kümmel soon ran out; we were scarce returned before the king +had followed us in quest of more. Mr. Corpse was now divested +of his more awful attitude, the lawless bulk of him again encased in +striped pyjamas; a guardsman brought up the rear with his rifle at the +trail: and his majesty was further accompanied by a Rarotongan whalerman +and the playful courtier with the turban of frizzed hair. There +was never a more lively deputation. The whalerman was gapingly, +tearfully tipsy: the courtier walked on air; the king himself was even +sportive. Seated in a chair in the Ricks’ sitting-room, +he bore the brunt of our prayers and menaces unmoved. He was even +rated, plied with historic instances, threatened with the men-of-war, +ordered to restore the tapu on the spot - and nothing in the least affected +him. It should be done to-morrow, he said; to-day it was beyond +his power, to-day he durst not. ‘Is that royal?’ cried +indignant Mr. Rick. No, it was not royal; had the king been of +a royal character we should ourselves have held a different language; +and royal or not, he had the best of the dispute. The terms indeed +were hardly equal; for the king was the only man who could restore the +tapu, but the Ricks were not the only people who sold drink. He +had but to hold his ground on the first question, and they were sure +to weaken on the second. A little struggle they still made for +the fashion’s sake; and then one exceedingly tipsy deputation +departed, greatly rejoicing, a case of brandy wheeling beside them in +a barrow. The Rarotongan (whom I had never seen before) wrung +me by the hand like a man bound on a far voyage. ‘My dear +frien’!’ he cried, ‘good-bye, my dear frien’!’ +- tears of kümmel standing in his eyes; the king lurched as he +went, the courtier ambled, - a strange party of intoxicated children +to be entrusted with that barrowful of madness.<br> +<br> +You could never say the town was quiet; all morning there was a ferment +in the air, an aimless movement and congregation of natives in the street. +But it was not before half-past one that a sudden hubbub of voices called +us from the house, to find the whole white colony already gathered on +the spot as by concerted signal. The <i>Sans Souci</i> was overrun +with rabble, the stair and verandah thronged. From all these throats +an inarticulate babbling cry went up incessantly; it sounded like the +bleating of young lambs, but angrier. In the road his royal highness +(whom I had seen so lately in the part of butler) stood crying upon +Tom; on the top step, tossed in the hurly-burly, Tom was shouting to +the prince. Yet a while the pack swayed about the bar, vociferous. +Then came a brutal impulse; the mob reeled, and returned, and was rejected; +the stair showed a stream of heads; and there shot into view, through +the disbanding ranks, three men violently dragging in their midst a +fourth. By his hair and his hands, his head forced as low as his +knees, his face concealed, he was wrenched from the verandah and whisked +along the road into the village, howling as he disappeared. Had +his face been raised, we should have seen it bloodied, and the blood +was not his own. The courtier with the turban of frizzed hair +had paid the costs of this disturbance with the lower part of one ear.<br> +<br> +So the brawl passed with no other casualty than might seem comic to +the inhumane. Yet we looked round on serious faces and - a fact +that spoke volumes - Tom was putting up the shutters on the bar. +Custom might go elsewhere, Mr. Williams might profit as he pleased, +but Tom had had enough of bar-keeping for that day. Indeed the +event had hung on a hair. A man had sought to draw a revolver +- on what quarrel I could never learn, and perhaps he himself could +not have told; one shot, when the room was so crowded, could scarce +have failed to take effect; where many were armed and all tipsy, it +could scarce have failed to draw others; and the woman who spied the +weapon and the man who seized it may very well have saved the white +community.<br> +<br> +The mob insensibly melted from the scene; and for the rest of the day +our neighbourhood was left in peace and a good deal in solitude. +But the tranquillity was only local; <i>din</i> and<i> perandi</i> still +flowed in other quarters: and we had one more sight of Gilbert Island +violence. In the church, where we had wandered photographing, +we were startled by a sudden piercing outcry. The scene, looking +forth from the doors of that great hall of shadow, was unforgettable. +The palms, the quaint and scattered houses, the flag of the island streaming +from its tall staff, glowed with intolerable sunshine. In the +midst two women rolled fighting on the grass. The combatants were +the more easy to be distinguished, because the one was stripped to the +<i>ridi</i> and the other wore a holoku (sacque) of some lively colour. +The first was uppermost, her teeth locked in her adversary’s face, +shaking her like a dog; the other impotently fought and scratched. +So for a moment we saw them wallow and grapple there like vermin; then +the mob closed and shut them in.<br> +<br> +It was a serious question that night if we should sleep ashore. +But we were travellers, folk that had come far in quest of the adventurous; +on the first sign of an adventure it would have been a singular inconsistency +to have withdrawn; and we sent on board instead for our revolvers. +Mindful of Taahauku, Mr. Rick, Mr. Osbourne, and Mrs. Stevenson held +an assault of arms on the public highway, and fired at bottles to the +admiration of the natives. Captain Reid of the <i>Equator</i> +stayed on shore with us to be at hand in case of trouble, and we retired +to bed at the accustomed hour, agreeably excited by the day’s +events. The night was exquisite, the silence enchanting; yet as +I lay in my hammock looking on the strong moonshine and the quiescent +palms, one ugly picture haunted me of the two women, the naked and the +clad, locked in that hostile embrace. The harm done was probably +not much, yet I could have looked on death and massacre with less revolt. +The return to these primeval weapons, the vision of man’s beastliness, +of his ferality, shocked in me a deeper sense than that with which we +count the cost of battles. There are elements in our state and +history which it is a pleasure to forget, which it is perhaps the better +wisdom not to dwell on. Crime, pestilence, and death are in the +day’s work; the imagination readily accepts them. It instinctively +rejects, on the contrary, whatever shall call up the image of our race +upon its lowest terms, as the partner of beasts, beastly itself, dwelling +pell-mell and hugger-mugger, hairy man with hairy woman, in the caves +of old. And yet to be just to barbarous islanders we must not +forget the slums and dens of our cities; I must not forget that I have +passed dinnerward through Soho, and seen that which cured me of my dinner.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER V - A TALE OF A TAPU - <i>continued<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +Tuesday, July</i> 16. - It rained in the night, sudden and loud, in +Gilbert Island fashion. Before the day, the crowing of a cock +aroused me and I wandered in the compound and along the street. +The squall was blown by, the moon shone with incomparable lustre, the +air lay dead as in a room, and yet all the isle sounded as under a strong +shower, the eaves thickly pattering, the lofty palms dripping at larger +intervals and with a louder note. In this bold nocturnal light +the interior of the houses lay inscrutable, one lump of blackness, save +when the moon glinted under the roof, and made a belt of silver, and +drew the slanting shadows of the pillars on the floor. Nowhere +in all the town was any lamp or ember; not a creature stirred; I thought +I was alone to be awake; but the police were faithful to their duty; +secretly vigilant, keeping account of time; and a little later, the +watchman struck slowly and repeatedly on the cathedral bell; four o’clock, +the warning signal. It seemed strange that, in a town resigned +to drunkenness and tumult, curfew and réveille should still be +sounded and still obeyed.<br> +<br> +The day came, and brought little change. The place still lay silent; +the people slept, the town slept. Even the few who were awake, +mostly women and children, held their peace and kept within under the +strong shadow of the thatch, where you must stop and peer to see them. +Through the deserted streets, and past the sleeping houses, a deputation +took its way at an early hour to the palace; the king was suddenly awakened, +and must listen (probably with a headache) to unpalatable truths. +Mrs. Rick, being a sufficient mistress of that difficult tongue, was +spokeswoman; she explained to the sick monarch that I was an intimate +personal friend of Queen Victoria’s; that immediately on my return +I should make her a report upon Butaritari; and that if my house should +have been again invaded by natives, a man-of-war would be despatched +to make reprisals. It was scarce the fact - rather a just and +necessary parable of the fact, corrected for latitude; and it certainly +told upon the king. He was much affected; he had conceived the +notion (he said) that I was a man of some importance, but not dreamed +it was as bad as this; and the missionary house was tapu’d under +a fine of fifty dollars.<br> +<br> +So much was announced on the return of the deputation; not any more; +and I gathered subsequently that much more had passed. The protection +gained was welcome. It had been the most annoying and not the +least alarming feature of the day before, that our house was periodically +filled with tipsy natives, twenty or thirty at a time, begging drink, +fingering our goods, hard to be dislodged, awkward to quarrel with. +Queen Victoria’s friend (who was soon promoted to be her son) +was free from these intrusions. Not only my house, but my neighbourhood +as well, was left in peace; even on our walks abroad we were guarded +and prepared for; and, like great persons visiting a hospital, saw only +the fair side. For the matter of a week we were thus suffered +to go out and in and live in a fool’s paradise, supposing the +king to have kept his word, the tapu to be revived and the island once +more sober.<br> +<br> +<i>Tuesday, July</i> 23. - We dined under a bare trellis erected for +the Fourth of July; and here we used to linger by lamplight over coffee +and tobacco. In that climate evening approaches without sensible +chill; the wind dies out before sunset; heaven glows a while and fades, +and darkens into the blueness of the tropical night; swiftly and insensibly +the shadows thicken, the stars multiply their number; you look around +you and the day is gone. It was then that we would see our Chinaman +draw near across the compound in a lurching sphere of light, divided +by his shadows; and with the coming of the lamp the night closed about +the table. The faces of the company, the spars of the trellis, +stood out suddenly bright on a ground of blue and silver, faintly designed +with palm-tops and the peaked roofs of houses. Here and there +the gloss upon a leaf, or the fracture of a stone, returned an isolated +sparkle. All else had vanished. We hung there, illuminated +like a galaxy of stars <i>in</i> <i>vacuo</i>; we sat, manifest and +blind, amid the general ambush of the darkness; and the islanders, passing +with light footfalls and low voices in the sand of the road, lingered +to observe us, unseen.<br> +<br> +On Tuesday the dusk had fallen, the lamp had just been brought, when +a missile struck the table with a rattling smack and rebounded past +my ear. Three inches to one side and this page had never been +written; for the thing travelled like a cannon ball. It was supposed +at the time to be a nut, though even at the time I thought it seemed +a small one and fell strangely.<br> +<br> +<i>Wednesday, July</i> 24. - The dusk had fallen once more, and the +lamp been just brought out, when the same business was repeated. +And again the missile whistled past my ear. One nut I had been +willing to accept; a second, I rejected utterly. A cocoa-nut does +not come slinging along on a windless evening, making an angle of about +fifteen degrees with the horizon; cocoa-nuts do not fall on successive +nights at the same hour and spot; in both cases, besides, a specific +moment seemed to have been chosen, that when the lamp was just carried +out, a specific person threatened, and that the head of the family. +I may have been right or wrong, but I believed I was the mark of some +intimidation; believed the missile was a stone, aimed not to hit, but +to frighten.<br> +<br> +No idea makes a man more angry. I ran into the road, where the +natives were as usual promenading in the dark; Maka joined me with a +lantern; and I ran from one to another, glared in quite innocent faces, +put useless questions, and proffered idle threats. Thence I carried +my wrath (which was worthy the son of any queen in history) to the Ricks. +They heard me with depression, assured me this trick of throwing a stone +into a family dinner was not new; that it meant mischief, and was of +a piece with the alarming disposition of the natives. And then +the truth, so long concealed from us, came out. The king had broken +his promise, he had defied the deputation; the tapu was still dormant, +<i>The Land we Live in</i> still selling drink, and that quarter of +the town disturbed and menaced by perpetual broils. But there +was worse ahead: a feast was now preparing for the birthday of the little +princess; and the tributary chiefs of Kuma and Little Makin were expected +daily. Strong in a following of numerous and somewhat savage clansmen, +each of these was believed, like a Douglas of old, to be of doubtful +loyalty. Kuma (a little pot-bellied fellow) never visited the +palace, never entered the town, but sat on the beach on a mat, his gun +across his knees, parading his mistrust and scorn; Karaiti of Makin, +although he was more bold, was not supposed to be more friendly; and +not only were these vassals jealous of the throne, but the followers +on either side shared in the animosity. Brawls had already taken +place; blows had passed which might at any moment be repaid in blood. +Some of the strangers were already here and already drinking; if the +debauch continued after the bulk of them had come, a collision, perhaps +a revolution, was to be expected.<br> +<br> +The sale of drink is in this group a measure of the jealousy of traders; +one begins, the others are constrained to follow; and to him who has +the most gin, and sells it the most recklessly, the lion’s share +of copra is assured. It is felt by all to be an extreme expedient, +neither safe, decent, nor dignified. A trader on Tarawa, heated +by an eager rivalry, brought many cases of gin. He told me he +sat afterwards day and night in his house till it was finished, not +daring to arrest the sale, not venturing to go forth, the bush all round +him filled with howling drunkards. At night, above all, when he +was afraid to sleep, and heard shots and voices about him in the darkness, +his remorse was black.<br> +<br> +‘My God!’ he reflected, ‘if I was to lose my life +on such a wretched business!’ Often and often, in the story +of the Gilberts, this scene has been repeated; and the remorseful trader +sat beside his lamp, longing for the day, listening with agony for the +sound of murder, registering resolutions for the future. For the +business is easy to begin, but hazardous to stop. The natives +are in their way a just and law-abiding people, mindful of their debts, +docile to the voice of their own institutions; when the tapu is re-enforced +they will cease drinking; but the white who seeks to antedate the movement +by refusing liquor does so at his peril.<br> +<br> +Hence, in some degree, the anxiety and helplessness of Mr. Rick. +He and Tom, alarmed by the rabblement of the <i>Sans Souci</i>, had +stopped the sale; they had done so without danger, because <i>The Land +we Live in</i> still continued selling; it was claimed, besides, that +they had been the first to begin. What step could be taken? +Could Mr. Rick visit Mr. Muller (with whom he was not on terms) and +address him thus: ‘I was getting ahead of you, now you are getting +ahead of me, and I ask you to forego your profit. I got my place +closed in safety, thanks to your continuing; but now I think you have +continued long enough. I begin to be alarmed; and because I am +afraid I ask you to confront a certain danger’? It was not +to be thought of. Something else had to be found; and there was +one person at one end of the town who was at least not interested in +copra. There was little else to be said in favour of myself as +an ambassador. I had arrived in the Wightman schooner, I was living +in the Wightman compound, I was the daily associate of the Wightman +coterie. It was egregious enough that I should now intrude unasked +in the private affairs of Crawford’s agent, and press upon him +the sacrifice of his interests and the venture of his life. But +bad as I might be, there was none better; since the affair of the stone +I was, besides, sharp-set to be doing, the idea of a delicate interview +attracted me, and I thought it policy to show myself abroad.<br> +<br> +The night was very dark. There was service in the church, and +the building glimmered through all its crevices like a dim Kirk Allowa’. +I saw few other lights, but was indistinctly aware of many people stirring +in the darkness, and a hum and sputter of low talk that sounded stealthy. +I believe (in the old phrase) my beard was sometimes on my shoulder +as I went. Muller’s was but partly lighted, and quite silent, +and the gate was fastened. I could by no means manage to undo +the latch. No wonder, since I found it afterwards to be four or +five feet long - a fortification in itself. As I still fumbled, +a dog came on the inside and sniffed suspiciously at my hands, so that +I was reduced to calling ‘House ahoy!’ Mr. Muller +came down and put his chin across the paling in the dark. ‘Who +is that?’ said he, like one who has no mind to welcome strangers.<br> +<br> +‘My name is Stevenson,’ said I.<br> +<br> +‘O, Mr. Stevens! I didn’t know you. Come inside.’ +We stepped into the dark store, when I leaned upon the counter and he +against the wall. All the light came from the sleeping-room, where +I saw his family being put to bed; it struck full in my face, but Mr. +Muller stood in shadow. No doubt he expected what was Coming, +and sought the advantage of position; but for a man who wished to persuade +and had nothing to conceal, mine was the preferable.<br> +<br> +‘Look here,’ I began, ‘I hear you are selling to the +natives.’<br> +<br> +‘Others have done that before me,’ he returned pointedly.<br> +<br> +‘No doubt,’ said I, ‘and I have nothing to do with +the past, but the future. I want you to promise you will handle +these spirits carefully.’<br> +<br> +‘Now what is your motive in this?’ he asked, and then, with +a sneer, ‘Are you afraid of your life?’<br> +<br> +‘That is nothing to the purpose,’ I replied. ‘I +know, and you know, these spirits ought not to be used at all.’<br> +<br> +‘Tom and Mr. Rick have sold them before.’<br> +<br> +‘I have nothing to do with Tom and Mr. Rick. All I know +is I have heard them both refuse.’<br> +<br> +‘No, I suppose you have nothing to do with them. Then you +are just afraid of your life.’<br> +<br> +‘Come now,’ I cried, being perhaps a little stung, ‘you +know in your heart I am asking a reasonable thing. I don’t +ask you to lose your profit - though I would prefer to see no spirits +brought here, as you would - ’<br> +<br> +‘I don’t say I wouldn’t. I didn’t begin +this,’ he interjected.<br> +<br> +‘No, I don’t suppose you did,’ said I. ‘And +I don’t ask you to lose; I ask you to give me your word, man to +man, that you will make no native drunk.’<br> +<br> +Up to now Mr. Muller had maintained an attitude very trying to my temper; +but he had maintained it with difficulty, his sentiment being all upon +my side; and here he changed ground for the worse. ‘It isn’t +me that sells,’ said he.<br> +<br> +‘No, it’s that nigger,’ I agreed. ‘But +he’s yours to buy and sell; you have your hand on the nape of +his neck; and I ask you - I have my wife here - to use the authority +you have.’<br> +<br> +He hastily returned to his old ward. ‘I don’t deny +I could if I wanted,’ said he. ‘But there’s +no danger, the natives are all quiet. You’re just afraid +of your life.’<br> +<br> +I do not like to be called a coward, even by implication; and here I +lost my temper and propounded an untimely ultimatum. ‘You +had better put it plain,’ I cried. ‘Do you mean to +refuse me what I ask?’<br> +<br> +‘I don’t want either to refuse it or grant it,’ he +replied.<br> +<br> +‘You’ll find you have to do the one thing or the other, +and right now!’ I cried, and then, striking into a happier vein, +‘Come,’ said I, ‘you’re a better sort than that. +I see what’s wrong with you - you think I came from the opposite +camp. I see the sort of man you are, and you know that what I +ask is right.’<br> +<br> +Again he changed ground. ‘If the natives get any drink, +it isn’t safe to stop them,’ he objected.<br> +<br> +‘I’ll be answerable for the bar,’ I said. ‘We +are three men and four revolvers; we’ll come at a word, and hold +the place against the village.’<br> +<br> +‘You don’t know what you’re talking about; it’s +too dangerous!’ he cried.<br> +<br> +‘Look here,’ said I, ‘I don’t mind much about +losing that life you talk so much of; but I mean to lose it the way +I want to, and that is, putting a stop to all this beastliness.’<br> +<br> +He talked a while about his duty to the firm; I minded not at all, I +was secure of victory. He was but waiting to capitulate, and looked +about for any potent to relieve the strain. In the gush of light +from the bedroom door I spied a cigar-holder on the desk. ‘That +is well coloured,’ said I.<br> +<br> +‘Will you take a cigar?’ said he.<br> +<br> +I took it and held it up unlighted. ‘Now,’ said I, +‘you promise me.’<br> +<br> +‘I promise you you won’t have any trouble from natives that +have drunk at my place,’ he replied.<br> +<br> +‘That is all I ask,’ said I, and showed it was not by immediately +offering to try his stock.<br> +<br> +So far as it was anyway critical our interview here ended. Mr. +Muller had thenceforth ceased to regard me as an emissary from his rivals, +dropped his defensive attitude, and spoke as he believed. I could +make out that he would already, had he dared, have stopped the sale +himself. Not quite daring, it may be imagined how he resented +the idea of interference from those who had (by his own statement) first +led him on, then deserted him in the breach, and now (sitting themselves +in safety) egged him on to a new peril, which was all gain to them, +all loss to him! I asked him what he thought of the danger from +the feast.<br> +<br> +‘I think worse of it than any of you,’ he answered. +‘They were shooting around here last night, and I heard the balls +too. I said to myself, “That’s bad.” What +gets me is why you should be making this row up at your end. I +should be the first to go.’<br> +<br> +It was a thoughtless wonder. The consolation of being second is +not great; the fact, not the order of going - there was our concern.<br> +<br> +Scott talks moderately of looking forward to a time of fighting ‘with +a feeling that resembled pleasure.’ The resemblance seems +rather an identity. In modern life, contact is ended; man grows +impatient of endless manoeuvres; and to approach the fact, to find ourselves +where we can push an advantage home, and stand a fair risk, and see +at last what we are made of, stirs the blood. It was so at least +with all my family, who bubbled with delight at the approach of trouble; +and we sat deep into the night like a pack of schoolboys, preparing +the revolvers and arranging plans against the morrow. It promised +certainly to be a busy and eventful day. The Old Men were to be +summoned to confront me on the question of the tapu; Muller might call +us at any moment to garrison his bar; and suppose Muller to fail, we +decided in a family council to take that matter into our own hands, +<i>The Land we Live</i> <i>in</i> at the pistol’s mouth, and with +the polysyllabic Williams, dance to a new tune. As I recall our +humour I think it would have gone hard with the mulatto.<br> +<br> +<i>Wednesday</i>, <i>July</i> 24. - It was as well, and yet it was disappointing +that these thunder-clouds rolled off in silence. Whether the Old +Men recoiled from an interview with Queen Victoria’s son, whether +Muller had secretly intervened, or whether the step flowed naturally +from the fears of the king and the nearness of the feast, the tapu was +early that morning re-enforced; not a day too soon, from the manner +the boats began to arrive thickly, and the town was filled with the +big rowdy vassals of Karaiti.<br> +<br> +The effect lingered for some time on the minds of the traders; it was +with the approval of all present that I helped to draw up a petition +to the United States, praying for a law against the liquor trade in +the Gilberts; and it was at this request that I added, under my own +name, a brief testimony of what had passed; - useless pains; since the +whole reposes, probably unread and possibly unopened, in a pigeon-hole +at Washington.<br> +<br> +<i>Sunday, July</i> 28. - This day we had the afterpiece of the debauch. +The king and queen, in European clothes, and followed by armed guards, +attended church for the first time, and sat perched aloft in a precarious +dignity under the barrel-hoops. Before sermon his majesty clambered +from the dais, stood lopsidedly upon the gravel floor, and in a few +words abjured drinking. The queen followed suit with a yet briefer +allocution. All the men in church were next addressed in turn; +each held up his right hand, and the affair was over - throne and church +were reconciled.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER VI - THE FIVE DAYS’ FESTIVAL<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +<i>Thursday, July</i> 25. - The street was this day much enlivened by +the presence of the men from Little Makin; they average taller than +Butaritarians, and being on a holiday, went wreathed with yellow leaves +and gorgeous in vivid colours. They are said to be more savage, +and to be proud of the distinction. Indeed, it seemed to us they +swaggered in the town, like plaided Highlanders upon the streets of +Inverness, conscious of barbaric virtues.<br> +<br> +In the afternoon the summer parlour was observed to be packed with people; +others standing outside and stooping to peer under the eaves, like children +at home about a circus. It was the Makin company, rehearsing for +the day of competition. Karaiti sat in the front row close to +the singers, where we were summoned (I suppose in honour of Queen Victoria) +to join him. A strong breathless heat reigned under the iron roof, +and the air was heavy with the scent of wreaths. The singers, +with fine mats about their loins, cocoa-nut feathers set in rings upon +their fingers, and their heads crowned with yellow leaves, sat on the +floor by companies. A varying number of soloists stood up for +different songs; and these bore the chief part in the music. But +the full force of the companies, even when not singing, contributed +continuously to the effect, and marked the ictus of the measure, mimicking, +grimacing, casting up their heads and eyes, fluttering the feathers +on their fingers, clapping hands, or beating (loud as a kettledrum) +on the left breast; the time was exquisite, the music barbarous, but +full of conscious art. I noted some devices constantly employed. +A sudden change would be introduced (I think of key) with no break of +the measure, but emphasised by a sudden dramatic heightening of the +voice and a swinging, general gesticulation. The voices of the +soloists would begin far apart in a rude discord, and gradually draw +together to a unison; which, when, they had reached, they were joined +and drowned by the full chorus. The ordinary, hurried, barking +unmelodious movement of the voices would at times be broken and glorified +by a psalm-like strain of melody, often well constructed, or seeming +so by contrast. There was much variety of measure, and towards +the end of each piece, when the fun became fast and furious, a recourse +to this figure -<br> +<br> +[Musical notation which cannot be produced. It means two/four +time with quaver, quaver, crotchet repeated for three bars.]<br> +<br> +It is difficult to conceive what fire and devilry they get into these +hammering finales; all go together, voices, hands, eyes, leaves, and +fluttering finger-rings; the chorus swings to the eye, the song throbs +on the ear; the faces are convulsed with enthusiasm and effort.<br> +<br> +Presently the troop stood up in a body, the drums forming a half-circle +for the soloists, who were sometimes five or even more in number. +The songs that followed were highly dramatic; though I had none to give +me any explanation, I would at times make out some shadowy but decisive +outline of a plot; and I was continually reminded of certain quarrelsome +concerted scenes in grand operas at home; just so the single voices +issue from and fall again into the general volume; just so do the performers +separate and crowd together, brandish the raised hand, and roll the +eye to heaven - or the gallery. Already this is beyond the Thespian +model; the art of this people is already past the embryo: song, dance, +drums, quartette and solo - it is the drama full developed although +still in miniature. Of all so-called dancing in the South Seas, +that which I saw in Butaritari stands easily the first. The <i>hula</i>, +as it may be viewed by the speedy globe-trotter in Honolulu, is surely +the most dull of man’s inventions, and the spectator yawns under +its length as at a college lecture or a parliamentary debate. +But the Gilbert Island dance leads on the mind; it thrills, rouses, +subjugates; it has the essence of all art, an unexplored imminent significance. +Where so many are engaged, and where all must make (at a given moment) +the same swift, elaborate, and often arbitrary movement, the toil of +rehearsal is of course extreme. But they begin as children. +A child and a man may often be seen together in a maniap’: the +man sings and gesticulates, the child stands before him with streaming +tears and tremulously copies him in act and sound; it is the Gilbert +Island artist learning (as all artists must) his art in sorrow.<br> +<br> +I may seem to praise too much; here is a passage from my wife’s +diary, which proves that I was not alone in being moved, and completes +the picture:- ‘The conductor gave the cue, and all the dancers, +waving their arms, swaying their bodies, and clapping their breasts +in perfect time, opened with an introductory. The performers remained +seated, except two, and once three, and twice a single soloist. +These stood in the group, making a slight movement with the feet and +rhythmical quiver of the body as they sang. There was a pause +after the introductory, and then the real business of the opera - for +it was no less - began; an opera where every singer was an accomplished +actor. The leading man, in an impassioned ecstasy which possessed +him from head to foot, seemed transfigured; once it was as though a +strong wind had swept over the stage - their arms, their feathered fingers +thrilling with an emotion that shook my nerves as well: heads and bodies +followed like a field of grain before a gust. My blood came hot +and cold, tears pricked my eyes, my head whirled, I felt an almost irresistible +impulse to join the dancers. One drama, I think, I very nearly +understood. A fierce and savage old man took the solo part. +He sang of the birth of a prince, and how he was tenderly rocked in +his mother’s arms; of his boyhood, when he excelled his fellows +in swimming, climbing, and all athletic sports; of his youth, when he +went out to sea with his boat and fished; of his manhood, when he married +a wife who cradled a son of his own in her arms. Then came the +alarm of war, and a great battle, of which for a time the issue was +doubtful; but the hero conquered, as he always does, and with a tremendous +burst of the victors the piece closed. There were also comic pieces, +which caused great amusement. During one, an old man behind me +clutched me by the arm, shook his finger in my face with a roguish smile, +and said something with a chuckle, which I took to be the equivalent +of “O, you women, you women; it is true of you all!” +I fear it was not complimentary. At no time was there the least +sign of the ugly indecency of the eastern islands. All was poetry +pure and simple. The music itself was as complex as our own, though +constructed on an entirely different basis; once or twice I was startled +by a bit of something very like the best English sacred music, but it +was only for an instant. At last there was a longer pause, and +this time the dancers were all on their feet. As the drama went +on, the interest grew. The performers appealed to each other, +to the audience, to the heaven above; they took counsel with each other, +the conspirators drew together in a knot; it was just an opera, the +drums coming in at proper intervals, the tenor, baritone, and bass all +where they should be - except that the voices were all of the same calibre. +A woman once sang from the back row with a very fine contralto voice +spoilt by being made artificially nasal; I notice all the women affect +that unpleasantness. At one time a boy of angelic beauty was the +soloist; and at another, a child of six or eight, doubtless an infant +phenomenon being trained, was placed in the centre. The little +fellow was desperately frightened and embarrassed at first, but towards +the close warmed up to his work and showed much dramatic talent. +The changing expressions on the faces of the dancers were so speaking, +that it seemed a great stupidity not to understand them.’<br> +<br> +Our neighbour at this performance, Karaiti, somewhat favours his Butaritarian +majesty in shape and feature, being, like him, portly, bearded, and +Oriental. In character he seems the reverse: alert, smiling, jovial, +jocular, industrious. At home in his own island, he labours himself +like a slave, and makes his people labour like a slave-driver. +He takes an interest in ideas. George the trader told him about +flying-machines. ‘Is that true, George?’ he asked. +‘It is in the papers,’ replied George. ‘Well,’ +said Karaiti, ‘if that man can do it with machinery, I can do +it without’; and he designed and made a pair of wings, strapped +them on his shoulders, went to the end of a pier, launched himself into +space, and fell bulkily into the sea. His wives fished him out, +for his wings hindered him in swimming. ‘George,’ +said he, pausing as he went up to change, ‘George, you lie.’ +He had eight wives, for his small realm still follows ancient customs; +but he showed embarrassment when this was mentioned to my wife. +‘Tell her I have only brought one here,’ he said anxiously. +Altogether the Black Douglas pleased us much; and as we heard fresh +details of the king’s uneasiness, and saw for ourselves that all +the weapons in the summer parlour had been hid, we watched with the +more admiration the cause of all this anxiety rolling on his big legs, +with his big smiling face, apparently unarmed, and certainly unattended, +through the hostile town. The Red Douglas, pot-bellied Kuma, having +perhaps heard word of the debauch, remained upon his fief; his vassals +thus came uncommanded to the feast, and swelled the following of Karaiti.<br> +<br> +<i>Friday</i>, <i>July</i> 26. - At night in the dark, the singers of +Makin paraded in the road before our house and sang the song of the +princess. ‘This is the day; she was born to-day; Nei Kamaunave +was born to-day - a beautiful princess, Queen of Butaritari.’ +So I was told it went in endless iteration. The song was of course +out of season, and the performance only a rehearsal. But it was +a serenade besides; a delicate attention to ourselves from our new friend, +Karaiti.<br> +<br> +<i>Saturday</i>, <i>July</i> 27. - We had announced a performance of +the magic lantern to-night in church; and this brought the king to visit +us. In honour of the Black Douglas (I suppose) his usual two guardsmen +were now increased to four; and the squad made an outlandish figure +as they straggled after him, in straw hats, kilts and jackets. +Three carried their arms reversed, the butts over their shoulders, the +muzzles menacing the king’s plump back; the fourth had passed +his weapon behind his neck, and held it there with arms extended like +a backboard. The visit was extraordinarily long. The king, +no longer galvanised with gin, said and did nothing. He sat collapsed +in a chair and let a cigar go out. It was hot, it was sleepy, +it was cruel dull; there was no resource but to spy in the countenance +of Tebureimoa for some remaining trait of <i>Mr. Corpse</i> the butcher. +His hawk nose, crudely depressed and flattened at the point, did truly +seem to us to smell of midnight murder. When he took his leave, +Maka bade me observe him going down the stair (or rather ladder) from +the verandah. ‘Old man,’ said Maka. ‘Yes,’ +said I, ‘and yet I suppose not old man.’ ‘Young +man,’ returned Maka, ‘perhaps fo’ty.’ +And I have heard since he is most likely younger.<br> +<br> +While the magic lantern was showing, I skulked without in the dark. +The voice of Maka, excitedly explaining the Scripture slides, seemed +to fill not the church only, but the neighbourhood. All else was +silent. Presently a distant sound of singing arose and approached; +and a procession drew near along the road, the hot clean smell of the +men and women striking in my face delightfully. At the corner, +arrested by the voice of Maka and the lightening and darkening of the +church, they paused. They had no mind to go nearer, that was plain. +They were Makin people, I believe, probably staunch heathens, contemners +of the missionary and his works. Of a sudden, however, a man broke +from their company, took to his heels, and fled into the church; next +moment three had followed him; the next it was a covey of near upon +a score, all pelting for their lives. So the little band of the +heathen paused irresolute at the corner, and melted before the attractions +of a magic lantern, like a glacier in spring. The more staunch +vainly taunted the deserters; three fled in a guilty silence, but still +fled; and when at length the leader found the wit or the authority to +get his troop in motion and revive the singing, it was with much diminished +forces that they passed musically on up the dark road.<br> +<br> +Meanwhile inside the luminous pictures brightened and faded. I +stood for some while unobserved in the rear of the spectators, when +I could hear just in front of me a pair of lovers following the show +with interest, the male playing the part of interpreter and (like Adam) +mingling caresses with his lecture. The wild animals, a tiger +in particular, and that old school-treat favourite, the sleeper and +the mouse, were hailed with joy; but the chief marvel and delight was +in the gospel series. Maka, in the opinion of his aggrieved wife, +did not properly rise to the occasion. ‘What is the matter +with the man? Why can’t he talk?’ she cried. +The matter with the man, I think, was the greatness of the opportunity; +he reeled under his good fortune; and whether he did ill or well, the +exposure of these pious ‘phantoms’ did as a matter of fact +silence in all that part of the island the voice of the scoffer. +‘Why then,’ the word went round, ‘why then, the Bible +is true!’ And on our return afterwards we were told the +impression was yet lively, and those who had seen might be heard telling +those who had not, ‘O yes, it is all true; these things all happened, +we have seen the pictures.’ The argument is not so childish +as it seems; for I doubt if these islanders are acquainted with any +other mode of representation but photography; so that the picture of +an event (on the old melodrama principle that ‘the camera cannot +lie, Joseph,’) would appear strong proof of its occurrence. +The fact amused us the more because our slides were some of them ludicrously +silly, and one (Christ before Pilate) was received with shouts of merriment, +in which even Maka was constrained to join.<br> +<br> +<i>Sunday</i>, <i>July</i> 28. - Karaiti came to ask for a repetition +of the ‘phantoms’ - this was the accepted word - and, having +received a promise, turned and left my humble roof without the shadow +of a salutation. I felt it impolite to have the least appearance +of pocketing a slight; the times had been too difficult, and were still +too doubtful; and Queen Victoria’s son was bound to maintain the +honour of his house. Karaiti was accordingly summoned that evening +to the Ricks, where Mrs. Rick fell foul of him in words, and Queen Victoria’s +son assailed him with indignant looks. I was the ass with the +lion’s skin; I could not roar in the language of the Gilbert Islands; +but I could stare. Karaiti declared he had meant no offence; apologised +in a sound, hearty, gentlemanly manner; and became at once at his ease. +He had in a dagger to examine, and announced he would come to price +it on the morrow, to-day being Sunday; this nicety in a heathen with +eight wives surprised me. The dagger was ‘good for killing +fish,’ he said roguishly; and was supposed to have his eye upon +fish upon two legs. It is at least odd that in Eastern Polynesia +fish was the accepted euphemism for the human sacrifice. Asked +as to the population of his island, Karaiti called out to his vassals +who sat waiting him outside the door, and they put it at four hundred +and fifty; but (added Karaiti jovially) there will soon be plenty more, +for all the women are in the family way. Long before we separated +I had quite forgotten his offence. He, however, still bore it +in mind; and with a very courteous inspiration returned early on the +next day, paid us a long visit, and punctiliously said farewell when +he departed.<br> +<br> +<i>Monday</i>, <i>July</i> 29. - The great day came round at last. +In the first hours the night was startled by the sound of clapping hands +and the chant of Nei Kamaunava; its melancholy, slow, and somewhat menacing +measures broken at intervals by a formidable shout. The little +morsel of humanity thus celebrated in the dark hours was observed at +midday playing on the green entirely naked, and equally unobserved and +unconcerned.<br> +<br> +The summer parlour on its artificial islet, relieved against the shimmering +lagoon, and shimmering itself with sun and tinned iron, was all day +crowded about by eager men and women. Within, it was boxed full +of islanders, of any age and size, and in every degree of nudity and +finery. So close we squatted, that at one time I had a mighty +handsome woman on my knees, two little naked urchins having their feet +against my back. There might be a dame in full attire of <i>holoku</i> +and hat and flowers; and her next neighbour might the next moment strip +some little rag of a shift from her fat shoulders and come out a monument +of flesh, painted rather than covered by the hairbreadth <i>ridi</i>. +Little ladies who thought themselves too great to appear undraped upon +so high a festival were seen to pause outside in the bright sunshine, +their miniature ridis in their hand; a moment more and they were full-dressed +and entered the concert-room.<br> +<br> +At either end stood up to sing, or sat down to rest, the alternate companies +of singers; Kuma and Little Makin on the north, Butaritari and its conjunct +hamlets on the south; both groups conspicuous in barbaric bravery. +In the midst, between these rival camps of troubadours, a bench was +placed; and here the king and queen throned it, some two or three feet +above the crowded audience on the floor - Tebureimoa as usual in his +striped pyjamas with a satchel strapped across one shoulder, doubtless +(in the island fashion) to contain his pistols; the queen in a purple +<i>holoku</i>, her abundant hair let down, a fan in her hand. +The bench was turned facing to the strangers, a piece of well-considered +civility; and when it was the turn of Butaritari to sing, the pair must +twist round on the bench, lean their elbows on the rail, and turn to +us the spectacle of their broad backs. The royal couple occasionally +solaced themselves with a clay pipe; and the pomp of state was further +heightened by the rifles of a picket of the guard.<br> +<br> +With this kingly countenance, and ourselves squatted on the ground, +we heard several songs from one side or the other. Then royalty +and its guards withdrew, and Queen Victoria’s son and daughter-in-law +were summoned by acclamation to the vacant throne. Our pride was +perhaps a little modified when we were joined on our high places by +a certain thriftless loafer of a white; and yet I was glad too, for +the man had a smattering of native, and could give me some idea of the +subject of the songs. One was patriotic, and dared Tembinok’ +of Apemama, the terror of the group, to an invasion. One mixed +the planting of taro and the harvest-home. Some were historical, +and commemorated kings and the illustrious chances of their time, such +as a bout of drinking or a war. One, at least, was a drama of +domestic interest, excellently played by the troop from Makin. +It told the story of a man who has lost his wife, at first bewails her +loss, then seeks another: the earlier strains (or acts) are played exclusively +by men; but towards the end a woman appears, who has just lost her husband; +and I suppose the pair console each other, for the finale seemed of +happy omen. Of some of the songs my informant told me briefly +they were ‘like about the <i>weemen</i>’; this I could have +guessed myself. Each side (I should have said) was strengthened +by one or two women. They were all soloists, did not very often +join in the performance, but stood disengaged at the back part of the +stage, and looked (in <i>ridi</i>, necklace, and dressed hair) for all +the world like European ballet-dancers. When the song was anyway +broad these ladies came particularly to the front; and it was singular +to see that, after each entry, the <i>première</i> <i>danseuse</i> +pretended to be overcome by shame, as though led on beyond what she +had meant, and her male assistants made a feint of driving her away +like one who had disgraced herself. Similar affectations accompany +certain truly obscene dances of Samoa, where they are very well in place. +Here it was different. The words, perhaps, in this free-spoken +world, were gross enough to make a carter blush; and the most suggestive +feature was this feint of shame. For such parts the women showed +some disposition; they were pert, they were neat, they were acrobatic, +they were at times really amusing, and some of them were pretty. +But this is not the artist’s field; there is the whole width of +heaven between such capering and ogling, and the strange rhythmic gestures, +and strange, rapturous, frenzied faces with which the best of the male +dancers held us spellbound through a Gilbert Island ballet.<br> +<br> +Almost from the first it was apparent that the people of the city were +defeated. I might have thought them even good, only I had the +other troop before my eyes to correct my standard, and remind me continually +of ‘the little more, and how much it is.’ Perceiving +themselves worsted, the choir of Butaritari grew confused, blundered, +and broke down; amid this hubbub of unfamiliar intervals I should not +myself have recognised the slip, but the audience were quick to catch +it, and to jeer. To crown all, the Makin company began a dance +of truly superlative merit. I know not what it was about, I was +too much absorbed to ask. In one act a part of the chorus, squealing +in some strange falsetto, produced very much the effect of our orchestra; +in another, the dancers, leaping like jumping-jacks, with arms extended, +passed through and through each other’s ranks with extraordinary +speed, neatness, and humour. A more laughable effect I never saw; +in any European theatre it would have brought the house down, and the +island audience roared with laughter and applause. This filled +up the measure for the rival company, and they forgot themselves and +decency. After each act or figure of the ballet, the performers +pause a moment standing, and the next is introduced by the clapping +of hands in triplets. Not until the end of the whole ballet do +they sit down, which is the signal for the rivals to stand up. +But now all rules were to be broken. During the interval following +on this great applause, the company of Butaritari leaped suddenly to +their feet and most unhandsomely began a performance of their own. +It was strange to see the men of Makin staring; I have seen a tenor +in Europe stare with the same blank dignity into a hissing theatre; +but presently, to my surprise, they sobered down, gave up the unsung +remainder of their ballet, resumed their seats, and suffered their ungallant +adversaries to go on and finish. Nothing would suffice. +Again, at the first interval, Butaritari unhandsomely cut in; Makin, +irritated in turn, followed the example; and the two companies of dancers +remained permanently standing, continuously clapping hands, and regularly +cutting across each other at each pause. I expected blows to begin +with any moment; and our position in the midst was highly unstrategical. +But the Makin people had a better thought; and upon a fresh interruption +turned and trooped out of the house. We followed them, first because +these were the artists, second because they were guests and had been +scurvily ill-used. A large population of our neighbours did the +same, so that the causeway was filled from end to end by the procession +of deserters; and the Butaritari choir was left to sing for its own +pleasure in an empty house, having gained the point and lost the audience. +It was surely fortunate that there was no one drunk; but, drunk or sober, +where else would a scene so irritating have concluded without blows?<br> +<br> +The last stage and glory of this auspicious day was of our own providing +- the second and positively the last appearance of the phantoms. +All round the church, groups sat outside, in the night, where they could +see nothing; perhaps ashamed to enter, certainly finding some shadowy +pleasure in the mere proximity. Within, about one-half of the +great shed was densely packed with people. In the midst, on the +royal dais, the lantern luminously smoked; chance rays of light struck +out the earnest countenance of our Chinaman grinding the hand-organ; +a fainter glimmer showed off the rafters and their shadows in the hollow +of the roof; the pictures shone and vanished on the screen; and as each +appeared, there would run a hush, a whisper, a strong shuddering rustle, +and a chorus of small cries among the crowd. There sat by me the +mate of a wrecked schooner. ‘They would think this a strange +sight in Europe or the States,’ said he, ‘going on in a +building like this, all tied with bits of string.’<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER VII - HUSBAND AND WIFE<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +The trader accustomed to the manners of Eastern Polynesia has a lesson +to learn among the Gilberts. The <i>ridi</i> is but a spare attire; +as late as thirty years back the women went naked until marriage; within +ten years the custom lingered; and these facts, above all when heard +in description, conveyed a very false idea of the manners of the group. +A very intelligent missionary described it (in its former state) as +a ‘Paradise of naked women’ for the resident whites. +It was at least a platonic Paradise, where Lothario ventured at his +peril. Since 1860, fourteen whites have perished on a single island, +all for the same cause, all found where they had no business, and speared +by some indignant father of a family; the figure was given me by one +of their contemporaries who had been more prudent and survived. +The strange persistence of these fourteen martyrs might seem to point +to monomania or a series of romantic passions; gin is the more likely +key. The poor buzzards sat alone in their houses by an open case; +they drank; their brain was fired; they stumbled towards the nearest +houses on chance; and the dart went through their liver. In place +of a Paradise the trader found an archipelago of fierce husbands and +of virtuous women. ‘Of course if you wish to make love to +them, it’s the same as anywhere else,’ observed a trader +innocently; but he and his companions rarely so choose.<br> +<br> +The trader must be credited with a virtue: he often makes a kind and +loyal husband. Some of the worst beachcombers in the Pacific, +some of the last of the old school, have fallen in my path, and some +of them were admirable to their native wives, and one made a despairing +widower. The position of a trader’s wife in the Gilberts +is, besides, unusually enviable. She shares the immunities of +her husband. Curfew in Butaritari sounds for her in vain. +Long after the bell is rung and the great island ladies are confined +for the night to their own roof, this chartered libertine may scamper +and giggle through the deserted streets or go down to bathe in the dark. +The resources of the store are at her hand; she goes arrayed like a +queen, and feasts delicately everyday upon tinned meats. And she +who was perhaps of no regard or station among natives sits with captains, +and is entertained on board of schooners. Five of these privileged +dames were some time our neighbours. Four were handsome skittish +lasses, gamesome like children, and like children liable to fits of +pouting. They wore dresses by day, but there was a tendency after +dark to strip these lendings and to career and squall about the compound +in the aboriginal <i>ridi</i>. Games of cards were continually +played, with shells for counters; their course was much marred by cheating; +and the end of a round (above all if a man was of the party) resolved +itself into a scrimmage for the counters. The fifth was a matron. +It was a picture to see her sail to church on a Sunday, a parasol in +hand, a nursemaid following, and the baby buried in a trade hat and +armed with a patent feeding-bottle. The service was enlivened +by her continual supervision and correction of the maid. It was +impossible not to fancy the baby was a doll, and the church some European +playroom. All these women were legitimately married. It +is true that the certificate of one, when she proudly showed it, proved +to run thus, that she was ‘married for one night,’ and her +gracious partner was at liberty to ‘send her to hell’ the +next morning; but she was none the wiser or the worse for the dastardly +trick. Another, I heard, was married on a work of mine in a pirated +edition; it answered the purpose as well as a Hall Bible. Notwithstanding +all these allurements of social distinction, rare food and raiment, +a comparative vacation from toil, and legitimate marriage contracted +on a pirated edition, the trader must sometimes seek long before he +can be mated. While I was in the group one had been eight months +on the quest, and he was still a bachelor.<br> +<br> +Within strictly native society the old laws and practices were harsh, +but not without a certain stamp of high-mindedness. Stealthy adultery +was punished with death; open elopement was properly considered virtue +in comparison, and compounded for a fine in land. The male adulterer +alone seems to have been punished. It is correct manners for a +jealous man to hang himself; a jealous woman has a different remedy +- she bites her rival. Ten or twenty years ago it was a capital +offence to raise a woman’s <i>ridi</i>; to this day it is still +punished with a heavy fine; and the garment itself is still symbolically +sacred. Suppose a piece of land to be disputed in Butaritari, +the claimant who shall first hang a <i>ridi</i> on the tapu-post has +gained his cause, since no one can remove or touch it but himself.<br> +<br> +The <i>ridi</i> was the badge not of the woman but the wife, the mark +not of her sex but of her station. It was the collar on the slave’s +neck, the brand on merchandise. The adulterous woman seems to +have been spared; were the husband offended, it would be a poor consolation +to send his draught cattle to the shambles. Karaiti, to this day, +calls his eight wives ‘his horses,’ some trader having explained +to him the employment of these animals on farms; and Nanteitei hired +out his wives to do mason-work. Husbands, at least when of high +rank, had the power of life and death; even whites seem to have possessed +it; and their wives, when they had transgressed beyond forgiveness, +made haste to pronounce the formula of deprecation - <i>I Kana Kim</i>. +This form of words had so much virtue that a condemned criminal repeating +it on a particular day to the king who had condemned him, must be instantly +released. It is an offer of abasement, and, strangely enough, +the reverse - the imitation - is a common vulgar insult in Great Britain +to this day. I give a scene between a trader and his Gilbert Island +wife, as it was told me by the husband, now one of the oldest residents, +but then a freshman in the group.<br> +<br> +‘Go and light a fire,’ said the trader, ‘and when +I have brought this oil I will cook some fish.’ The woman +grunted at him, island fashion. ‘I am not a pig that you +should grunt at me,’ said he.<br> +<br> +‘I know you are not a pig,’ said the woman, ‘neither +am I your slave.’<br> +<br> +‘To be sure you are not my slave, and if you do not care to stop +with me, you had better go home to your people,’ said he. +‘But in the mean time go and light the fire; and when I have brought +this oil I will cook some fish.’<br> +<br> +She went as if to obey; and presently when the trader looked she had +built a fire so big that the cook-house was catching in flames.<br> +<br> +‘<i>I Kana Kim</i>!’ she cried, as she saw him coming; but +he recked not, and hit her with a cooking-pot. The leg pierced +her skull, blood spouted, it was thought she was a dead woman, and the +natives surrounded the house in a menacing expectation. Another +white was present, a man of older experience. ‘You will +have us both killed if you go on like this,’ he cried. ‘She +had said <i>I Kana Kim</i>!’ If she had not said <i>I Kana +Kim</i> he might have struck her with a caldron. It was not the +blow that made the crime, but the disregard of an accepted formula.<br> +<br> +Polygamy, the particular sacredness of wives, their semi-servile state, +their seclusion in kings’ harems, even their privilege of biting, +all would seem to indicate a Mohammedan society and the opinion of the +soullessness of woman. And not so in the least. It is a +mere appearance. After you have studied these extremes in one +house, you may go to the next and find all reversed, the woman the mistress, +the man only the first of her thralls. The authority is not with +the husband as such, nor the wife as such. It resides in the chief +or the chief-woman; in him or her who has inherited the lands of the +clan, and stands to the clansman in the place of parent, exacting their +service, answerable for their fines. There is but the one source +of power and the one ground of dignity - rank. The king married +a chief-woman; she became his menial, and must work with her hands on +Messrs. Wightman’s pier. The king divorced her; she regained +at once her former state and power. She married the Hawaiian sailor, +and behold the man is her flunkey and can be shown the door at pleasure. +Nay, and such low-born lords are even corrected physically, and, like +grown but dutiful children, must endure the discipline.<br> +<br> +We were intimate in one such household, that of Nei Takauti and Nan +Tok’; I put the lady first of necessity. During one week +of fool’s paradise, Mrs. Stevenson had gone alone to the sea-side +of the island after shells. I am very sure the proceeding was +unsafe; and she soon perceived a man and woman watching her. Do +what she would, her guardians held her steadily in view; and when the +afternoon began to fall, and they thought she had stayed long enough, +took her in charge, and by signs and broken English ordered her home. +On the way the lady drew from her earring-hole a clay pipe, the husband +lighted it, and it was handed to my unfortunate wife, who knew not how +to refuse the incommodious favour; and when they were all come to our +house, the pair sat down beside her on the floor, and improved the occasion +with prayer. From that day they were our family friends; bringing +thrice a day the beautiful island garlands of white flowers, visiting +us any evening, and frequently carrying us down to their own maniap’ +in return, the woman leading Mrs. Stevenson by the hand like one child +with another.<br> +<br> +Nan Tok’, the husband, was young, extremely handsome, of the most +approved good humour, and suffering in his precarious station from suppressed +high spirits. Nei Takauti, the wife, was getting old; her grown +son by a former marriage had just hanged himself before his mother’s +eyes in despair at a well-merited rebuke. Perhaps she had never +been beautiful, but her face was full of character, her eye of sombre +fire. She was a high chief-woman, but by a strange exception for +a person of her rank, was small, spare, and sinewy, with lean small +hands and corded neck. Her full dress of an evening was invariably +a white chemise - and for adornment, green leaves (or sometimes white +blossoms) stuck in her hair and thrust through her huge earring-holes. +The husband on the contrary changed to view like a kaleidoscope. +Whatever pretty thing my wife might have given to Nei Takauti - a string +of beads, a ribbon, a piece of bright fabric - appeared the next evening +on the person of Nan Tok’. It was plain he was a clothes-horse; +that he wore livery; that, in a word, he was his wife’s wife. +They reversed the parts indeed, down to the least particular; it was +the husband who showed himself the ministering angel in the hour of +pain, while the wife displayed the apathy and heartlessness of the proverbial +man.<br> +<br> +When Nei Takauti had a headache Nan Tok’ was full of attention +and concern. When the husband had a cold and a racking toothache +the wife heeded not, except to jeer. It is always the woman’s +part to fill and light the pipe; Nei Takauti handed hers in silence +to the wedded page; but she carried it herself, as though the page were +not entirely trusted. Thus she kept the money, but it was he who +ran the errands, anxiously sedulous. A cloud on her face dimmed +instantly his beaming looks; on an early visit to their maniap’ +my wife saw he had cause to be wary. Nan Tok’ had a friend +with him, a giddy young thing, of his own age and sex; and they had +worked themselves into that stage of jocularity when consequences are +too often disregarded. Nei Takauti mentioned her own name. +Instantly Nan Tok’ held up two fingers, his friend did likewise, +both in an ecstasy of slyness. It was plain the lady had two names; +and from the nature of their merriment, and the wrath that gathered +on her brow, there must be something ticklish in the second. The +husband pronounced it; a well-directed cocoa-nut from the hand of his +wife caught him on the side of the head, and the voices and the mirth +of these indiscreet young gentlemen ceased for the day.<br> +<br> +The people of Eastern Polynesia are never at a loss; their etiquette +is absolute and plenary; in every circumstance it tells them what to +do and how to do it. The Gilbertines are seemingly more free, +and pay for their freedom (like ourselves) in frequent perplexity. +This was often the case with the topsy-turvy couple. We had once +supplied them during a visit with a pipe and tobacco; and when they +had smoked and were about to leave, they found themselves confronted +with a problem: should they take or leave what remained of the tobacco? +The piece of plug was taken up, it was laid down again, it was handed +back and forth, and argued over, till the wife began to look haggard +and the husband elderly. They ended by taking it, and I wager +were not yet clear of the compound before they were sure they had decided +wrong. Another time they had been given each a liberal cup of +coffee, and Nan Tok’ with difficulty and disaffection made an +end of his. Nei Takauti had taken some, she had no mind for more, +plainly conceived it would be a breach of manners to set down the cup +unfinished, and ordered her wedded retainer to dispose of what was left. +‘I have swallowed all I can, I cannot swallow more, it is a physical +impossibility,’ he seemed to say; and his stern officer reiterated +her commands with secret imperative signals. Luckless dog! but +in mere humanity we came to the rescue and removed the cup.<br> +<br> +I cannot but smile over this funny household; yet I remember the good +souls with affection and respect. Their attention to ourselves +was surprising. The garlands are much esteemed, the blossoms must +be sought far and wide; and though they had many retainers to call to +their aid, we often saw themselves passing afield after the blossoms, +and the wife engaged with her own in putting them together. It +was no want of only that disregard so incident to husbands, that made +Nei Takauti despise the sufferings of Nan Tok’. When my +wife was unwell she proved a diligent and kindly nurse; and the pair, +to the extreme embarrassment of the sufferer, became fixtures in the +sick-room. This rugged, capable, imperious old dame, with the +wild eyes, had deep and tender qualities: her pride in her young husband +it seemed that she dissembled, fearing possibly to spoil him; and when +she spoke of her dead son there came something tragic in her face. +But I seemed to trace in the Gilbertines a virility of sense and sentiment +which distinguishes them (like their harsh and uncouth language) from +their brother islanders in the east.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +PART IV: THE GILBERTS - APEMAMA<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER I - THE KING OF APEMAMA: THE ROYAL TRADER<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +There is one great personage in the Gilberts: Tembinok’ of Apemama: +solely conspicuous, the hero of song, the butt of gossip. Through +the rest of the group the kings are slain or fallen in tutelage: Tembinok’ +alone remains, the last tyrant, the last erect vestige of a dead society. +The white man is everywhere else, building his houses, drinking his +gin, getting in and out of trouble with the weak native governments. +There is only one white on Apemama, and he on sufferance, living far +from court, and hearkening and watching his conduct like a mouse in +a cat’s ear. Through all the other islands a stream of native +visitors comes and goes, travelling by families, spending years on the +grand tour. Apemama alone is left upon one side, the tourist dreading +to risk himself within the clutch of Tembinok’. And fear +of the same Gorgon follows and troubles them at home. Maiana once +paid him tribute; he once fell upon and seized Nonuti: first steps to +the empire of the archipelago. A British warship coming on the +scene, the conqueror was driven to disgorge, his career checked in the +outset, his dear-bought armoury sunk in his own lagoon. But the +impression had been made; periodical fear of him still shakes the islands; +rumour depicts him mustering his canoes for a fresh onfall; rumour can +name his destination; and Tembinok’ figures in the patriotic war-songs +of the Gilberts like Napoleon in those of our grandfathers.<br> +<br> +We were at sea, bound from Mariki to Nonuti and Tapituea, when the wind +came suddenly fair for Apemama. The course was at once changed; +all hands were turned-to to clean ship, the decks holy-stoned, all the +cabin washed, the trade-room overhauled. In all our cruising we +never saw the <i>Equator</i> so smart as she was made for Tembinok’. +Nor was Captain Reid alone in these coquetries; for, another schooner +chancing to arrive during my stay in Apemama, I found that she also +was dandified for the occasion. And the two cases stand alone +in my experience of South Sea traders.<br> +<br> +We had on board a family of native tourists, from the grandsire to the +babe in arms, trying (against an extraordinary series of ill-luck) to +regain their native island of Peru. Five times already they had +paid their fare and taken ship; five times they had been disappointed, +dropped penniless upon strange islands, or carried back to Butaritari, +whence they sailed. This last attempt had been no better-starred; +their provisions were exhausted. Peru was beyond hope, and they +had cheerfully made up their minds to a fresh stage of exile in Tapituea +or Nonuti. With this slant of wind their random destination became +once more changed; and like the Calendar’s pilot, when the ‘black +mountains’ hove in view, they changed colour and beat upon their +breasts. Their camp, which was on deck in the ship’s waist, +resounded with complaint. They would be set to work, they must +become slaves, escape was hopeless, they must live and toil and die +in Apemama, in the tyrant’s den. With this sort of talk +they so greatly terrified their children, that one (a big hulking boy) +must at last be torn screaming from the schooner’s side. +And their fears were wholly groundless. I have little doubt they +were not suffered to be idle; but I can vouch for it that they were +kindly and generously used. For, the matter of a year later, I +was once more shipmate with these inconsistent wanderers on board the +<i>Janet Nicoll</i>. Their fare was paid by Tembinok’; they +who had gone ashore from the <i>Equator</i> destitute, reappeared upon +the <i>Janet</i> with new clothes, laden with mats and presents, and +bringing with them a magazine of food, on which they lived like fighting-cocks +throughout the voyage; I saw them at length repatriated, and I must +say they showed more concern on quitting Apemama than delight at reaching +home.<br> +<br> +We entered by the north passage (Sunday, September 1st), dodging among +shoals. It was a day of fierce equatorial sunshine; but the breeze +was strong and chill; and the mate, who conned the schooner from the +cross-trees, returned shivering to the deck. The lagoon was thick +with many-tinted wavelets; a continuous roaring of the outer sea overhung +the anchorage; and the long, hollow crescent of palm ruffled and sparkled +in the wind. Opposite our berth the beach was seen to be surmounted +for some distance by a terrace of white coral seven or eight feet high +and crowned in turn by the scattered and incongruous buildings of the +palace. The village adjoins on the south, a cluster of high-roofed +maniap’s. And village and palace seemed deserted.<br> +<br> +We were scarce yet moored, however, before distant and busy figures +appeared upon the beach, a boat was launched, and a crew pulled out +to us bringing the king’s ladder. Tembinok’ had once +an accident; has feared ever since to entrust his person to the rotten +chandlery of South Sea traders; and devised in consequence a frame of +wood, which is brought on board a ship as soon as she appears, and remains +lashed to her side until she leave. The boat’s crew, having +applied this engine, returned at once to shore. They might not +come on board; neither might we land, or not without danger of offence; +the king giving pratique in person. An interval followed, during +which dinner was delayed for the great man - the prelude of the ladder, +giving us some notion of his weighty body and sensible, ingenious character, +had highly whetted our curiosity; and it was with something like excitement +that we saw the beach and terrace suddenly blacken with attendant vassals, +the king and party embark, the boat (a man-of-war gig) come flying towards +us dead before the wind, and the royal coxswain lay us cleverly aboard, +mount the ladder with a jealous diffidence, and descend heavily on deck.<br> +<br> +Not long ago he was overgrown with fat, obscured to view, and a burthen +to himself. Captains visiting the island advised him to walk; +and though it broke the habits of a life and the traditions of his rank, +he practised the remedy with benefit. His corpulence is now portable; +you would call him lusty rather than fat; but his gait is still dull, +stumbling, and elephantine. He neither stops nor hastens, but +goes about his business with an implacable deliberation. We could +never see him and not be struck with his extraordinary natural means +for the theatre: a beaked profile like Dante’s in the mask, a +mane of long black hair, the eye brilliant, imperious, and inquiring: +for certain parts, and to one who could have used it, the face was a +fortune. His voice matched it well, being shrill, powerful, and +uncanny, with a note like a sea-bird’s. Where there are +no fashions, none to set them, few to follow them if they were set, +and none to criticise, he dresses - as Sir Charles Grandison lived - +‘to his own heart.’ Now he wears a woman’s frock, +now a naval uniform; now (and more usually) figures in a masquerade +costume of his own design: trousers and a singular jacket with shirt +tails, the cut and fit wonderful for island workmanship, the material +always handsome, sometimes green velvet, sometimes cardinal red silk. +This masquerade becomes him admirably. In the woman’s frock +he looks ominous and weird beyond belief. I see him now come pacing +towards me in the cruel sun, solitary, a figure out of Hoffmann.<br> +<br> +A visit on board ship, such as that at which we now assisted, makes +a chief part and by far the chief diversion of the life of Tembinok’. +He is not only the sole ruler, he is the sole merchant of his triple +kingdom, Apemama, Aranuka, and Kuria, well-planted islands. The +taro goes to the chiefs, who divide as they please among their immediate +adherents; but certain fish, turtles - which abound in Kuria, - and +the whole produce of the coco-palm, belong exclusively to Tembinok’. +‘A’ cobra berong me,’ observed his majesty with a +wave of his hand; and he counts and sells it by the houseful. +‘You got copra, king?’ I have heard a trader ask. +‘I got two, three outches,’ his majesty replied: ‘I +think three.’ Hence the commercial importance of Apemama, +the trade of three islands being centred there in a single hand; hence +it is that so many whites have tried in vain to gain or to preserve +a footing; hence ships are adorned, cooks have special orders, and captains +array themselves in smiles, to greet the king. If he be pleased +with his welcome and the fare he may pass days on board, and, every +day, and sometimes every hour, will be of profit to the ship. +He oscillates between the cabin, where he is entertained with strange +meats, and the trade-room, where he enjoys the pleasures of shopping +on a scale to match his person. A few obsequious attendants squat +by the house door, awaiting his least signal. In the boat, which +has been suffered to drop astern, one or two of his wives lie covered +from the sun under mats, tossed by the short sea of the lagoon, and +enduring agonies of heat and tedium. This severity is now and +then relaxed and the wives allowed on board. Three or four were +thus favoured on the day of our arrival: substantial ladies airily attired +in <i>ridis</i>. Each had a share of copra, her <i>peculium</i>, +to dispose of for herself. The display in the trade-room - hats, +ribbbons, dresses, scents, tins of salmon - the pride of the eye and +the lust of the flesh - tempted them in vain. They had but the +one idea - tobacco, the island currency, tantamount to minted gold; +returned to shore with it, burthened but rejoicing; and late into the +night, on the royal terrace, were to be seen counting the sticks by +lamplight in the open air.<br> +<br> +The king is no such economist. He is greedy of things new and +foreign. House after house, chest after chest, in the palace precinct, +is already crammed with clocks, musical boxes, blue spectacles, umbrellas, +knitted waistcoats, bolts of stuff, tools, rifles, fowling-pieces, medicines, +European foods, sewing-machines, and, what is more extraordinary, stoves: +all that ever caught his eye, tickled his appetite, pleased him for +its use, or puzzled him with its apparent inutility. And still +his lust is unabated. He is possessed by the seven devils of the +collector. He hears a thing spoken of, and a shadow comes on his +face. ‘I think I no got him,’ he will say; and the +treasures he has seem worthless in comparison. If a ship be bound +for Apemama, the merchant racks his brain to hit upon some novelty. +This he leaves carelessly in the main cabin or partly conceals in his +own berth, so that the king shall spy it for himself. ‘How +much you want?’ inquires Tembinok’, passing and pointing. +‘No, king; that too dear,’ returns the trader. ‘I +think I like him,’ says the king. This was a bowl of gold-fish. +On another occasion it was scented soap. ‘No, king; that +cost too much,’ said the trader; ‘too good for a Kanaka.’ +‘How much you got? I take him all,’ replied his majesty, +and became the lord of seventeen boxes at two dollars a cake. +Or again, the merchant feigns the article is not for sale, is private +property, an heirloom or a gift; and the trick infallibly succeeds. +Thwart the king and you hold him. His autocratic nature rears +at the affront of opposition. He accepts it for a challenge; sets +his teeth like a hunter going at a fence; and with no mark of emotion, +scarce even of interest, stolidly piles up the price. Thus, for +our sins, he took a fancy to my wife’s dressing-bag, a thing entirely +useless to the man, and sadly battered by years of service. Early +one forenoon he came to our house, sat down, and abruptly offered to +purchase it. I told him I sold nothing, and the bag at any rate +was a present from a friend; but he was acquainted with these pretexts +from of old, and knew what they were worth and how to meet them. +Adopting what I believe is called ‘the object method,’ he +drew out a bag of English gold, sovereigns and half-sovereigns, and +began to lay them one by one in silence on the table; at each fresh +piece reading our faces with a look. In vain I continued to protest +I was no trader; he deigned not to reply. There must have been +twenty pounds on the table, he was still going on, and irritation had +begun to mingle with our embarrassment, when a happy idea came to our +delivery. Since his majesty thought so much of the bag, we said, +we must beg him to accept it as a present. It was the most surprising +turn in Tembinok’s experience. He perceived too late that +his persistence was unmannerly; hung his head a while in silence; then, +lifting up a sheepish countenance, ‘I ‘shamed,’ said +the tyrant. It was the first and the last time we heard him own +to a flaw in his behaviour. Half an hour after he sent us a camphor-wood +chest worth only a few dollars - but then heaven knows what Tembinok’ +had paid for it.<br> +<br> +Cunning by nature, and versed for forty years in the government of men, +it must not be supposed that he is cheated blindly, or has resigned +himself without resistance to be the milch-cow of the passing trader. +His efforts have been even heroic. Like Nakaeia of Makin, he has +owned schooners. More fortunate than Nakaeia, he has found captains. +Ships of his have sailed as far as to the colonies. He has trafficked +direct, in his own bottoms, with New Zealand. And even so, even +there, the world-enveloping dishonesty of the white man prevented him; +his profit melted, his ship returned in debt, the money for the insurance +was embezzled, and when the <i>Coronet</i> came to be lost, he was astonished +to find he had lost all. At this he dropped his weapons; owned +he might as hopefully wrestle with the winds of heaven; and like an +experienced sheep, submitted his fleece thenceforward to the shearers. +He is the last man in the world to waste anger on the incurable; accepts +it with cynical composure; asks no more in those he deals with than +a certain decency of moderation; drives as good a bargain as he can; +and when he considers he is more than usually swindled, writes it in +his memory against the merchant’s name. He once ran over +to me a list of captains and supercargoes with whom he had done business, +classing them under three heads: ‘He cheat a litty’ - ‘He +cheat plenty’ - and ‘I think he cheat too much.’ +For the first two classes he expressed perfect toleration; sometimes, +but not always, for the third. I was present when a certain merchant +was turned about his business, and was the means (having a considerable +influence ever since the bag) of patching up the dispute. Even +on the day of our arrival there was like to have been a hitch with Captain +Reid: the ground of which is perhaps worth recital. Among goods +exported specially for Tembinok’ there is a beverage known (and +labelled) as Hennessy’s brandy. It is neither Hennessy, +nor even brandy; is about the colour of sherry, but is not sherry; tastes +of kirsch, and yet neither is it kirsch. The king, at least, has +grown used to this amazing brand, and rather prides himself upon the +taste; and any substitution is a double offence, being at once to cheat +him and to cast a doubt upon his palate. A similar weakness is +to be observed in all connoisseurs. Now the last case sold by +the <i>Equator</i> was found to contain a different and I would fondly +fancy a superior distillation; and the conversation opened very black +for Captain Reid. But Tembinok’ is a moderate man. +He was reminded and admitted that all men were liable to error, even +himself; accepted the principle that a fault handsomely acknowledged +should be condoned; and wound the matter up with this proposal: ‘Tuppoti +I mi’take, you ‘peakee me. Tuppoti you mi’take, +I ‘peakee you. Mo’ betta.’<br> +<br> +After dinner and supper in the cabin, a glass or two of ‘Hennetti’ +- the genuine article this time, with the kirsch bouquet, - and five +hours’ lounging on the trade-room counter, royalty embarked for +home. Three tacks grounded the boat before the palace; the wives +were carried ashore on the backs of vassals; Tembinok’ stepped +on a railed platform like a steamer’s gangway, and was borne shoulder +high through the shallows, up the beach, and by an inclined plane, paved +with pebbles, to the glaring terrace where he dwells.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER II - THE KING OF APEMAMA: FOUNDATION OF EQUATOR TOWN<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +Our first sight of Tembinok’ was a matter of concern, almost alarm, +to my whole party. We had a favour to seek; we must approach in +the proper courtly attitude of a suitor; and must either please him +or fail in the main purpose of our voyage. It was our wish to +land and live in Apemama, and see more near at hand the odd character +of the man and the odd (or rather ancient) condition of his island. +In all other isles of the South Seas a white man may land with his chest, +and set up house for a lifetime, if he choose, and if he have the money +or the trade; no hindrance is conceivable. But Apemama is a close +island, lying there in the sea with closed doors; the king himself, +like a vigilant officer, ready at the wicket to scrutinise and reject +intrenching visitors. Hence the attraction of our enterprise; +not merely because it was a little difficult, but because this social +quarantine, a curiosity in itself, has been the preservative of others.<br> +<br> +Tembinok’, like most tyrants, is a conservative; like many conservatives, +he eagerly welcomes new ideas, and, except in the field of politics, +leans to practical reform. When the missionaries came, professing +a knowledge of the truth, he readily received them; attended their worship, +acquired the accomplishment of public prayer, and made himself a student +at their feet. It is thus - it is by the cultivation of similar +passing chances - that he has learned to read, to write, to cipher, +and to speak his queer, personal English, so different from ordinary +‘Beach de Mar,’ so much more obscure, expressive, and condensed. +His education attended to, he found time to become critical of the new +inmates. Like Nakaeia of Makin, he is an admirer of silence in +the island; broods over it like a great ear; has spies who report daily; +and had rather his subjects sang than talked. The service, and +in particular the sermon, were thus sure to become offences: ‘Here, +in my island, <i>I</i> ‘peak,’ he once observed to me. +‘My chieps no ‘peak - do what I talk.’ He looked +at the missionary, and what did he see? ‘See Kanaka ‘peak +in a big outch!’ he cried, with a strong ring of sarcasm. +Yet he endured the subversive spectacle, and might even have continued +to endure it, had not a fresh point arisen. He looked again, to +employ his own figure; and the Kanaka was no longer speaking, he was +doing worse - he was building a copra-house. The king was touched +in his chief interests; revenue and prerogative were threatened. +He considered besides (and some think with him) that trade is incompatible +with the missionary claims. ‘Tuppoti mitonary think “good +man”: very good. Tuppoti he think “cobra”: no +good. I send him away ship.’ Such was his abrupt history +of the evangelist in Apemama.<br> +<br> +Similar deportations are common: ‘I send him away ship’ +is the epitaph of not a few, his majesty paying the exile’s fare +to the next place of call. For instance, being passionately fond +of European food, he has several times added to his household a white +cook, and one after another these have been deported. They, on +their side, swear they were not paid their wages; he, on his, that they +robbed and swindled him beyond endurance: both perhaps justly. +A more important case was that of an agent, despatched (as I heard the +story) by a firm of merchants to worm his way into the king’s +good graces, become, if possible, premier, and handle the copra in the +interest of his employers. He obtained authority to land, practised +his fascinations, was patiently listened to by Tembinok’, supposed +himself on the highway to success; and behold! when the next ship touched +at Apemama, the would-be premier was flung into a boat - had on board +- his fare paid, and so good-bye. But it is needless to multiply +examples; the proof of the pudding is in the eating. When we came +to Apemama, of so many white men who have scrambled for a place in that +rich market, one remained - a silent, sober, solitary, niggardly recluse, +of whom the king remarks, ‘I think he good; he no ‘peak.’<br> +<br> +I was warned at the outset we might very well fail in our design: yet +never dreamed of what proved to be the fact, that we should be left +four-and-twenty hours in suspense and come within an ace of ultimate +rejection. Captain Reid had primed himself; no sooner was the +king on board, and the Hennetti question amicably settled, than he proceeded +to express my request and give an abstract of my claims and virtues. +The gammon about Queen Victoria’s son might do for Butaritari; +it was out of the question here; and I now figured as ‘one of +the Old Men of England,’ a person of deep knowledge, come expressly +to visit Tembinok’s dominion, and eager to report upon it to the +no less eager Queen Victoria. The king made no shadow of an answer, +and presently began upon a different subject. We might have thought +that he had not heard, or not understood; only that we found ourselves +the subject of a constant study. As we sat at meals, he took us +in series and fixed upon each, for near a minute at a time, the same +hard and thoughtful stare. As he thus looked he seemed to forget +himself, the subject and the company, and to become absorbed in the +process of his thought; the look was wholly impersonal; I have seen +the same in the eyes of portrait-painters. The counts upon which +whites have been deported are mainly four: cheating Tembinok’, +meddling overmuch with copra, which is the source of his wealth, and +one of the sinews of his power, <i>‘peaking</i>, and political +intrigue. I felt guiltless upon all; but how to show it? +I would not have taken copra in a gift: how to express that quality +by my dinner-table bearing? The rest of the party shared my innocence +and my embarrassment. They shared also in my mortification when +after two whole meal-times and the odd moments of an afternoon devoted +to this reconnoitring, Tembinok’ took his leave in silence. +Next morning, the same undisguised study, the same silence, was resumed; +and the second day had come to its maturity before I was informed abruptly +that I had stood the ordeal. ‘I look your eye. You +good man. You no lie,’ said the king: a doubtful compliment +to a writer of romance. Later he explained he did not quite judge +by the eye only, but the mouth as well. ‘Tuppoti I see man,’ +he explained. ‘I no tavvy good man, bad man. I look +eye, look mouth. Then I tavvy. Look <i>eye</i>, look mouth,’ +he repeated. And indeed in our case the mouth had the most to +do with it, and it was by our talk that we gained admission to the island; +the king promising himself (and I believe really amassing) a vast amount +of useful knowledge ere we left.<br> +<br> +The terms of our admission were as follows: We were to choose a site, +and the king should there build us a town. His people should work +for us, but the king only was to give them orders. One of his +cooks should come daily to help mine, and to learn of him. In +case our stores ran out, he would supply us, and be repaid on the return +of the <i>Equator</i>. On the other hand, he was to come to meals +with us when so inclined; when he stayed at home, a dish was to be sent +him from our table; and I solemnly engaged to give his subjects no liquor +or money (both of which they are forbidden to possess) and no tobacco, +which they were to receive only from the royal hand. I think I +remember to have protested against the stringency of this last article; +at least, it was relaxed, and when a man worked for me I was allowed +to give him a pipe of tobacco on the premises, but none to take away.<br> +<br> +The site of Equator City - we named our city for the schooner - was +soon chosen. The immediate shores of the lagoon are windy and +blinding; Tembinok’ himself is glad to grope blue-spectacled on +his terrace; and we fled the neighbourhood of the red <i>conjunctiva</i>, +the suppurating eyeball, and the beggar who pursues and beseeches the +passing foreigner for eye wash. Behind the town the country is +diversified; here open, sandy, uneven, and dotted with dwarfish palms; +here cut up with taro trenches, deep and shallow, and, according to +the growth of the plants, presenting now the appearance of a sandy tannery, +now of an alleyed and green garden. A path leads towards the sea, +mounting abruptly to the main level of the island - twenty or even thirty +feet, although Findlay gives five; and just hard by the top of the rise, +where the coco-palms begin to be well grown, we found a grove of pandanus, +and a piece of soil pleasantly covered with green underbush. A +well was not far off under a rustic well-house; nearer still, in a sandy +cup of the land, a pond where we might wash our clothes. The place +was out of the wind, out of the sun, and out of sight of the village. +It was shown to the king, and the town promised for the morrow.<br> +<br> +The morrow came, Mr. Osbourne landed, found nothing done, and carried +his complaint to Tembinok’. He heard it, rose, called for +a Winchester, stepped without the royal palisade, and fired two shots +in the air. A shot in the air is the first Apemama warning; it +has the force of a proclamation in more loquacious countries; and his +majesty remarked agreeably that it would make his labourers ‘mo’ +bright.’ In less than thirty minutes, accordingly, the men +had mustered, the work was begun, and we were told that we might bring +our baggage when we pleased.<br> +<br> +It was two in the afternoon ere the first boat was beached, and the +long procession of chests and crates and sacks began to straggle through +the sandy desert towards Equator Town. The grove of pandanus was +practically a thing of the past. Fire surrounded and smoke rose +in the green underbush. In a wide circuit the axes were still +crashing. Those very advantages for which the place was chosen, +it had been the king’s first idea to abolish; and in the midst +of this devastation there stood already a good-sized maniap’ and +a small closed house. A mat was spread near by for Tembinok’; +here he sat superintending, in cardinal red, a pith helmet on his head, +a meerschaum pipe in his mouth, a wife stretched at his back with custody +of the matches and tobacco. Twenty or thirty feet in front of +him the bulk of the workers squatted on the ground; some of the bush +here survived and in this the commons sat nearly to their shoulders, +and presented only an arc of brown faces, black heads, and attentive +eyes fixed on his majesty. Long pauses reigned, during which the +subjects stared and the king smoked. Then Tembinok’ would +raise his voice and speak shrilly and briefly. There was never +a response in words; but if the speech were jesting, there came by way +of answer discreet, obsequious laughter - such laughter as we hear in +schoolrooms; and if it were practical, the sudden uprising and departure +of the squad. Twice they so disappeared, and returned with further +elements of the city: a second house and a second maniap’. +It was singular to spy, far off through the coco stems, the silent oncoming +of the maniap’, at first (it seemed) swimming spontaneously in +the air - but on a nearer view betraying under the eaves many score +of moving naked legs. In all the affair servile obedience was +no less remarkable than servile deliberation. The gang had here +mustered by the note of a deadly weapon; the man who looked on was the +unquestioned master of their lives; and except for civility, they bestirred +themselves like so many American hotel clerks. The spectator was +aware of an unobtrusive yet invincible inertia, at which the skipper +of a trading dandy might have torn his hair.<br> +<br> +Yet the work was accomplished. By dusk, when his majesty withdrew, +the town was founded and complete, a new and ruder Amphion having called +it from nothing with three cracks of a rifle. And the next morning +the same conjurer obliged us with a further miracle: a mystic rampart +fencing us, so that the path which ran by our doors became suddenly +impassable, the inhabitants who had business across the isle must fetch +a wide circuit, and we sat in the midst in a transparent privacy, seeing, +seen, but unapproachable, like bees in a glass hive. The outward +and visible sign of this glamour was no more than a few ragged coco-leaf +garlands round the stems of the outlying palms; but its significance +reposed on the tremendous sanction of the tapu and the guns of Tembinok’.<br> +<br> +We made our first meal that night in the improvised city, where we were +to stay two months, and which - so soon as we had done with it - was +to vanish in a day as it appeared, its elements returning whence they +came, the tapu raised, the traffic on the path resumed, the sun and +the moon peering in vain between the palm-trees for the bygone work, +the wind blowing over an empty site. Yet the place, which is now +only an episode in some memories, seemed to have been built, and to +be destined to endure, for years. It was a busy hamlet. +One of the maniap’s we made our dining-room, one the kitchen. +The houses we reserved for sleeping. They were on the admirable +Apemama plan: out and away the best house in the South Seas; standing +some three feet above the ground on posts; the sides of woven flaps, +which can be raised to admit light and air, or lowered to shut out the +wind and the rain: airy, healthy, clean, and watertight. We had +a hen of a remarkable kind: almost unique in my experience, being a +hen that occasionally laid eggs. Not far off, Mrs. Stevenson tended +a garden of salad and shalots. The salad was devoured by the hen +- which was her bane. The shalots were served out a leaf at a +time, and welcomed and relished like peaches. Toddy and green +cocoa-nuts were brought us daily. We once had a present of fish +from the king, and once of a turtle. Sometimes we shot so-called +plover along on the shore, sometimes wild chicken in the bush. +The rest of our diet was from tins.<br> +<br> +Our occupations were very various. While some of the party would +be away sketching, Mr. Osbourne and I hammered away at a novel. +We read Gibbon and Carlyle aloud; we blew on flageolets, we strummed +on guitars; we took photographs by the light of the sun, the moon, and +flash-powder; sometimes we played cards. Pot-hunting engaged a +part of our leisure. I have myself passed afternoons in the exciting +but innocuous pursuit of winged animals with a revolver; and it was +fortunate there were better shots of the party, and fortunate the king +could lend us a more suitable weapon, in the form of an excellent fowling-piece, +or our spare diet had been sparer still.<br> +<br> +Night was the time to see our city, after the moon was up, after the +lamps were lighted, and so long as the fire sparkled in the cook-house. +We suffered from a plague of flies and mosquitoes, comparable to that +of Egypt; our dinner-table (lent, like all our furniture, by the king) +must be enclosed in a tent of netting, our citadel and refuge; and this +became all luminous, and bulged and beaconed under the eaves, like the +globe of some monstrous lamp under the margin of its shade. Our +cabins, the sides being propped at a variety of inclinations, spelled +out strange, angular patterns of brightness. In his roofed and +open kitchen, Ah Fu was to be seen by lamp and firelight, dabbling among +pots. Over all, there fell in the season an extraordinary splendour +of mellow moonshine. The sand sparkled as with the dust of diamonds; +the stars had vanished. At intervals, a dusky night-bird, slow +and low flying, passed in the colonnade of the tree stems and uttered +a hoarse croaking cry.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER III - THE KING OF APEMAMA: THE PALACE OF MANY WOMEN<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +The palace, or rather the ground which it includes, is several acres +in extent. A terrace encloses it toward the lagoon; on the side +of the land, a palisade with several gates. These are scarce intended +for defence; a man, if he were strong, might easily pluck down the palisade; +he need not be specially active to leap from the beach upon the terrace. +There is no parade of guards, soldiers, or weapons; the armoury is under +lock and key; and the only sentinels are certain inconspicuous old women +lurking day and night before the gates. By day, these crones were +often engaged in boiling syrup or the like household occupation; by +night, they lay ambushed in the shadow or crouched along the palisade, +filling the office of eunuchs to this harem, sole guards upon a tyrant +life.<br> +<br> +Female wardens made a fit outpost for this palace of many women. +Of the number of the king’s wives I have no guess; and but a loose +idea of their function. He himself displayed embarrassment when +they were referred to as his wives, called them himself ‘my pamily,’ +and explained they were his ‘cutcheons’ - cousins. +We distinguished four of the crowd: the king’s mother; his sister, +a grave, trenchant woman, with much of her brother’s intelligence; +the queen proper, to whom (and to whom alone) my wife was formally presented; +and the favourite of the hour, a pretty, graceful girl, who sat with +the king daily, and once (when he shed tears) consoled him with caresses. +I am assured that even with her his relations are platonic. In +the background figured a multitude of ladies, the lean, the plump, and +the elephantine, some in sacque frocks, some in the hairbreadth <i>ridi</i>; +high-born and low, slave and mistress; from the queen to the scullion, +from the favourite to the scraggy sentries at the palisade. Not +all of these of course are of ‘my pamily,’ - many are mere +attendants; yet a surprising number shared the responsibility of the +king’s trust. These were key-bearers, treasurers, wardens +of the armoury, the napery, and the stores. Each knew and did +her part to admiration. Should anything be required - a particular +gun, perhaps, or a particular bolt of stuff, - the right queen was summoned; +she came bringing the right chest, opened it in the king’s presence, +and displayed her charge in perfect preservation - the gun cleaned and +oiled, the goods duly folded. Without delay or haste, and with +the minimum of speech, the whole great establishment turned on wheels +like a machine. Nowhere have I seen order more complete and pervasive. +And yet I was always reminded of Norse tales of trolls and ogres who +kept their hearts buried in the ground for the mere safety, and must +confide the secret to their wives. For these weapons are the life +of Tembinok’. He does not aim at popularity; but drives +and braves his subjects, with a simplicity of domination which it is +impossible not to admire, hard not to sympathise with. Should +one out of so many prove faithless, should the armoury be secretly unlocked, +should the crones have dozed by the palisade and the weapons find their +way unseen into the village, revolution would be nearly certain, death +the most probable result, and the spirit of the tyrant of Apemama flit +to rejoin his predecessors of Mariki and Tapituea. Yet those whom +he so trusts are all women, and all rivals.<br> +<br> +There is indeed a ministry and staff of males: cook, steward, carpenter, +and supercargoes: the hierarchy of a schooner. The spies, ‘his +majesty’s daily papers,’ as we called them, come every morning +to report, and go again. The cook and steward are concerned with +the table only. The supercargoes, whose business it is to keep +tally of the copra at three pounds a month and a percentage, are rarely +in the palace; and two at least are in the other islands. The +carpenter, indeed, shrewd and jolly old Rubam - query, Reuben? - promoted +on my last visit to the greater dignity of governor, is daily present, +altering, extending, embellishing, pursuing the endless series of the +king’s inventions; and his majesty will sometimes pass an afternoon +watching and talking with Rubam at his work. But the males are +still outsiders; none seems to be armed, none is entrusted with a key; +by dusk they are all usually departed from the palace; and the weight +of the monarchy and of the monarch’s life reposes unshared on +the women.<br> +<br> +Here is a household unlike, indeed, to one of ours; more unlike still +to the Oriental harem: that of an elderly childless man, his days menaced, +dwelling alone amid a bevy of women of all ages, ranks, and relationships, +- the mother, the sister, the cousin, the legitimate wife, the concubine, +the favourite, the eldest born, and she of yesterday; he, in their midst, +the only master, the only male, the sole dispenser of honours, clothes, +and luxuries, the sole mark of multitudinous ambitions and desires. +I doubt if you could find a man in Europe so bold as to attempt this +piece of tact and government. And seemingly Tembinok’ himself +had trouble in the beginning. I hear of him shooting at a wife +for some levity on board a schooner. Another, on some more serious +offence, he slew outright; he exposed her body in an open box, and (to +make the warning more memorable) suffered it to putrefy before the palace +gate. Doubtless his growing years have come to his assistance; +for upon so large a scale it is more easy to play the father than the +husband. And to-day, at least to the eye of a stranger, all seems +to go smoothly, and the wives to be proud of their trust, proud of their +rank, and proud of their cunning lord.<br> +<br> +I conceived they made rather a hero of the man. A popular master +in a girls’ school might, perhaps, offer a figure of his preponderating +station. But then the master does not eat, sleep, live, and wash +his dirty linen in the midst of his admirers; he escapes, he has a room +of his own, he leads a private life; if he had nothing else, he has +the holidays, and the more unhappy Tembinok’ is always on the +stage and on the stretch.<br> +<br> +In all my coming and going, I never heard him speak harshly or express +the least displeasure. An extreme, rather heavy, benignity - the +benignity of one sure to be obeyed - marked his demeanour; so that I +was at times reminded of Samual Richardson in his circle of admiring +women. The wives spoke up and seemed to volunteer opinions, like +our wives at home - or, say, like doting but respectable aunts. +Altogether, I conclude that he rules his seraglio much more by art than +terror; and those who give a different account (and who have none of +them enjoyed my opportunities of observation) perhaps failed to distinguish +between degrees of rank, between ‘my pamily’ and the hangers-on, +laundresses, and prostitutes.<br> +<br> +A notable feature is the evening game of cards when lamps are set forth +upon the terrace, and ‘I and my pamily’ play for tobacco +by the hour. It is highly characteristic of Tembinok’ that +he must invent a game for himself; highly characteristic of his worshipping +household that they should swear by the absurd invention. It is +founded on poker, played with the honours out of many packs, and inconceivably +dreary. But I have a passion for all games, studied it, and am +supposed to be the only white who ever fairly grasped its principle: +a fact for which the wives (with whom I was not otherwise popular) admired +me with acclamation. It was impossible to be deceived; this was +a genuine feeling: they were proud of their private game, had been cut +to the quick by the want of interest shown in it by others, and expanded +under the flattery of my attention. Tembinok’ puts up a +double stake, and receives in return two hands to choose from: a shallow +artifice which the wives (in all these years) have not yet fathomed. +He himself, when talking with me privately, made not the least secret +that he was secure of winning; and it was thus he explained his recent +liberality on board the <i>Equator</i>. He let the wives buy their +own tobacco, which pleased them at the moment. He won it back +at cards, which made him once more, and without fresh expense, that +which he ought to be, - the sole fount of all indulgences. And +he summed the matter up in that phrase with which he almost always concludes +any account of his policy: ‘Mo’ betta.’<br> +<br> +The palace compound is laid with broken coral, excruciating to the eyes +and the bare feet, but exquisitely raked and weeded. A score or +more of buildings lie in a sort of street along the palisade and scattered +on the margin of the terrace; dwelling-houses for the wives and the +attendants, storehouses for the king’s curios and treasures, spacious +maniap’s for feast or council, some on pillars of wood, some on +piers of masonry. One was still in hand, a new invention, the +king’s latest born: a European frame-house built for coolness +inside a lofty maniap’: its roof planked like a ship’s deck +to be a raised, shady, and yet private promenade. It was here +the king spent hours with Rubam; here I would sometimes join them; the +place had a most singular appearance; and I must say I was greatly taken +with the fancy, and joined with relish in the counsels of the architects.<br> +<br> +Suppose we had business with his majesty by day: we strolled over the +sand and by the dwarfish palms, exchanged a ‘<i>Kõnamaori</i>’ +with the crone on duty, and entered the compound. The wide sheet +of coral glared before us deserted; all having stowed themselves in +dark canvas from the excess of room. I have gone to and fro in +that labyrinth of a place, seeking the king; and the only breathing +creature I could find was when I peered under the eaves of a maniap’, +and saw the brawny body of one of the wives stretched on the floor, +a naked Amazon plunged in noiseless slumber. If it were still +the hour of the ‘morning papers’ the quest would be more +easy, the half-dozen obsequious, sly dogs squatting on the ground outside +a house, crammed as far as possible in its narrow shadow, and turning +to the king a row of leering faces. Tembinok’ would be within, +the flaps of the cabin raised, the trade blowing through, hearing their +report. Like journalists nearer home, when the day’s news +were scanty, these would make the more of it in words; and I have known +one to fill up a barren morning with an imaginary conversation of two +dogs. Sometimes the king deigns to laugh, sometimes to question +or jest with them, his voice sounding shrilly from the cabin. +By his side he may have the heir-apparent, Paul, his nephew and adopted +son, six years old, stark naked, and a model of young human beauty. +And there will always be the favourite and perhaps two other wives awake; +four more lying supine under mats and whelmed in slumber. Or perhaps +we came later, fell on a more private hour, and found Tembinok’ +retired in the house with the favourite, an earthenware spittoon, a +leaden inkpot, and a commercial ledger. In the last, lying on +his belly, he writes from day to day the uneventful history of his reign; +and when thus employed he betrayed a touch of fretfulness on interruption +with which I was well able to sympathise. The royal annalist once +read me a page or so, translating as he went; but the passage being +genealogical, and the author boggling extremely in his version, I own +I have been sometimes better entertained. Nor does he confine +himself to prose, but touches the lyre, too, in his leisure moments, +and passes for the chief bard of his kingdom, as he is its sole public +character, leading architect, and only merchant.<br> +<br> +His competence, however, does not reach to music; and his verses, when +they are ready, are taught to a professional musician, who sets them +and instructs the chorus. Asked what his songs were about, Tembinok’ +replied, ‘Sweethearts and trees and the sea. Not all the +same true, all the same lie.’ For a condensed view of lyrical +poetry (except that he seems to have forgot the stars and flowers) this +would be hard to mend. These multifarious occupations bespeak +(in a native and an absolute prince) unusual activity of mind.<br> +<br> +The palace court at noon is a spot to be remembered with awe, the visitor +scrambling there, on the loose stones, through a splendid nightmare +of light and heat; but the sweep of the wind delivers it from flies +and mosquitoes; and with the set of sun it became heavenly. I +remember it best on moonless nights. The air was like a bath of +milk. Countless shining stars were overhead, the lagoon paved +with them. Herds of wives squatted by companies on the gravel, +softly chatting. Tembinok’ would doff his jacket, and sit +bare and silent, perhaps meditating songs; the favourite usually by +him, silent also. Meanwhile in the midst of the court, the palace +lanterns were being lit and marshalled in rank upon the ground - six +or eight square yards of them; a sight that gave one strange ideas of +the number of ‘my pamily’: such a sight as may be seen about +dusk in a corner of some great terminus at home. Presently these +fared off into all corners of the precinct, lighting the last labours +of the day, lighting one after another to their rest that prodigious +company of women. A few lingered in the middle of the court for +the card-party, and saw the honours shuffled and dealt, and Tembinok’ +deliberating between his two; hands, and the queens losing their tobacco. +Then these also were scattered and extinguished; and their place was +taken by a great bonfire, the night-light of the palace. When +this was no more, smaller fires burned likewise at the gates. +These were tended by the crones, unseen, unsleeping - not always unheard. +Should any approach in the dark hours, a guarded alert made the circuit +of the palisade; each sentry signalled her neighbour with a stone; the +rattle of falling pebbles passed and died away; and the wardens of Tembinok’ +crouched in their places silent as before.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER IV - THE KING OF APEMAMA: EQUATOR TOWN AND THE PALACE<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +Five persons were detailed to wait upon us. Uncle Parker, who +brought us toddy and green nuts, was an elderly, almost an old man, +with the spirits, the industry, and the morals of a boy of ten. +His face was ancient, droll, and diabolical, the skin stretched over +taut sinews, like a sail on the guide-rope; and he smiled with every +muscle of his head. His nuts must be counted every day, or he +would deceive us in the tale; they must be daily examined, or some would +prove to be unhusked; nothing but the king’s name, and scarcely +that, would hold him to his duty. After his toils were over he +was given a pipe, matches, and tobacco, and sat on the floor in the +maniap’ to smoke. He would not seem to move from his position, +and yet every day, when the things fell to be returned the plug had +disappeared; he had found the means to conceal it in the roof, whence +he could radiantly produce it on the morrow. Although this piece +of legerdemain was performed regularly before three or four pairs of +eyes, we could never catch him in the fact; although we searched after +he was gone, we could never find the tobacco. Such were the diversions +of Uncle Parker, a man nearing sixty. But he was punished according +unto his deeds: Mrs. Stevenson took a fancy to paint him, and the sufferings +of the sitter were beyond description.<br> +<br> +Three lasses came from the palace to do our washing and racket with +Ah Fu. They were of the lowest class, hangers-on kept for the +convenience of merchant skippers, probably low-born, perhaps out-islanders, +with little refinement whether of manner or appearance, but likely and +jolly enough wenches in their way. We called one <i>Guttersnipe</i>, +for you may find her image in the slums of any city; the same lean, +dark-eyed, eager, vulgar face, the same sudden, hoarse guffaws, the +same forward and yet anxious manner, as with a tail of an eye on the +policeman: only the policeman here was a live king, and his truncheon +a rifle. I doubt if you could find anywhere out of the islands, +or often there, the parallel of <i>Fatty</i>, a mountain of a girl, +who must have weighed near as many stones as she counted summers, could +have given a good account of a life-guardsman, had the face of a baby, +and applied her vast mechanical forces almost exclusively to play. +But they were all three of the same merry spirit. Our washing +was conducted in a game of romps; and they fled and pursued, and splashed, +and pelted, and rolled each other in the sand, and kept up a continuous +noise of cries and laughter like holiday children. Indeed, and +however strange their own function in that austere establishment, were +they not escaped for the day from the largest and strictest Ladies’ +School in the South Seas?<br> +<br> +Our fifth attendant was no less a person than the royal cook. +He was strikingly handsome both in face and body, lazy as a slave, and +insolent as a butcher’s boy. He slept and smoked on our +premises in various graceful attitudes; but so far from helping Ah Fu, +he was not at the pains to watch him. It may be said of him that +he came to learn, and remained to teach; and his lessons were at times +difficult to stomach. For example, he was sent to fill a bucket +from the well. About half-way he found my wife watering her onions, +changed buckets with her, and leaving her the empty, returned to the +kitchen with the full. On another occasion he was given a dish +of dumplings for the king, was told they must be eaten hot, and that +he should carry them as fast as possible. The wretch set off at +the rate of about a mile in the hour, head in air, toes turned out. +My patience, after a month of trial, failed me at the sight. I +pursued, caught him by his two big shoulders, and thrusting him before +me, ran with him down the hill, over the sands, and through the applauding +village, to the Speak House, where the king was then holding a pow-wow. +He had the impudence to pretend he was internally injured by my violence, +and to profess serious apprehensions for his life.<br> +<br> +All this we endured; for the ways of Tembinok’ are summary, and +I was not yet ripe to take a hand in the man’s death. But +in the meanwhile, here was my unfortunate China boy slaving for the +pair, and presently he fell sick. I was now in the position of +Cimondain Lantenac, and indeed all the characters in <i>Quatre-Vingt-Treize</i>: +to continue to spare the guilty, I must sacrifice the innocent. +I took the usual course and tried to save both, with the usual consequence +of failure. Well rehearsed, I went down to the palace, found the +king alone, and obliged him with a vast amount of rigmarole. The +cook was too old to learn: I feared he was not making progress; how +if we had a boy instead? - boys were more teachable. It was all +in vain; the king pierced through my disguises to the root of the fact; +saw that the cook had desperately misbehaved; and sat a while glooming. +‘I think he tavvy too much,’ he said at last, with grim +concision; and immediately turned the talk to other subjects. +The same day another high officer, the steward, appeared in the cook’s +place, and, I am bound to say, proved civil and industrious.<br> +<br> +As soon as I left, it seems the king called for a Winchester and strolled +outside the palisade, awaiting the defaulter. That day Tembinok’ +wore the woman’s frock; as like as not, his make-up was completed +by a pith helmet and blue spectacles. Conceive the glaring stretch +of sandhills, the dwarf palms with their noon-day shadows, the line +of the palisade, the crone sentries (each by a small clear fire) cooking +syrup on their posts - and this chimaera waiting with his deadly engine. +To him, enter at last the cook, strolling down the sandhill from Equator +Town, listless, vain and graceful; with no thought of alarm. As +soon as he was well within range, the travestied monarch fired the six +shots over his head, at his feet, and on either hand of him: the second +Apemama warning, startling in itself, fatal in significance, for the +next time his majesty will aim to hit. I am told the king is a +crack shot; that when he aims to kill, the grave may be got ready; and +when he aims to miss, misses by so near a margin that the culprit tastes +six times the bitterness of death. The effect upon the cook I +had an opportunity of seeing for myself. My wife and I were returning +from the sea-side of the island, when we spied one coming to meet us +at a very quick, disordered pace, between a walk and a run. As +we drew nearer we saw it was the cook, beside himself with some emotion, +his usual warm, mulatto colour declined into a bluish pallor. +He passed us without word or gesture, staring on us with the face of +a Satan, and plunged on across the wood for the unpeopled quarter of +the island and the long, desert beach, where he might rage to and fro +unseen, and froth out the vials of his wrath, fear, and humiliation. +Doubtless in the curses that he there uttered to the bursting surf and +the tropic birds, the name of the Kaupoi - the rich man - was frequently +repeated. I had made him the laughing-stock of the village in +the affair of the king’s dumplings; I had brought him by my machinations +into disgrace and the immediate jeopardy of his days; last, and perhaps +bitterest, he had found me there by the way to spy upon him in the hour +of his disorder.<br> +<br> +Time passed, and we saw no more of him. The season of the full +moon came round, when a man thinks shame to lie sleeping; and I continued +until late - perhaps till twelve or one in the morning - to walk on +the bright sand and in the tossing shadow of the palms. I played, +as I wandered, on a flageolet, which occupied much of my attention; +the fans overhead rattled in the wind with a metallic chatter; and a +bare foot falls at any rate almost noiseless on that shifting soil. +Yet when I got back to Equator Town, where all the lights were out, +and my wife (who was still awake, and had been looking forth) asked +me who it was that followed me, I thought she spoke in jest. ‘Not +at all,’ she said. ‘I saw him twice as you passed, +walking close at your heels. He only left you at the corner of +the maniap’; he must be still behind the cook-house.’ +Thither I ran - like a fool, without any weapon - and came face to face +with the cook. He was within my tapu-line, which was death in +itself; he could have no business there at such an hour but either to +steal or to kill; guilt made him timorous; and he turned and fled before +me in the night in silence. As he went I kicked him in that place +where honour lies, and he gave tongue faintly like an injured mouse. +At the moment I daresay he supposed it was a deadly instrument that +touched him.<br> +<br> +What had the man been after? I have found my music better qualified +to scatter than to collect an audience. Amateur as I was, I could +not suppose him interested in my reading of the <i>Carnival of Venice</i>, +or that he would deny himself his natural rest to follow my variations +on <i>The Ploughboy</i>. And whatever his design, it was impossible +I should suffer him to prowl by night among the houses. A word +to the king, and the man were not, his case being far beyond pardon. +But it is one thing to kill a man yourself; quite another to bear tales +behind his back and have him shot by a third party; and I determined +to deal with the fellow in some method of my own. I told Ah Fu +the story, and bade him fetch me the cook whenever he should find him. +I had supposed this would be a matter of difficulty; and far from that, +he came of his own accord: an act really of desperation, since his life +hung by my silence, and the best he could hope was to be forgotten. +Yet he came with an assured countenance, volunteered no apology or explanation, +complained of injuries received, and pretended he was unable to sit +down. I suppose I am the weakest man God made; I had kicked him +in the least vulnerable part of his big carcase; my foot was bare, and +I had not even hurt my foot. Ah Fu could not control his merriment. +On my side, knowing what must be the nature of his apprehensions, I +found in so much impudence a kind of gallantry, and secretly admired +the man. I told him I should say nothing of his night’s +adventure to the king; that I should still allow him, when he had an +errand, to come within my tapu-line by day; but if ever I found him +there after the set of the sun I would shoot him on the spot; and to +the proof showed him a revolver. He must have been incredibly +relieved; but he showed no sign of it, took himself off with his usual +dandy nonchalance, and was scarce seen by us again.<br> +<br> +These five, then, with the substitution of the steward for the cook, +came and went, and were our only visitors. The circle of the tapu +held at arm’s-length the inhabitants of the village. As +for ‘my pamily,’ they dwelt like nuns in their enclosure; +only once have I met one of them abroad, and she was the king’s +sister, and the place in which I found her (the island infirmary) was +very likely privileged. There remains only the king to be accounted +for. He would come strolling over, always alone, a little before +a meal-time, take a chair, and talk and eat with us like an old family +friend. Gilbertine etiquette appears defective on the point of +leave-taking. It may be remembered we had trouble in the matter +with Karaiti; and there was something childish and disconcerting in +Tembinok’s abrupt ‘I want go home now,’ accompanied +by a kind of ducking rise, and followed by an unadorned retreat. +It was the only blot upon his manners, which were otherwise plain, decent, +sensible, and dignified. He never stayed long nor drank much, +and copied our behaviour where he perceived it to differ from his own. +Very early in the day, for instance, he ceased eating with his knife. +It was plain he was determined in all things to wring profit from our +visit, and chiefly upon etiquette. The quality of his white visitors +puzzled and concerned him; he would bring up name after name, and ask +if its bearer were a ‘big chiep,’ or even a ‘chiep’ +at all - which, as some were my excellent good friends, and none were +actually born in the purple, became at times embarrassing. He +was struck to learn that our classes were distinguishable by their speech, +and that certain words (for instance) were tapu on the quarter-deck +of a man-of-war; and he begged in consequence that we should watch and +correct him on the point. We were able to assure him that he was +beyond correction. His vocabulary is apt and ample to an extraordinary +degree. God knows where he collected it, but by some instinct +or some accident he has avoided all profane or gross expressions. +‘Obliged,’ ‘stabbed,’ ‘gnaw,’ ‘lodge,’ +‘power,’ ‘company,’ ‘slender,’ ‘smooth,’ +and ‘wonderful,’ are a few of the unexpected words that +enrich his dialect. Perhaps what pleased him most was to hear +about saluting the quarter-deck of a man-of-war. In his gratitude +for this hint he became fulsome. ‘Schooner cap’n no +tell me,’ he cried; ‘I think no tavvy! You tavvy too +much; tavvy ‘teama’, tavvy man-a-wa’. I think +you tavvy everything.’ Yet he gravelled me often enough with his +perpetual questions; and the false Mr. Barlow stood frequently exposed +before the royal Sandford. I remember once in particular. +We were showing the magic-lantern; a slide of Windsor Castle was put +in, and I told him there was the ‘outch’ of Victoreea. +‘How many pathom he high?’ he asked, and I was dumb before +him. It was the builder, the indefatigable architect of palaces, +that spoke; collector though he was, he did not collect useless information; +and all his questions had a purpose. After etiquette, government, +law, the police, money, and medicine were his chief interests - things +vitally important to himself as a king and the father of his people. +It was my part not only to supply new information, but to correct the +old. ‘My patha he tell me,’ or ‘White man he +tell me,’ would be his constant beginning; ‘You think he +lie?’ Sometimes I thought he did. Tembinok’ +once brought me a difficulty of this kind, which I was long of comprehending. +A schooner captain had told him of Captain Cook; the king was much interested +in the story; and turned for more information - not to Mr. Stephen’s +Dictionary, not to the <i>Britannica</i>, but to the Bible in the Gilbert +Island version (which consists chiefly of the New Testament and the +Psalms). Here he sought long and earnestly; Paul he found, and +Festus and Alexander the coppersmith: no word of Cook. The inference +was obvious: the explorer was a myth. So hard it is, even for +a man of great natural parts like Tembinok’, to grasp the ideas +of a new society and culture.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER V - KING AND COMMONS<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +We saw but little of the commons of the isle. At first we met +them at the well, where they washed their linen and we drew water for +the table. The combination was distasteful; and, having a tyrant +at command, we applied to the king and had the place enclosed in our +tapu. It was one of the few favours which Tembinok’ visibly +boggled about granting, and it may be conceived how little popular it +made the strangers. Many villagers passed us daily going afield; +but they fetched a wide circuit round our tapu, and seemed to avert +their looks. At times we went ourselves into the village - a strange +place. Dutch by its canals, Oriental by the height and steepness +of the roofs, which looked at dusk like temples; but we were rarely +called into a house: no welcome, no friendship, was offered us; and +of home life we had but the one view: the waking of a corpse, a frigid, +painful scene: the widow holding on her lap the cold, bluish body of +her husband, and now partaking of the refreshments which made the round +of the company, now weeping and kissing the pale mouth. (‘I +fear you feel this affliction deeply,’ said the Scottish minister. +‘Eh, sir, and that I do!’ replied the widow. ‘I’ve +been greetin’ a’ nicht; an’ noo I’m just gaun +to sup this bit parritch, and then I’ll begin an’ greet +again.’) In our walks abroad I have always supposed the +islanders avoided us, perhaps from distaste, perhaps by order; and those +whom we met we took generally by surprise. The surface of the +isle is diversified with palm groves, thickets, and romantic dingles +four feet deep, relics of old taro plantation; and it is thus possible +to stumble unawares on folk resting or hiding from their work. +About pistol-shot from our township there lay a pond in the bottom of +a jungle; here the maids of the isle came to bathe, and were several +times alarmed by our intrusion. Not for them are the bright cold +rivers of Tahiti or Upolu, not for them to splash and laugh in the hour +of the dusk with a villageful of gay companions; but to steal here solitary, +to crouch in a place like a cow-wallow, and wash (if that can be called +washing) in lukewarm mud, brown as their own skins. Other, but +still rare, encounters occur to my memory. I was several times +arrested by a tender sound in the bush of voices talking, soft as flutes +and with quiet intonations. Hope told a flattering tale; I put +aside the leaves; and behold! in place of the expected dryads, a pair +of all too solid ladies squatting over a clay pipe in the ungraceful +<i>ridi</i>. The beauty of the voice and the eye was all that +remained to those vast dames; but that of the voice was indeed exquisite. +It is strange I should have never heard a more winning sound of speech, +yet the dialect should be one remarkable for violent, ugly, and outlandish +vocables; so that Tembinok’ himself declared it made him weary, +and professed to find repose in talking English.<br> +<br> +The state of this folk, of whom I saw so little, I can merely guess +at. The king himself explains the situation with some art. +‘No; I no pay them,’ he once said. ‘I give them +tobacco. They work for me <i>all the same brothers</i>.’ +It is true there was a brother once in Arden! But we prefer the +shorter word. They bear every servile mark, - levity like a child’s, +incurable idleness, incurious content. The insolence of the cook +was a trait of his own; not so his levity, which he shared with the +innocent Uncle Parker. With equal unconcern both gambolled under +the shadow of the gallows, and took liberties with death that might +have surprised a careless student of man’s nature. I wrote +of Parker that he behaved like a boy of ten: what was he else, being +a slave of sixty? He had passed all his years in school, fed, +clad, thought for, commanded; and had grown familiar and coquetted with +the fear of punishment. By terror you may drive men long, but +not far. Here, in Apemama, they work at the constant and the instant +peril of their lives; and are plunged in a kind of lethargy of laziness. +It is common to see one go afield in his stiff mat ungirt, so that he +walks elbows-in like a trussed fowl; and whatsoever his right hand findeth +to do, the other must be off duty holding on his clothes. It is +common to see two men carrying between them on a pole a single bucket +of water. To make two bites of a cherry is good enough: to make +two burthens of a soldier’s kit, for a distance of perhaps half +a furlong, passes measure. Woman, being the less childish animal, +is less relaxed by servile conditions. Even in the king’s +absence, even when they were alone, I have seen Apemama women work with +constancy. But the outside to be hoped for in a man is that he +may attack his task in little languid fits, and lounge between-whiles. +So I have seen a painter, with his pipe going, and a friend by the studio +fireside. You might suppose the race to lack civility, even vitality, +until you saw them in the dance. Night after night, and sometimes +day after day, they rolled out their choruses in the great Speak House +- solemn andantes and adagios, led by the clapped hand, and delivered +with an energy that shook the roof. The time was not so slow, +though it was slow for the islands; but I have chosen rather to indicate +the effect upon the hearer. Their music had a church-like character +from near at hand, and seemed to European ears more regular than the +run of island music. Twice I have heard a discord regularly solved. +From farther off, heard at Equator Town for instance, the measures rose +and fell and crepitated like the barking of hounds in a distant kennel.<br> +<br> +The slaves are certainly not overworked - children of ten do more without +fatigue - and the Apemama labourers have holidays, when the singing +begins early in the afternoon. The diet is hard; copra and a sweetmeat +of pounded pandanus are the only dishes I observed outside the palace; +but there seems no defect in quantity, and the king shares with them +his turtles. Three came in a boat from Kuria during our stay; +one was kept for the palace, one sent to us, one presented to the village. +It is the habit of the islanders to cook the turtle in its carapace; +we had been promised the shells, and we asked a tapu on this foolish +practice. The face of Tembinok’ darkened and he answered +nothing. Hesitation in the question of the well I could understand, +for water is scarce on a low island; that he should refuse to interfere +upon a point of cookery was more than I had dreamed of; and I gathered +(rightly or wrongly) that he was scrupulous of touching in the least +degree the private life and habits of his slaves. So that even +here, in full despotism, public opinion has weight; even here, in the +midst of slavery, freedom has a corner.<br> +<br> +Orderly, sober, and innocent, life flows in the isle from day to day +as in a model plantation under a model planter. It is impossible +to doubt the beneficence of that stern rule. A curious politeness, +a soft and gracious manner, something effeminate and courtly, distinguishes +the islanders of Apemama; it is talked of by all the traders, it was +felt even by residents so little beloved as ourselves, and noticeable +even in the cook, and even in that scoundrel’s hours of insolence. +The king, with his manly and plain bearing, stood out alone; you might +say he was the only Gilbert Islander in Apemama. Violence, so +common in Butaritari, seems unknown. So are theft and drunkenness. +I am assured the experiment has been made of leaving sovereigns on the +beach before the village; they lay there untouched. In all our +time on the island I was but once asked for drink. This was by +a mighty plausible fellow, wearing European clothes and speaking excellent +English - Tamaiti his name, or, as the whites have now corrupted it, +‘Tom White’: one of the king’s supercargoes at three +pounds a month and a percentage, a medical man besides, and in his private +hours a wizard. He found me one day in the outskirts of the village, +in a secluded place, hot and private, where the taro-pits are deep and +the plants high. Here he buttonholed me, and, looking about him +like a conspirator, inquired if I had gin.<br> +<br> +I told him I had. He remarked that gin was forbidden, lauded the +prohibition a while, and then went on to explain that he was a doctor, +or ‘dogstar’ as he pronounced the word, that gin was necessary +to him for his medical infusions, that he was quite out of it, and that +he would be obliged to me for some in a bottle. I told him I had +passed the king my word on landing; but since his case was so exceptional, +I would go down to the palace at once, and had no doubt that Tembinok’ +would set me free. Tom White was immediately overwhelmed with +embarrassment and terror, besought me in the most moving terms not to +betray him, and fled my neighbourhood. He had none of the cook’s +valour; it was weeks before he dared to meet my eye; and then only by +the order of the king and on particular business.<br> +<br> +The more I viewed and admired this triumph of firm rule, the more I +was haunted and troubled by a problem, the problem (perhaps) of to-morrow +for ourselves. Here was a people protected from all serious misfortune, +relieved of all serious anxieties, and deprived of what we call our +liberty. Did they like it? and what was their sentiment toward +the ruler? The first question I could not of course ask, nor perhaps +the natives answer. Even the second was delicate; yet at last, +and under charming and strange circumstances, I found my opportunity +to put it and a man to reply. It was near the full of the moon, +with a delicious breeze; the isle was bright as day - to sleep would +have been sacrilege; and I walked in the bush, playing my pipe. +It must have been the sound of what I am pleased to call my music that +attracted in my direction another wanderer of the night. This +was a young man attired in a fine mat, and with a garland on his hair, +for he was new come from dancing and singing in the public hall; and +his body, his face, and his eyes were all of an enchanting beauty. +Every here and there in the Gilberts youths are to be found of this +absurd perfection; I have seen five of us pass half an hour in admiration +of a boy at Mariki; and Te Kop (my friend in the fine mat and garland) +I had already several times remarked, and long ago set down as the loveliest +animal in Apemama. The philtre of admiration must be very strong, +or these natives specially susceptible to its effects, for I have scarce +ever admired a person in the islands but what he has sought my particular +acquaintance. So it was with Te Kop. He led me to the ocean +side; and for an hour or two we sat smoking and talking on the resplendent +sand and under the ineffable brightness of the moon. My friend +showed himself very sensible of the beauty and amenity of the hour. +‘Good night! Good wind!’ he kept exclaiming, and as he said +the words he seemed to hug myself. I had long before invented +such reiterated expressions of delight for a character (Felipe, in the +story of <i>Olalla</i>) intended to be partly bestial. But there +was nothing bestial in Te Kop; only a childish pleasure in the moment. +He was no less pleased with his companion, or was good enough to say +so; honoured me, before he left, by calling me Te Kop; apostrophised +me as ‘My name!’ with an intonation exquisitely tender, +laying his hand at the same time swiftly on my knee; and after we had +risen, and our paths began to separate in the bush, twice cried to me +with a sort of gentle ecstasy, ‘I like you too much!’ +From the beginning he had made no secret of his terror of the king; +would not sit down nor speak above a whisper till he had put the whole +breadth of the isle between himself and his monarch, then harmlessly +asleep; and even there, even within a stone-cast of the outer sea, our +talk covered by the sound of the surf and the rattle of the wind among +the palms, continued to speak guardedly, softening his silver voice +(which rang loud enough in the chorus) and looking about him like a +man in fear of spies. The strange thing is that I should have +beheld him no more. In any other island in the whole South Seas, +if I had advanced half as far with any native, he would have been at +my door next morning, bringing and expecting gifts. But Te Kop +vanished in the bush for ever. My house, of course, was unapproachable; +but he knew where to find me on the ocean beach, where I went daily. +I was the <i>Kaupoi</i>, the rich man; my tobacco and trade were known +to be endless: he was sure of a present. I am at a loss how to +explain his behaviour, unless it be supposed that he recalled with terror +and regret a passage in our interview. Here it is:<br> +<br> +‘The king, he good man?’ I asked.<br> +<br> +‘Suppose he like you, he good man,’ replied Te Kop: ‘no +like, no good.’<br> +<br> +That is one way of putting it, of course. Te Kop himself was probably +no favourite, for he scarce appealed to my judgment as a type of industry. +And there must be many others whom the king (to adhere to the formula) +does not like. Do these unfortunates like the king? Or is +not rather the repulsion mutual? and the conscientious Tembinok’, +like the conscientious Braxfield before him, and many other conscientious +rulers and judges before either, surrounded by a considerable body of +‘grumbletonians’? Take the cook, for instance, when +he passed us by, blue with rage and terror. He was very wroth +with me; I think by all the old principles of human nature he was not +very well pleased with his sovereign. It was the rich man he sought +to waylay: I think it must have been by the turn of a hair that it was +not the king he waylaid instead. And the king gives, or seems +to give, plenty of opportunities; day and night he goes abroad alone, +whether armed or not I can but guess; and the taro-patches, where his +business must so often carry him, seem designed for assassination. +The case of the cook was heavy indeed to my conscience. I did +not like to kill my enemy at second-hand; but had I a right to conceal +from the king, who had trusted me, the dangerous secret character of +his attendant? And suppose the king should fall, what would be +the fate of the king’s friends? It was our opinion at the +time that we should pay dear for the closing of the well; that our breath +was in the king’s nostrils; that if the king should by any chance +be bludgeoned in a taro-patch, the philosophical and musical inhabitants +of Equator Town might lay aside their pleasant instruments, and betake +themselves to what defence they had, with a very dim prospect of success. +These speculations were forced upon us by an incident which I am ashamed +to betray. The schooner <i>H. L. Haseltine</i> (since capsized +at sea, with the loss of eleven lives) put into Apemama in a good hour +for us, who had near exhausted our supplies. The king, after his +habit, spent day after day on board; the gin proved unhappily to his +taste; he brought a store of it ashore with him; and for some time the +sole tyrant of the isle was half-seas-over. He was not drunk - +the man is not a drunkard, he has always stores of liquor at hand, which +he uses with moderation, - but he was muzzy, dull, and confused. +He came one day to lunch with us, and while the cloth was being laid +fell asleep in his chair. His confusion, when he awoke and found +he had been detected, was equalled by our uneasiness. When he +was gone we sat and spoke of his peril, which we thought to be in some +degree our own; of how easily the man might be surprised in such a state +by <i>grumbletonians</i>; of the strange scenes that would follow - +the royal treasures and stores at the mercy of the rabble, the palace +overrun, the garrison of women turned adrift. And as we talked +we were startled by a gun-shot and a sudden, barbaric outcry. +I believe we all changed colour; but it was only the king firing at +a dog and the chorus striking up in the Speak House. A day or +two later I learned the king was very sick; went down, diagnosed the +case; and took at once the highest medical degree by the exhibition +of bicarbonate of soda. Within the hour Richard was himself again; +and I found him at the unfinished house, enjoying the double pleasure +of directing Rubam and making a dinner of cocoa-nut dumplings, and all +eagerness to have the formula of this new sort of <i>pain-killer</i> +- for <i>pain-killer</i> in the islands is the generic name of medicine. +So ended the king’s modest spree and our anxiety.<br> +<br> +On the face of things, I ought to say, loyalty appeared unshaken. +When the schooner at last returned for us, after much experience of +baffling winds, she brought a rumour that Tebureimoa had declared war +on Apemama. Tembinok’ became a new man; his face radiant; +his attitude, as I saw him preside over a council of chiefs in one of +the palace maniap’s, eager as a boy’s; his voice sounding +abroad, shrill and jubilant, over half the compound. War is what +he wants, and here was his chance. The English captain, when he +flung his arms in the lagoon, had forbidden him (except in one case) +all military adventures in the future: here was the case arrived. +All morning the council sat; men were drilled, arms were bought, the +sound of firing disturbed the afternoon; the king devised and communicated +to me his plan of campaign, which was highly elaborate and ingenious, +but perhaps a trifle fine-spun for the rough and random vicissitudes +of war. And in all this bustle the temper of the people appeared +excellent, an unwonted animation in every face, and even Uncle Parker +burning with military zeal.<br> +<br> +Of course it was a false alarm. Tebureimoa had other fish to fry. +The ambassador who accompanied us on our return to Butaritari found +him retired to a small island on the reef, in a huff with the Old Men, +a tiff with the traders, and more fear of insurrection at home than +appetite for wars abroad. The plenipotentiary had been placed +under my protection; and we solemnly saluted when we met. He proved +an excellent fisherman, and caught bonito over the ship’s side. +He pulled a good oar, and made himself useful for a whole fiery afternoon, +towing the becalmed <i>Equator</i> off Mariki. He went to his +post and did no good. He returned home again, having done no harm. +<i>O si sic omnes</i>!<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER VI - THE KING OF APEMAMA: DEVIL-WORK<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +The ocean beach of Apemama was our daily resort. The coast is +broken by shallow bays. The reef is detached, elevated, and includes +a lagoon about knee-deep, the unrestful spending-basin of the surf. +The beach is now of fine sand, now of broken coral. The trend +of the coast being convex, scarce a quarter of a mile of it is to be +seen at once; the land being so low, the horizon appears within a stone-cast; +and the narrow prospect enhances the sense of privacy. Man avoids +the place - even his footprints are uncommon; but a great number of +birds hover and pipe there fishing, and leave crooked tracks upon the +sand. Apart from these, the only sound (and I was going to say +the only society), is that of the breakers on the reef.<br> +<br> +On each projection of the coast, the bank of coral clinkers immediately +above the beach has been levelled, and a pillar built, perhaps breast-high. +These are not sepulchral; all the dead being buried on the inhabited +side of the island, close to men’s houses, and (what is worse) +to their wells. I was told they were to protect the isle against +inroads from the sea - divine or diabolical martellos, probably sacred +to Taburik, God of Thunder.<br> +<br> +The bay immediately opposite Equator Town, which we called Fu Bay, in +honour of our cook, was thus fortified on either horn. It was +well sheltered by the reef, the enclosed water clear and tranquil, the +enclosing beach curved like a horseshoe, and both steep and broad. +The path debouched about the midst of the re-entrant angle, the woods +stopping some distance inland. In front, between the fringe of +the wood and the crown of the beach, there had been designed a regular +figure, like the court for some new variety of tennis, with borders +of round stones imbedded, and pointed at the angles with low posts, +likewise of stone. This was the king’s Pray Place. +When he prayed, what he prayed for, and to whom he addressed his supplications +I could never learn. The ground was tapu.<br> +<br> +In the angle, by the mouth of the path, stood a deserted maniap’. +Near by there had been a house before our coming, which was now transported +and figured for the moment in Equator Town. It had been, and it +would be again when we departed, the residence of the guardian and wizard +of the spot - Tamaiti. Here, in this lone place, within sound +of the sea, he had his dwelling and uncanny duties. I cannot call +to mind another case of a man living on the ocean side of any open atoll; +and Tamaiti must have had strong nerves, the greater confidence in his +own spells, or, what I believe to be the truth, an enviable scepticism. +Whether Tamaiti had any guardianship of the Pray Place I never heard. +But his own particular chapel stood farther back in the fringe of the +wood. It was a tree of respectable growth. Around it there +was drawn a circle of stones like those that enclosed the Pray Place; +in front, facing towards the sea, a stone of a much greater size, and +somewhat hollowed, like a piscina, stood close against the trunk; in +front of that again a conical pile of gravel. In the hollow of +what I have called the piscina (though it proved to be a magic seat) +lay an offering of green cocoa-nuts; and when you looked up you found +the boughs of the tree to be laden with strange fruit: palm-branches +elaborately plaited, and beautiful models of canoes, finished and rigged +to the least detail. The whole had the appearance of a mid-summer +and sylvan Christmas-tree <i>al fresco</i>. Yet we were already +well enough acquainted in the Gilberts to recognise it, at the first +sight, for a piece of wizardry, or, as they say in the group, of Devil-work.<br> +<br> +The plaited palms were what we recognised. We had seen them before +on Apaiang, the most christianised of all these islands; where excellent +Mr. Bingham lived and laboured and has left golden memories; whence +all the education in the northern Gilberts traces its descent; and where +we were boarded by little native Sunday-school misses in clean frocks, +with demure faces, and singing hymns as to the manner born.<br> +<br> +Our experience of Devil-work at Apaiang had been as follows:- It chanced +we were benighted at the house of Captain Tierney. My wife and +I lodged with a Chinaman some half a mile away; and thither Captain +Reid and a native boy escorted us by torch-light. On the way the +torch went out, and we took shelter in a small and lonely Christian +chapel to rekindle it. Stuck in the rafters of the chapel was +a branch of knotted palm. ‘What is that?’ I asked. +‘O, that’s Devil-work,’ said the Captain. ‘And +what is Devil-work?’ I inquired. ‘If you like, I’ll +show you some when we get to Johnnie’s,’ he replied. +‘Johnnie’s’ was a quaint little house upon the crest +of the beach, raised some three feet on posts, approached by stairs; +part walled, part trellised. Trophies of advertisement-photographs +were hung up within for decoration. There was a table and a recess-bed, +in which Mrs. Stevenson slept; while I camped on the matted floor with +Johnnie, Mrs. Johnnie, her sister, and the devil’s own regiment +of cockroaches. Hither was summoned an old witch, who looked the +part to horror. The lamp was set on the floor; the crone squatted +on the threshold, a green palm-branch in her hand, the light striking +full on her aged features and picking out behind her, from the black +night, timorous faces of spectators. Our sorceress began with +a chanted incantation; it was in the old tongue, for which I had no +interpreter; but ever and again there ran among the crowd outside that +laugh which every traveller in the islands learns so soon to recognise, +- the laugh of terror. Doubtless these half-Christian folk were +shocked, these half-heathen folk alarmed. Chench or Taburik thus +invoked, we put our questions; the witch knotted the leaves, here a +leaf and there a leaf, plainly on some arithmetical system; studied +the result with great apparent contention of mind; and gave the answers. +Sidney Colvin was in robust health and gone a journey; and we should +have a fair wind upon the morrow: that was the result of our consultation, +for which we paid a dollar. The next day dawned cloudless and +breathless; but I think Captain Reid placed a secret reliance on the +sibyl, for the schooner was got ready for sea. By eight the lagoon +was flawed with long cat’s-paws, and the palms tossed and rustled; +before ten we were clear of the passage and skimming under all plain +sail, with bubbling scuppers. So we had the breeze, which was +well worth a dollar in itself; but the bulletin about my friend in England +proved, some six months later, when I got my mail, to have been groundless. +Perhaps London lies beyond the horizon of the island gods.<br> +<br> +Tembinok’, in his first dealings, showed himself sternly averse +from superstition: and had not the <i>Equator</i> delayed, we might +have left the island and still supposed him an agnostic. It chanced +one day, however, that he came to our maniap’, and found Mrs. +Stevenson in the midst of a game of patience. She explained the +game as well as she was able, and wound up jocularly by telling him +this was her devil-work, and if she won, the <i>Equator</i> would arrive +next day. Tembinok’ must have drawn a long breath; we were +not so high-and-dry after all; he need no longer dissemble, and he plunged +at once into confessions. He made devil-work every day, he told +us, to know if ships were coming in; and thereafter brought us regular +reports of the results. It was surprising how regularly he was +wrong; but he always had an explanation ready. There had been +some schooner in the offing out of view; but either she was not bound +for Apemama, or had changed her course, or lay becalmed. I used +to regard the king with veneration as he thus publicly deceived himself. +I saw behind him all the fathers of the Church, all the philosophers +and men of science of the past; before him, all those that are to come; +himself in the midst; the whole visionary series bowed over the same +task of welding incongruities. To the end Tembinok’ spoke +reluctantly of the island gods and their worship, and I learned but +little. Taburik is the god of thunder, and deals in wind and weather. +A while since there were wizards who could call him down in the form +of lightning. ‘My patha he tell me he see: you think he +lie?’ Tienti - pronounced something like ‘Chench,’ +and identified by his majesty with the devil - sends and removes bodily +sickness. He is whistled for in the Paumotuan manner, and is said +to appear; but the king has never seen him. The doctors treat +disease by the aid of Chench: eclectic Tembinok’ at the same time +administering ‘pain-killer’ from his medicine-chest, so +as to give the sufferer both chances. ‘I think mo’ +betta,’ observed his majesty, with more than his usual self-approval. +Apparently the gods are not jealous, and placidly enjoy both shrine +and priest in common. On Tamaiti’s medicine-tree, for instance, +the model canoes are hung up <i>ex voto</i> for a prosperous voyage, +and must therefore be dedicated to Taburik, god of the weather; but +the stone in front is the place of sick folk come to pacify Chench.<br> +<br> +It chanced, by great good luck, that even as we spoke of these affairs, +I found myself threatened with a cold. I do not suppose I was +ever glad of a cold before, or shall ever be again; but the opportunity +to see the sorcerers at work was priceless, and I called in the faculty +of Apemama. They came in a body, all in their Sunday’s best +and hung with wreaths and shells, the insignia of the devil-worker. +Tamaiti I knew already: Terutak’ I saw for the first time - a +tall, lank, raw-boned, serious North-Sea fisherman turned brown; and +there was a third in their company whose name I never heard, and who +played to Tamaiti the part of <i>famulus</i>. Tamaiti took me +in hand first, and led me, conversing agreeably, to the shores of Fu +Bay. The <i>famulus</i> climbed a tree for some green cocoa-nuts. +Tamaiti himself disappeared a while in the bush and returned with coco +tinder, dry leaves, and a spray of waxberry. I was placed on the +stone, with my back to the tree and my face to windward; between me +and the gravel-heap one of the green nuts was set; and then Tamaiti +(having previously bared his feet, for he had come in canvas shoes, +which tortured him) joined me within the magic circle, hollowed out +the top of the gravel-heap, built his fire in the bottom, and applied +a match: it was one of Bryant and May’s. The flame was slow +to catch, and the irreverent sorcerer filled in the time with talk of +foreign places - of London, and ‘companies,’ and how much +money they had; of San Francisco, and the nefarious fogs, ‘all +the same smoke,’ which had been so nearly the occasion of his +death. I tried vainly to lead him to the matter in hand. +‘Everybody make medicine,’ he said lightly. And when +I asked him if he were himself a good practitioner - ‘No savvy,’ +he replied, more lightly still. At length the leaves burst in +a flame, which he continued to feed; a thick, light smoke blew in my +face, and the flames streamed against and scorched my clothes. +He in the meanwhile addressed, or affected to address, the evil spirit, +his lips moving fast, but without sound; at the same time he waved in +the air and twice struck me on the breast with his green spray. +So soon as the leaves were consumed the ashes were buried, the green +spray was imbedded in the gravel, and the ceremony was at an end.<br> +<br> +A reader of the <i>Arabian Nights</i> felt quite at home. Here +was the suffumigation; here was the muttering wizard; here was the desert +place to which Aladdin was decoyed by the false uncle. But they +manage these things better in fiction. The effect was marred by +the levity of the magician, entertaining his patient with small talk +like an affable dentist, and by the incongruous presence of Mr. Osbourne +with a camera. As for my cold, it was neither better nor worse.<br> +<br> +I was now handed over to Terutak’, the leading practitioner or +medical baronet of Apemama. His place is on the lagoon side of +the island, hard by the palace. A rail of light wood, some two +feet high, encloses an oblong piece of gravel like the king’s +Pray Place; in the midst is a green tree; below, a stone table bears +a pair of boxes covered with a fine mat; and in front of these an offering +of food, a cocoa-nut, a piece of taro or a fish, is placed daily. +On two sides the enclosure is lined with maniap’s; and one of +our party, who had been there to sketch, had remarked a daily concourse +of people and an extraordinary number of sick children; for this is +in fact the infirmary of Apemama. The doctor and myself entered +the sacred place alone; the boxes and the mat were displaced; and I +was enthroned in their stead upon the stone, facing once more to the +east. For a while the sorcerer remained unseen behind me, making +passes in the air with a branch of palm. Then he struck lightly +on the brim of my straw hat; and this blow he continued to repeat at +intervals, sometimes brushing instead my arm and shoulder. I have +had people try to mesmerise me a dozen times, and never with the least +result. But at the first tap - on a quarter no more vital than +my hat-brim, and from nothing more virtuous than a switch of palm wielded +by a man I could not even see - sleep rushed upon me like an armed man. +My sinews fainted, my eyes closed, my brain hummed, with drowsiness. +I resisted, at first instinctively, then with a certain flurry of despair, +in the end successfully; if that were indeed success which enabled me +to scramble to my feet, to stumble home somnambulous, to cast myself +at once upon my bed, and sink at once into a dreamless stupor. +When I awoke my cold was gone. So I leave a matter that I do not +understand.<br> +<br> +Meanwhile my appetite for curiosities (not usually very keen) had been +strangely whetted by the sacred boxes. They were of pandanus wood, +oblong in shape, with an effect of pillaring along the sides like straw +work, lightly fringed with hair or fibre and standing on four legs. +The outside was neat as a toy; the inside a mystery I was resolved to +penetrate. But there was a lion in the path. I might not +approach Terutak’, since I had promised to buy nothing in the +island; I dared not have recourse to the king, for I had already received +from him more gifts than I knew how to repay. In this dilemma +(the schooner being at last returned) we hit on a device. Captain +Reid came forward in my stead, professed an unbridled passion for the +boxes, and asked and obtained leave to bargain for them with the wizard. +That same afternoon the captain and I made haste to the infirmary, entered +the enclosure, raised the mat, and had begun to examine the boxes at +our leisure, when Terutak’s wife bounced out of one of the nigh +houses, fell upon us, swept up the treasures, and was gone. There +was never a more absolute surprise. She came, she took, she vanished, +we had not a guess whither; and we remained, with foolish looks and +laughter on the empty field. Such was the fit prologue of our +memorable bargaining.<br> +<br> +Presently Terutak’ came, bringing Tamaiti along with him, both +smiling; and we four squatted without the rail. In the three maniap’s +of the infirmary a certain audience was gathered: the family of a sick +child under treatment, the king’s sister playing cards, a pretty +girl, who swore I was the image of her father; in all perhaps a score. +Terutak’s wife had returned (even as she had vanished) unseen, +and now sat, breathless and watchful, by her husband’s side. +Perhaps some rumour of our quest had gone abroad, or perhaps we had +given the alert by our unseemly freedom: certain, at least, that in +the faces of all present, expectation and alarm were mingled.<br> +<br> +Captain Reid announced, without preface or disguise, that I was come +to purchase; Terutak’, with sudden gravity, refused to sell. +He was pressed; he persisted. It was explained we only wanted +one: no matter, two were necessary for the healing of the sick. +He was rallied, he was reasoned with: in vain. He sat there, serious +and still, and refused. All this was only a preliminary skirmish; +hitherto no sum of money had been mentioned; but now the captain brought +his great guns to bear. He named a pound, then two, then three. +Out of the maniap’s one person after another came to join the +group, some with mere excitement, others with consternation in their +faces. The pretty girl crept to my side; it was then that - surely +with the most artless flattery - she informed me of my likeness to her +father. Tamaiti the infidel sat with hanging head and every mark +of dejection. Terutak’ streamed with sweat, his eye was +glazed, his face wore a painful rictus, his chest heaved like that of +one spent with running. The man must have been by nature covetous; +and I doubt if ever I saw moral agony more tragically displayed. +His wife by his side passionately encouraged his resistance.<br> +<br> +And now came the charge of the old guard. The captain, making +a skip, named the surprising figure of five pounds. At the word +the maniap’s were emptied. The king’s sister flung +down her cards and came to the front to listen, a cloud on her brow. +The pretty girl beat her breast and cried with wearisome iteration that +if the box were hers I should have it. Terutak’s wife was +beside herself with pious fear, her face discomposed, her voice (which +scarce ceased from warning and encouragement) shrill as a whistle. +Even Terutak’ lost that image-like immobility which he had hitherto +maintained. He rocked on his mat, threw up his closed knees alternately, +and struck himself on the breast after the manner of dancers. +But he came gold out of the furnace; and with what voice was left him +continued to reject the bribe.<br> +<br> +And now came a timely interjection. ‘Money will not heal +the sick,’ observed the king’s sister sententiously; and +as soon as I heard the remark translated my eyes were unsealed, and +I began to blush for my employment. Here was a sick child, and +I sought, in the view of its parents, to remove the medicine-box. +Here was the priest of a religion, and I (a heathen millionaire) was +corrupting him to sacrilege. Here was a greedy man, torn in twain +betwixt greed and conscience; and I sat by and relished, and lustfully +renewed his torments. <i>Ave, Caesar</i>! Smothered in a +corner, dormant but not dead, we have all the one touch of nature: an +infant passion for the sand and blood of the arena. So I brought +to an end my first and last experience of the joys of the millionaire, +and departed amid silent awe. Nowhere else can I expect to stir +the depths of human nature by an offer of five pounds; nowhere else, +even at the expense of millions, could I hope to see the evil of riches +stand so legibly exposed. Of all the bystanders, none but the +king’s sister retained any memory of the gravity and danger of +the thing in hand. Their eyes glowed, the girl beat her breast, +in senseless animal excitement. Nothing was offered them; they +stood neither to gain nor to lose; at the mere name and wind of these +great sums Satan possessed them.<br> +<br> +From this singular interview I went straight to the palace; found the +king; confessed what I had been doing; begged him, in my name, to compliment +Terutak’ on his virtue, and to have a similar box made for me +against the return of the schooner. Tembinok’, Rubam, and +one of the Daily Papers - him we used to call ‘the Facetiae Column’ +- laboured for a while of some idea, which was at last intelligibly +delivered. They feared I thought the box would cure me; whereas, +without the wizard, it was useless; and when I was threatened with another +cold I should do better to rely on pain-killer. I explained I +merely wished to keep it in my ‘outch’ as a thing made in +Apemama and these honest men were much relieved.<br> +<br> +Late the same evening, my wife, crossing the isle to windward, was aware +of singing in the bush. Nothing is more common in that hour and +place than the jubilant carol of the toddy-cutter, swinging high overhead, +beholding below him the narrow ribbon of the isle, the surrounding field +of ocean, and the fires of the sunset. But this was of a graver +character, and seemed to proceed from the ground-level. Advancing +a little in the thicket, Mrs. Stevenson saw a clear space, a fine mat +spread in the midst, and on the mat a wreath of white flowers and one +of the devil-work boxes. A woman - whom we guess to have been +Mrs. Terutak’ - sat in front, now drooping over the box like a +mother over a cradle, now lifting her face and directing her song to +heaven. A passing toddy-cutter told my wife that she was praying. +Probably she did not so much pray as deprecate; and perhaps even the +ceremony was one of disenchantment. For the box was already doomed; +it was to pass from its green medicine-tree, reverend precinct, and +devout attendants; to be handled by the profane; to cross three seas; +to come to land under the foolscap of St. Paul’s; to be domesticated +within the hail of Lillie Bridge; there to be dusted by the British +housemaid, and to take perhaps the roar of London for the voice of the +outer sea along the reef. Before even we had finished dinner Chench +had begun his journey, and one of the newspapers had already placed +the box upon my table as the gift of Tembinok’.<br> +<br> +I made haste to the palace, thanked the king, but offered to restore +the box, for I could not bear that the sick of the island should be +made to suffer. I was amazed by his reply. Terutak’, +it appeared, had still three or four in reserve against an accident; +and his reluctance, and the dread painted at first on every face, was +not in the least occasioned by the prospect of medical destitution, +but by the immediate divinity of Chench. How much more did I respect +the king’s command, which had been able to extort in a moment +and for nothing a sacrilegious favour that I had in vain solicited with +millions! But now I had a difficult task in front of me; it was +not in my view that Terutak’ should suffer by his virtue; and +I must persuade the king to share my opinion, to let me enrich one of +his subjects, and (what was yet more delicate) to pay for my present. +Nothing shows the king in a more becoming light than the fact that I +succeeded. He demurred at the principle; he exclaimed, when he +heard it, at the sum. ‘Plenty money!’ cried he, with +contemptuous displeasure. But his resistance was never serious; +and when he had blown off his ill-humour - ‘A’ right,’ +said he. ‘You give him. Mo’ betta.’<br> +<br> +Armed with this permission, I made straight for the infirmary. +The night was now come, cool, dark, and starry. On a mat hard +by a clear fire of wood and coco shell, Terutak’ lay beside his +wife. Both were smiling; the agony was over, the king’s +command had reconciled (I must suppose) their agitating scruples; and +I was bidden to sit by them and share the circulating pipe. I +was a little moved myself when I placed five gold sovereigns in the +wizard’s hand; but there was no sign of emotion in Terutak’ +as he returned them, pointed to the palace, and named Tembinok’. +It was a changed scene when I had managed to explain. Terutak’, +long, dour Scots fisherman as he was, expressed his satisfaction within +bounds; but the wife beamed; and there was an old gentleman present +- her father, I suppose - who seemed nigh translated. His eyes +stood out of his head; ‘<i>Kaupoi, Kaupoi</i> - rich, rich!’ +ran on his lips like a refrain; and he could not meet my eye but what +he gurgled into foolish laughter.<br> +<br> +I might now go home, leaving that fire-lit family party gloating over +their new millions, and consider my strange day. I had tried and +rewarded the virtue of Terutak’. I had played the millionaire, +had behaved abominably, and then in some degree repaired my thoughtlessness. +And now I had my box, and could open it and look within. It contained +a miniature sleeping-mat and a white shell. Tamaiti, interrogated +next day as to the shell, explained it was not exactly Chench, but a +cell, or body, which he would at times inhabit. Asked why there +was a sleeping-mat, he retorted indignantly, ‘Why have you mats?’ +And this was the sceptical Tamaiti! But island scepticism is never +deeper than the lips.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +CHAPTER VII - THE KING OF APEMAMA<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +Thus all things on the island, even the priests of the gods, obey the +word of Tembinok’. He can give and take, and slay, and allay +the scruples of the conscientious, and do all things (apparently) but +interfere in the cookery of a turtle. ‘I got power’ +is his favourite word; it interlards his conversation; the thought haunts +him and is ever fresh; and when be has asked and meditates of foreign +countries, he looks up with a smile and reminds you, ‘<i>I</i> +got<i> Power</i>.’ Nor is his delight only in the possession, +but in the exercise. He rejoices in the crooked and violent paths +of kingship like a strong man to run a race, or like an artist in his +art. To feel, to use his power, to embellish his island and the +picture of the island life after a private ideal, to milk the island +vigorously, to extend his singular museum - these employ delightfully +the sum of his abilities. I never saw a man more patently in the +right trade.<br> +<br> +It would be natural to suppose this monarchy inherited intact through +generations. And so far from that, it is a thing of yesterday. +I was already a boy at school while Apemama was yet republican, ruled +by a noisy council of Old Men, and torn with incurable feuds. +And Tembinok’ is no Bourbon; rather the son of a Napoleon. +Of course he is well-born. No man need aspire high in the isles +of the Pacific unless his pedigree be long and in the upper regions +mythical. And our king counts cousinship with most of the high +families in the archipelago, and traces his descent to a shark and a +heroic woman. Directed by an oracle, she swam beyond sight of +land to meet her revolting paramour, and received at sea the seed of +a predestined family. ‘I think lie,’ is the king’s +emphatic commentary; yet he is proud of the legend. From this +illustrious beginning the fortunes of the race must have declined; and +Teñkoruti, the grandfather of Tembinok’, was the chief +of a village at the north end of the island. Kuria and Aranuka +were yet independent; Apemama itself the arena of devastating feuds. +Through this perturbed period of history the figure of Teñkoruti +stalks memorable. In war he was swift and bloody; several towns +fell to his spear, and the inhabitants were butchered to a man. +In civil life this arrogance was unheard of. When the council +of Old Men was summoned, he went to the Speak House, delivered his mind, +and left without waiting to be answered. Wisdom had spoken: let +others opine according to their folly. He was feared and hated, +and this was his pleasure. He was no poet; he cared not for arts +or knowledge. ‘My gran’patha one thing savvy, savvy +pight,’ observed the king. In some lull of their own disputes +the Old Men of Apemama adventured on the conquest of Apemama; and this +unlicked Caius Marcius was elected general of the united troops. +Success attended him; the islands were reduced, and Teñkoruti +returned to his own government, glorious and detested. He died +about 1860, in the seventieth year of his age and the full odour of +unpopularity. He was tall and lean, says his grandson, looked +extremely old, and ‘walked all the same young man.’ +The same observer gave me a significant detail. The survivors +of that rough epoch were all defaced with spearmarks; there was none +on the body of this skilful fighter. ‘I see old man, no +got a spear,’ said the king.<br> +<br> +Teñkoruti left two sons, Tembaitake and Tembinatake. Tembaitake, +our king’s father, was short, middling stout, a poet, a good genealogist, +and something of a fighter; it seems he took himself seriously, and +was perhaps scarce conscious that he was in all things the creature +and nursling of his brother. There was no shadow of dispute between +the pair: the greater man filled with alacrity and content the second +place; held the breach in war, and all the portfolios in the time of +peace; and, when his brother rated him, listened in silence, looking +on the ground. Like Teñkoruti, he was tall and lean and +a swift talker - a rare trait in the islands. He possessed every +accomplishment. He knew sorcery, he was the best genealogist of +his day, he was a poet, he could dance and make canoes and armour; and +the famous mast of Apemama, which ran one joint higher than the mainmast +of a full-rigged ship, was of his conception and design. But these +were avocations, and the man’s trade was war. ‘When +my uncle go make wa’, he laugh,’ said Tembinok’. +He forbade the use of field fortification, that protractor of native +hostilities; his men must fight in the open, and win or be beaten out +of hand; his own activity inspired his followers; and the swiftness +of his blows beat down, in one lifetime, the resistance of three islands. +He made his brother sovereign, he left his nephew absolute. ‘My +uncle make all smooth,’ said Tembinok’. ‘I mo’ +king than my patha: I got power,’ he said, with formidable relish.<br> +<br> +Such is the portrait of the uncle drawn by the nephew. I can set +beside it another by a different artist, who has often - I may say always +- delighted me with his romantic taste in narrative, but not always +- and I may say not often - persuaded me of his exactitude. I +have already denied myself the use of so much excellent matter from +the same source, that I begin to think it time to reward good resolution; +and his account of Tembinatake agrees so well with the king’s, +that it may very well be (what I hope it is) the record of a fact, and +not (what I suspect) the pleasing exercise of an imagination more than +sailorly. A., for so I had perhaps better call him, was walking +up the island after dusk, when he came on a lighted village of some +size, was directed to the chief’s house, and asked leave to rest +and smoke a pipe. ‘You will sit down, and smoke a pipe, +and wash, and eat, and sleep,’ replied the chief, ‘and to-morrow +you will go again.’ Food was brought, prayers were held +(for this was in the brief day of Christianity), and the chief himself +prayed with eloquence and seeming sincerity. All evening A. sat +and admired the man by the firelight. He was six feet high, lean, +with the appearance of many years, and an extraordinary air of breeding +and command. ‘He looked like a man who would kill you laughing,’ +said A., in singular echo of one of the king’s expressions. +And again: ‘I had been reading the Musketeer books, and he reminded +me of Aramis.’ Such is the portrait of Tembinatake, drawn +by an expert romancer.<br> +<br> +We had heard many tales of ‘my patha’; never a word of my +uncle till two days before we left. As the time approached for +our departure Tembinok’ became greatly changed; a softer, a more +melancholy, and, in particular, a more confidential man appeared in +his stead. To my wife he contrived laboriously to explain that +though he knew he must lose his father in the course of nature, he had +not minded nor realised it till the moment came; and that now he was +to lose us he repeated the experience. We showed fireworks one +evening on the terrace. It was a heavy business; the sense of +separation was in all our minds, and the talk languished. The +king was specially affected, sat disconsolate on his mat, and often +sighed. Of a sudden one of the wives stepped forth from a cluster, +came and kissed him in silence, and silently went again. It was +just such a caress as we might give to a disconsolate child, and the +king received it with a child’s simplicity. Presently after +we said good-night and withdrew; but Tembinok’ detained Mr. Osbourne, +patting the mat by his side and saying: ‘Sit down. I feel +bad, I like talk.’ Osbourne sat down by him. ‘You +like some beer?’ said he; and one of the wives produced a bottle. +The king did not partake, but sat sighing and smoking a meerschaum pipe. +‘I very sorry you go,’ he said at last. ‘Miss +Stlevens he good man, woman he good man, boy he good man; all good man. +Woman he smart all the same man. My woman’ (glancing towards +his wives) ‘he good woman, no very smart. I think Miss Stlevens +he is chiep all the same cap’n man-o-wa’. I think +Miss Stlevens he rich man all the same me. All go schoona. +I very sorry. My patha he go, my uncle he go, my cutcheons he +go, Miss Stlevens he go: all go. You no see king cry before. +King all the same man: feel bad, he cry. I very sorry.’<br> +<br> +In the morning it was the common topic in the village that the king +had wept. To me he said: ‘Last night I no can ‘peak: +too much here,’ laying his hand upon his bosom. ‘Now +you go away all the same my pamily. My brothers, my uncle go away. +All the same.’ This was said with a dejection almost passionate. +And it was the first time I had heard him name his uncle, or indeed +employ the word. The same day he sent me a present of two corselets, +made in the island fashion of plaited fibre, heavy and strong. +One had been worn by Teñkoruti, one by Tembaitake; and the gift +being gratefully received, he sent me, on the return of his messengers, +a third - that of Tembinatake. My curiosity was roused; I begged +for information as to the three wearers; and the king entered with gusto +into the details already given. Here was a strange thing, that +he should have talked so much of his family, and not once mentioned +that relative of whom he was plainly the most proud. Nay, more: +he had hitherto boasted of his father; thenceforth he had little to +say of him; and the qualities for which he had praised him in the past +were now attributed where they were due, - to the uncle. A confusion +might be natural enough among islanders, who call all the sons of their +grandfather by the common name of father. But this was not the +case with Tembinok’. Now the ice was broken the word uncle +was perpetually in his mouth; he who had been so ready to confound was +now careful to distinguish; and the father sank gradually into a self-complacent +ordinary man, while the uncle rose to his true stature as the hero and +founder of the race.<br> +<br> +The more I heard and the more I considered, the more this mystery of +Tembinok’s behaviour puzzled and attracted me. And the explanation, +when it came, was one to strike the imagination of a dramatist. +Tembinok’ had two brothers. One, detected in private trading, +was banished, then forgiven, lives to this day in the island, and is +the father of the heir-apparent, Paul. The other fell beyond forgiveness. +I have heard it was a love-affair with one of the king’s wives, +and the thing is highly possible in that romantic archipelago. +War was attempted to be levied; but Tembinok’ was too swift for +the rebels, and the guilty brother escaped in a canoe. He did +not go alone. Tembinatake had a hand in the rebellion, and the +man who had gained a kingdom for a weakling brother was banished by +that brother’s son. The fugitives came to shore in other +islands, but Tembinok’ remains to this day ignorant of their fate.<br> +<br> +So far history. And now a moment for conjecture. Tembinok’ +confused habitually, not only the attributes and merits of his father +and his uncle, but their diverse personal appearance. Before he +had even spoken, or thought to speak, of Tembinatake, he had told me +often of a tall, lean father, skilled in war, and his own schoolmaster +in genealogy and island arts. How if both were fathers, one natural, +one adoptive? How if the heir of Tembaitake, like the heir of +Tembinok’ himself, were not a son, but an adopted nephew? +How if the founder of the monarchy, while he worked for his brother, +worked at the same time for the child of his loins? + How if on the death of Tembaitake, the two stronger natures, +father and son, king and kingmaker, clashed, and Tembinok’, when +he drove out his uncle, drove out the author of his days? Here +is at least a tragedy four-square.<br> +<br> +The king took us on board in his own gig, dressed for the occasion in +the naval uniform. He had little to say, he refused refreshments, +shook us briefly by the hand, and went ashore again. That night +the palm-tops of Apemama had dipped behind the sea, and the schooner +sailed solitary under the stars.<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +<br> +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK, IN THE SOUTH SEAS ***<br> +<pre> + +******This file should be named sseas10h.htm or sseas10h.zip****** +Corrected EDITIONS of our EBooks get a new NUMBER, sseas11h.htm +VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, sseas10ah.htm + +Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we usually do not +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +We are now trying to release all our eBooks one year in advance +of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing. +Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections, +even years after the official publication date. + +Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg eBooks is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. + +Most people start at our Web sites at: +http://gutenberg.net or +http://promo.net/pg + +These Web sites include award-winning information about Project +Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new +eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!). + + +Those of you who want to download any eBook before announcement +can get to them as follows, and just download by date. This is +also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the +indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an +announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter. + +http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext04 or +ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext04 + +Or /etext03, 02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90 + +Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want, +as it appears in our Newsletters. + + +Information about Project Gutenberg (one page) + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours +to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. Our +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If the value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text +files per month: 1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+ +We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002 +If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total +will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end. + +The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks! +This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers, +which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users. + +Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated): + +eBooks Year Month + + 1 1971 July + 10 1991 January + 100 1994 January + 1000 1997 August + 1500 1998 October + 2000 1999 December + 2500 2000 December + 3000 2001 November + 4000 2001 October/November + 6000 2002 December* + 9000 2003 November* +10000 2004 January* + + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created +to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people +and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut, +Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois, +Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts, +Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New +Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio, +Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South +Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West +Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming. + +We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones +that have responded. + +As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list +will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states. +Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state. + +In answer to various questions we have received on this: + +We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally +request donations in all 50 states. If your state is not listed and +you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have, +just ask. + +While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are +not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting +donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to +donate. + +International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about +how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made +deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are +ways. + +Donations by check or money order may be sent to: + +Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +PMB 113 +1739 University Ave. +Oxford, MS 38655-4109 + +Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment +method other than by check or money order. + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by +the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN +[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154. Donations are +tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law. As fund-raising +requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be +made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +You can get up to date donation information online at: + +http://www.gutenberg.net/donation.html + + +*** + +If you can't reach Project Gutenberg, +you can always email directly to: + +Michael S. Hart hart@pobox.com + +Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message. + +We would prefer to send you information by email. + + +**The Legal Small Print** + + +(Three Pages) + +***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this eBook, even if you got it for free from +someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our +fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement +disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how +you may distribute copies of this eBook if you want to. + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS EBOOK +By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +eBook, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept +this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive +a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this eBook by +sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person +you got it from. If you received this eBook on a physical +medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request. + +ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM EBOOKS +This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBooks, +is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart +through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project"). +Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright +on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and +distribute it in the United States without permission and +without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth +below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this eBook +under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark. + +Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market +any commercial products without permission. + +To create these eBooks, the Project expends considerable +efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain +works. Despite these efforts, the Project's eBooks and any +medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other +things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged +disk or other eBook medium, a computer virus, or computer +codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. + +LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES +But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below, +[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may +receive this eBook from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook) disclaims +all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including +legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR +UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, +INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE +OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +If you discover a Defect in this eBook within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) +you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that +time to the person you received it from. If you received it +on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and +such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement +copy. If you received it electronically, such person may +choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to +receive it electronically. + +THIS EBOOK IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS +TO THE EBOOK OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or +the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the +above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you +may have other legal rights. + +INDEMNITY +You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation, +and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated +with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm +texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including +legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the +following that you do or cause: [1] distribution of this eBook, +[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the eBook, +or [3] any Defect. + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" +You may distribute copies of this eBook electronically, or by +disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this +"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg, +or: + +[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this + requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the + eBook or this "small print!" statement. You may however, + if you wish, distribute this eBook in machine readable + binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form, + including any form resulting from conversion by word + processing or hypertext software, but only so long as + *EITHER*: + + [*] The eBook, when displayed, is clearly readable, and + does *not* contain characters other than those + intended by the author of the work, although tilde + (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may + be used to convey punctuation intended by the + author, and additional characters may be used to + indicate hypertext links; OR + + [*] The eBook may be readily converted by the reader at + no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent + form by the program that displays the eBook (as is + the case, for instance, with most word processors); + OR + + [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at + no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the + eBook in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC + or other equivalent proprietary form). + +[2] Honor the eBook refund and replacement provisions of this + "Small Print!" statement. + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the + gross profits you derive calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you + don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are + payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation" + the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were + legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent + periodic) tax return. Please contact us beforehand to + let us know your plans and to work out the details. + +WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of +public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed +in machine readable form. + +The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time, +public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses. +Money should be paid to the: +"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or +software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at: +hart@pobox.com + +[Portions of this eBook's header and trailer may be reprinted only +when distributed free of all fees. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by +Michael S. Hart. Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be +used in any sales of Project Gutenberg eBooks or other materials be +they hardware or software or any other related product without +express permission.] + +*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS*Ver.02/11/02*END* +</pre></body> +</html> |